WO2015001980A1 - Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using same - Google Patents

Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015001980A1
WO2015001980A1 PCT/JP2014/066330 JP2014066330W WO2015001980A1 WO 2015001980 A1 WO2015001980 A1 WO 2015001980A1 JP 2014066330 W JP2014066330 W JP 2014066330W WO 2015001980 A1 WO2015001980 A1 WO 2015001980A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
film
acid
group
polarizing plate
protective film
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/066330
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
真一郎 鈴木
Original Assignee
コニカミノルタ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by コニカミノルタ株式会社 filed Critical コニカミノルタ株式会社
Priority to JP2015525141A priority Critical patent/JPWO2015001980A1/en
Priority to KR1020157036356A priority patent/KR101763509B1/en
Publication of WO2015001980A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015001980A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B23/00Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose
    • B32B23/20Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose comprising esters
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B23/00Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose
    • B32B23/04Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose comprising such cellulosic plastic substance as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material
    • B32B23/08Layered products comprising a layer of cellulosic plastic substances, i.e. substances obtained by chemical modification of cellulose, e.g. cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, viscose comprising such cellulosic plastic substance as the main or only constituent of a layer, which is next to another layer of the same or of a different material of synthetic resin
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/30Polarising elements
    • G02B5/3025Polarisers, i.e. arrangements capable of producing a definite output polarisation state from an unpolarised input state
    • G02B5/3033Polarisers, i.e. arrangements capable of producing a definite output polarisation state from an unpolarised input state in the form of a thin sheet or foil, e.g. Polaroid
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2307/00Properties of the layers or laminate
    • B32B2307/40Properties of the layers or laminate having particular optical properties
    • B32B2307/42Polarizing, birefringent, filtering
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B2457/00Electrical equipment
    • B32B2457/20Displays, e.g. liquid crystal displays, plasma displays
    • B32B2457/202LCD, i.e. liquid crystal displays

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a polarizing plate and a liquid crystal display device using the same.
  • a liquid crystal display device is generally composed of a liquid crystal cell in which a transparent electrode, a liquid crystal layer, a color filter and the like are sandwiched between glass plates, and two polarizing plates provided on both sides thereof. Each polarizing plate is usually configured to sandwich a polarizer between two transparent resin films.
  • a cellulose ester film such as cellulose acetate is often used for the purpose of protecting a polarizer (see, for example, International Publication No. 2011/016279 pamphlet).
  • the cellulose ester film has a high transmittance, and by immersing it in an alkaline aqueous solution to saponify its surface and make it hydrophilic, excellent adhesion to a polarizer is realized.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and a solution to the problem is to provide means capable of improving reworkability in a polarizing plate in which a thin cellulose ester film is used as one protective film. It is.
  • the inventor of the present invention uses a polyester film made of polyester as the protective film A in the polarizing plate having the protective film A, the polarizer and the protective film B in this order.
  • the cellulose ester film is (1 )
  • the film thickness is in the range of 15 to 60 ⁇ m
  • (2) the thinned cellulose ester film is used as the protective film B by assuming that the toughness is 10 to 20 in both the MD direction and the TD direction. Excellent reworkability even when It found that it is possible to realize a polarizer, a completed the invention.
  • a polarizing plate having a protective film A, a polarizer and a protective film B in this order
  • the protective film A is a polyester film made of polyester,
  • the polyester film has an elastic modulus of 5.0 to 8.0 GPa in at least one of the MD direction and the TD direction
  • the protective film B is a cellulose ester film made of cellulose ester,
  • the cellulose ester film is (1)
  • the film thickness is in the range of 15-60 ⁇ m
  • (2) The toughness is 10 to 20 in both the MD direction and the TD direction.
  • a polarizing plate characterized by that; 2.
  • the polarizing plate according to 1 above, wherein the polyester is polyethylene terephthalate; 3. 3.
  • the in-plane retardation value Ro defined by the following formulas (i) and (ii) is in the range of 30 to 70 nm, and the retardation value Rt in the thickness direction is 100 to 140 nm.
  • n x a refractive index in the direction x in which the refractive index in the plane direction is maximized in the film.
  • n y in-plane direction of the film, the refractive index in the direction y perpendicular to the direction x.
  • nz represents the refractive index in the thickness direction z of the film.
  • d represents the thickness (nm) of the film.
  • the measurement is performed at a measurement wavelength of 590 nm in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH. ] 5.
  • the retardation increasing agent is represented by the following general formula (1):
  • R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a halogen atom;
  • Each X independently represents —O— or —O—C ( ⁇ O) — (wherein O is bonded to the phenyl skeleton in the general formula (1));
  • R 5 and R 6 are each independently When X is —O—, it represents a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with an optionally substituted aromatic group; or a glycidyl group,
  • X is —O—C ( ⁇ O) —, a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with an optionally substituted aromatic group; or an optionally substituted aromatic group
  • FIG. 1 It is a schematic sectional drawing which shows an example of a structure of the polarizing plate of this invention. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the dope preparation process of the solution casting film forming method preferable for this invention, a casting process, and a drying process (solvent evaporation process).
  • the polarizing plate which concerns on this invention is a polarizing plate which has the protective film A, the polarizer, and the protective film B in this order, Comprising:
  • the said protective film A is a polyester film which consists of polyester,
  • the said polyester film is MD direction and TD.
  • the elastic film has an elastic modulus of 5.0 to 8.0 GPa in at least one of the directions, and the protective film B is a cellulose ester film made of cellulose ester.
  • the film thickness is in the range of 15-60 ⁇ m
  • the toughness is 10 to 20 in both the MD direction and the TD direction. It is characterized by this. According to the polarizing plate concerning this invention, even if it is a case where a thin cellulose-ester film is used as one protective film, it becomes possible to improve rework property.
  • the present invention has the following hypothesis-verification process. It was completed after that.
  • the present inventor has eagerly studied the characteristics relating to the polarizing plate having the protective film A, the polarizer, and the protective film B in this order.
  • a decrease in the tear strength of the polarizing plate might be the cause of the decrease in reworkability when a thinned cellulose ester film was used as the protective film B.
  • the reworkability was improved when a polyester film having a high tear strength was used as the protective film A, and the hypothesis was verified.
  • is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • the polarizing plate of the present invention has a protective film A, a polarizer and a protective film B in this order, the protective film A is a polyester film (for example, polyethylene terephthalate film), and the protective film B is a cellulose ester film (for example, cellulose). Acetate film).
  • the protective film A is a polyester film (for example, polyethylene terephthalate film)
  • the protective film B is a cellulose ester film (for example, cellulose). Acetate film).
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of the configuration of the polarizing plate of the present invention.
  • a polarizing plate 101 of the present invention has a polyethylene terephthalate film 102, which is a protective film A, and a polarizer 104 from the surface side.
  • the polyethylene terephthalate film 102 and the polarizer 104 are bonded to each other by ultraviolet curing. Bonded by the agent layer 103A.
  • the ultraviolet curable adhesive layer 103A is made of a material that is cured by irradiating ultraviolet rays or the like. The details of the ultraviolet curable adhesive will be described later.
  • an antiglare layer for example, an antiglare layer, an antireflection layer, an antifouling layer, a hard coat layer, etc. May be provided.
  • the protective film A is a polyester film made of polyester.
  • the polyester film constituting the protective film A used for the polarizing plate according to the present invention is 5.0 to 8.0 GPa, preferably 5.5 to 7.0 GPa in at least one of the MD direction and the TD direction. More preferably, it has an elastic modulus of 5.8 to 6.5 GPa. If the elastic modulus is low, the reworkability of the polarizing plate deteriorates, and it is difficult to produce a film having a high elastic modulus.
  • the predetermined elastic modulus in both the MD direction and the TD direction.
  • the value measured by the measuring method as described in the column of the Example mentioned later shall be employ
  • polyester constituting the polyester film polyethylene terephthalate or polyethylene naphthalate can be used, but other copolymer components may be included. These resins are excellent in transparency and excellent in thermal and mechanical properties, and the retardation can be easily controlled by stretching.
  • polyethylene terephthalate is the most suitable material because it has a large intrinsic birefringence and relatively large retardation can be obtained even when the film is thin.
  • the light transmittance of light having a wavelength of 380 nm in the protective film A is 20% or less.
  • the light transmittance is more preferably 15% or less, further preferably 10% or less, and particularly preferably 5% or less. If the light transmittance is 20% or less, the optical functional dye can be prevented from being deteriorated by ultraviolet rays.
  • the transmittance in the present invention is measured by a method perpendicular to the plane of the film, and can be measured using a spectrophotometer (for example, Hitachi U-3500 type).
  • the ultraviolet absorber used in the present invention is a known substance.
  • the ultraviolet absorber include an organic ultraviolet absorber and an inorganic ultraviolet absorber, and an organic ultraviolet absorber is preferable from the viewpoint of transparency.
  • ultraviolet rays having different wavelengths can be absorbed simultaneously, so that the ultraviolet absorption effect can be further improved.
  • UV absorbers having a molecular weight of 400 or more are not sublimated or are not easily volatilized at a high boiling point. From the viewpoint of improving weather resistance, it is preferable.
  • Examples of the ultraviolet absorber having a molecular weight of 400 or more include 2- [2-hydroxy-3,5-bis ( ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylbenzyl) phenyl] -2-benzotriazole, 2,2-methylenebis [4- ( Benzotriazoles such as 1,1,3,3-tetrabutyl) -6- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) phenol], bis (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) sebacate, Hindered amines such as bis (1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl) sebacate and 2- (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) -2-n-butyl Bis (1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl) malonate, 1- [2- [3- (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionylo Xyl] ethyl] -4- [3- (3
  • 2- [2-hydroxy-3,5-bis ( ⁇ , ⁇ -dimethylbenzyl) phenyl] -2-benzotriazole and 2,2-methylenebis [4- (1,1,3,3- Tetrabutyl) -6- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) phenol] is particularly preferred.
  • UV absorbers commercially available products may be used, for example, Tinuvin 109, Tinuvin 171, Tinuvin 234, Tinuvin 326, Tinuvin 327, Tinuvin 328, Tinuvin 928, etc. manufactured by BASF Japan, or 2, 2′-methylenebis [6- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4- (1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) phenol] (molecular weight 659; examples of commercially available products are manufactured by ADEKA Corporation LA31) can be preferably used.
  • the above ultraviolet absorbers can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • additives include inorganic particles, heat resistant polymer particles, alkali metal compounds, alkaline earth metal compounds, phosphorus compounds, antistatic agents, light proofing agents, flame retardants, thermal stabilizers, antioxidants, and antigelling agents. And surfactants.
  • a polyester film does not contain a particle
  • Polymer film substantially does not contain particles means, for example, in the case of inorganic particles, when inorganic elements are quantified by fluorescent X-ray analysis, 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 10 ppm by mass or less, particularly preferably detection The content is below the limit.
  • the polyester film constituting the protective film A can be subjected to corona treatment, coating treatment, flame treatment or the like in order to improve the adhesion to the polarizer.
  • the polyester film used for the protective film A preferably has a retardation of 3000 to 30000 nm.
  • the retardation is less than 3000 nm, when used as a protective film, it exhibits a strong interference color when observed from an oblique direction, so the envelope shape is different from the emission spectrum of the light source, and it is difficult to ensure good visibility. There is a risk of becoming.
  • the lower limit value of the preferred retardation is 4500 nm
  • the next preferred lower limit value is 5000 nm
  • the more preferred lower limit value is 6000 nm
  • the still more preferred lower limit value is 8000 nm
  • the particularly preferred lower limit value is 10,000 nm.
  • the upper limit of the retardation of the polyester film is preferably 30000 nm, more preferably 20000 nm. Even if a polyester film having a retardation higher than that is used as the protective film A, the effect of improving the visibility is not substantially obtained, and the thickness of the film is considerably increased, so that it can be handled as an industrial material. May decrease.
  • the retardation value of the protective film A can be obtained by measuring the refractive index and thickness in the biaxial direction, or a commercially available automatic birefringence measurement such as KOBRA-21ADH (Oji Scientific Instruments). It can also be determined using an apparatus.
  • the polyester film constituting the protective film A can be manufactured according to a general polyester film manufacturing method.
  • the polyester resin is melted and the non-oriented polyester extruded and formed into a sheet shape is stretched in the longitudinal direction by utilizing the speed difference of the roll at a temperature equal to or higher than the glass transition temperature, and then stretched in the transverse direction by a tenter.
  • the method of performing heat processing is mentioned.
  • the polyester film of the present invention may be a uniaxially stretched film or a biaxially stretched film, but when the biaxially stretched film is used as a polarizer protective film, it may be observed from directly above the film surface. Although rainbow-like color spots are not seen, caution is necessary because rainbow-like color spots may be observed when observed from an oblique direction. This phenomenon is because biaxially stretched films are composed of refractive index ellipsoids having different refractive indexes in the running direction, width direction, and thickness direction, and the retardation becomes zero depending on the direction of light transmission inside the film (refractive index). This is because there is a direction in which the ellipsoid looks like a perfect circle.
  • the polyester film is biaxial (biaxial symmetry) in a range that does not substantially cause rainbow-like color spots or a range that does not cause rainbow-like color spots in a viewing angle range required for a liquid crystal display screen. ) Is preferable.
  • the film thickness of the polyester film constituting the protective film A is not particularly limited, but is preferably 40 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 60 to 95 ⁇ m.
  • the film thickness of the polyester film is 40 ⁇ m or more, the anisotropy of the mechanical properties of the film is difficult to be exhibited, and the protective film A having excellent mechanical strength can be configured.
  • the film thickness of a polyester film is 100 micrometers or less, since the increase in the thickness of a polarizing plate is prevented, it is preferable.
  • the filter particle size (initial filtration efficiency 95%) of the filter medium is preferably 25 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • the raw material polyester subjected to the filtration treatment is mixed with an additive such as an ultraviolet absorber if necessary, and is then introduced into an extruder, melted, extruded from a T-die, and adhered to a cooling roll.
  • a stretched sheet is obtained.
  • the unstretched sheet is stretched in the MD direction by stretching (roll stretching) between rolls having a speed difference, and further stretched by stretching (tenter stretching) or holding by a clip and expanding as needed.
  • the film is also stretched in the TD direction by stretching (inflation stretching) or the like, and finally biaxially oriented.
  • the draw ratio (longitudinal draw ratio) at this time is preferably 2 to 5 times, more preferably 3 to 5 times, and particularly preferably 3 to 4 times.
  • a heating means at this time a method using a heating roll or a method using a non-contact heating method may be used, or they may be used in combination.
  • the most preferable stretching method includes a method using both roll heating and non-contact heating. In this case, preheating the film to a relatively high temperature of 120 to 150 ° C. is important from the viewpoint of increasing the elastic modulus of the polyester film.
  • the stretching temperature in the longitudinal stretching step is preferably 90 to 180 ° C, more preferably 100 to 180 ° C.
  • the uniaxially stretched film thus obtained can be introduced into a tenter and stretched in the width direction.
  • the draw ratio (transverse draw ratio) at this time is preferably 1 to 5 times, more preferably 2 to 5 times, still more preferably 2 to 4 times, and particularly preferably 3 to 4 times.
  • the stretching temperature in the transverse stretching step is preferably 90 to 180 ° C, more preferably 100 to 150 ° C.
  • the biaxially stretched film thus obtained is subjected to heat treatment as necessary.
  • the heat treatment is preferably carried out in a tenter, preferably in the range of the melting point Tm-50 ° C. to Tm of the polyester.
  • the total value of the longitudinal draw ratio and the transverse draw ratio is preferably controlled to 6.0 to 9.0 times, more preferably 6.0 to 8.0 times, and more preferably 6.5 to 7.5 times. More preferably.
  • a known method can be used in combination.
  • a preliminarily kneaded extruder is used to blend the dried ultraviolet absorber and the polymer raw material.
  • a master batch can be prepared and blended by, for example, a method of mixing the predetermined master batch and polymer raw material during film formation.
  • the concentration of the UV absorber in the master batch is preferably 5 to 30% by mass in order to uniformly disperse the UV absorber and mix it economically.
  • a condition for producing the master batch it is preferable to use a kneading extruder and to extrude at a temperature not lower than the melting point of the polyester raw material and not higher than 290 ° C. for 1 to 15 minutes. Above 290 ° C, the weight loss of the UV absorber is large, and the viscosity of the master batch is greatly reduced.
  • the extrusion temperature is -50 ° C. or lower, uniform mixing of the UV absorber becomes difficult.
  • a stabilizer, a color tone adjusting agent, and an antistatic agent may be added.
  • the polyester film may have a multilayer structure of at least three layers, and an ultraviolet absorber may be added to the intermediate layer of the film.
  • a film having a three-layer structure containing an ultraviolet absorber in the intermediate layer can be specifically produced as follows. Polyester pellets alone for the outer layer, master batches containing UV absorbers for the intermediate layer and polyester pellets are mixed at a predetermined ratio, dried, and then supplied to a known melt laminating extruder, which is slit-shaped. Extruded into a sheet from a die and cooled and solidified on a casting roll to make an unstretched film.
  • a three-layer manifold or a merging block for example, a merging block having a square merging portion
  • a film layer constituting both outer layers and a film layer constituting an intermediate layer are laminated
  • An unstretched film can be produced by extruding a three-layer sheet from a die and cooling it with a casting roll.
  • the protective film B is a cellulose ester film made of cellulose ester.
  • cellulose ester film As a specific form of the cellulose ester film, conventionally known knowledge can be appropriately referred to except that the film thickness and toughness are values within a predetermined range.
  • the cellulose ester film constituting the protective film B used in the polarizing plate according to the present invention is characterized in that the film thickness is in the range of 15 to 60 ⁇ m, and more preferably 20 to 40 ⁇ m. Within range. If the film thickness of the cellulose ester film as the protective film B is 15 ⁇ m or more, it has sufficient rigidity and can be obtained with excellent handleability, and if it is 60 ⁇ m or less, it is easy to produce a thin film polarizing plate. Become.
  • the cellulose ester film constituting the protective film B used in the polarizing plate according to the present invention has a toughness of 10 to 20 in both the MD direction and the TD direction, and more preferably 15 to 20 Within range.
  • the inventor configures the polarizing plate in combination with the protective film A made of the polyester film having the elastic modulus as described above. It was found that even when a thin cellulose ester film was used as the protective film B, a polarizing plate excellent in reworkability could be realized.
  • a toughness value of the cellulose ester film a value measured by the measuring method described in the column of Examples described later is adopted.
  • Cellulose ester (cellulose ester resin) is formed by acylating some or all of the hydrogen atoms of hydroxyl groups (—OH) at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions in ⁇ -1,4 bonded glucose units constituting cellulose. This is a cellulose acylate resin substituted with a group.
  • the cellulose ester contained in the film of this embodiment is not particularly limited, but is preferably an ester of a linear or branched carboxylic acid having about 2 to 22 carbon atoms.
  • the carboxylic acid constituting the ester may be an aliphatic carboxylic acid, may form a ring, or may be an aromatic carboxylic acid.
  • the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group of cellulose is an acyl group having 2 to 22 carbon atoms such as acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, valeryl, pivaloyl, hexanoyl, octanoyl, lauroyl, stearoyl, etc. Examples include substituted cellulose esters.
  • the carboxylic acid (acyl group) constituting the ester may have a substituent.
  • the carboxylic acid constituting the ester is particularly preferably a lower fatty acid having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a lower fatty acid having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, and a lower fatty acid having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. More preferably it is.
  • the acyl group in the cellulose ester may be a single species or a combination of a plurality of acyl groups.
  • cellulose esters include cellulose acetate (diacetyl cellulose (DAC), triacetyl cellulose (TAC)), cellulose acetate propionate (CAP), cellulose acetate butyrate, and cellulose acetate propionate butyrate.
  • DAC diacetyl cellulose
  • TAC triacetyl cellulose
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • cellulose acetate butyrate examples
  • cellulose acetate propionate butyrate examples thereof include mixed fatty acid esters of cellulose to which a propionate group or a butyrate group is bound in addition to such an acetyl group.
  • Preferred is cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate or cellulose acetate propionate, and particularly preferred is cellulose acetate.
  • the cellulose ester which comprises the protective film B contains a cellulose acetate as a main component from a viewpoint of a handleability or film forming ability.
  • “including as a main component” means that the content of cellulose acetate is 50% by mass or more based on the total amount of cellulose ester.
  • the cellulose acetate content is preferably 70% by mass or more, more preferably 90% by mass or more, still more preferably 95% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 98% by mass with respect to the total amount of cellulose ester. It is at least mass%, most preferably 100 mass%.
  • the butyryl group that can be contained in the cellulose ester may be linear or branched. Moreover, these cellulose esters may use a single kind, and may use it in combination of multiple types.
  • the total degree of acyl group substitution (total acyl group substitution degree) of the cellulose ester can be about 1.0 to 3.0.
  • the total degree of substitution of the acyl group is preferably in the range of 2.0 to 2.95, more preferably 2.1 to 2.7 from the viewpoint of lowering moisture permeability.
  • the degree of acetyl group substitution of the cellulose acetate is 2.1 to 2.95 from the viewpoint of film processing suitability.
  • it is 2.2 to 2.75, more preferably 2.2 to 2.6.
  • acyl group substitution degree of cellulose ester can be measured by the method prescribed in ASTM-D817-96.
  • the degree of substitution of acyl groups indicates the average number of acyl groups per glucose unit, and how many hydrogen atoms of hydroxyl groups at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions of 1 glucose unit are substituted with acyl groups. Show. Therefore, the maximum degree of substitution is 3.0. In this case, it means that the hydrogen atoms of the hydroxyl groups at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions are all substituted with acyl groups. These acyl groups may be substituted on the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions of the glucose unit on average, or may be substituted with a distribution. The degree of substitution is determined by the method prescribed in ASTM-D817-96.
  • cellulose acetates having different degrees of substitution may be mixed and used.
  • the mixing ratio of different cellulose acetates is not particularly limited.
  • the number average molecular weight of the cellulose ester is preferably in the range of 4 ⁇ 10 4 to 3 ⁇ 10 5 in order to increase the mechanical strength of the resulting film, and is 4.5 ⁇ 10 4 to 2 ⁇ 10 5 .
  • the range is more preferable, and the range of 5 ⁇ 10 4 to 7 ⁇ 10 4 is particularly preferable.
  • “weight average molecular weight (Mw)” and “number average molecular weight (Mn)” are values measured using gel permeation chromatography (GPC). The measurement conditions are as follows.
  • the content of residual sulfuric acid in the cellulose ester is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 45 ppm by mass in terms of elemental sulfur, and more preferably in the range of 1 to 30 ppm by mass. Sulfuric acid is considered to remain in the film in a salt state. When the content of the residual sulfuric acid exceeds 45 ppm by mass, the film tends to break when the film is stretched hot or when slitting is performed after the hot stretch.
  • the content of residual sulfuric acid can be measured by the method prescribed in ASTM D817-96.
  • the content of free acid in the cellulose ester is preferably in the range of 1 to 500 ppm by mass, more preferably 1 to 100 ppm by mass, and further preferably in the range of 1 to 70 ppm by mass. preferable.
  • the content of free acid can be measured by the method prescribed in ASTM D817-96.
  • Cellulose ester may contain a trace amount of metal components. It is thought that a trace amount metal component originates in the water used in the synthesis process of the cellulose derivative. Like these metal components, the content of components that can become insoluble nuclei is preferably as small as possible.
  • metal ions such as iron, calcium, and magnesium may form an insoluble matter by forming a salt with a resin decomposition product or the like that may contain an organic acidic group.
  • the calcium (Ca) component easily forms a coordination compound (that is, a complex) with an acidic component such as a carboxylic acid or a sulfonic acid, and many ligands. There is a risk of forming an insoluble starch or turbidity.
  • the content of the iron (Fe) component in the cellulose ester is preferably 3 mass ppm or less, and more preferably 1 mass ppm or less.
  • the content of the calcium (Ca) component in the cellulose derivative is preferably 60 ppm by mass or less, and more preferably in the range of 0 to 30 ppm by mass.
  • the content of the magnesium (Mg) component in the cellulose ester is preferably in the range of 0 to 70 ppm by mass, and particularly preferably in the range of 0 to 20 ppm by mass.
  • the content of metal components such as iron (Fe) component, calcium (Ca) component, and magnesium (Mg) component is pre-processed by microdigest wet cracking device (sulfuric acid decomposition) and alkali melting of completely dried cellulose ester. After the measurement, it can be measured using ICP-AES (Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectrometer).
  • the contents of residual alkaline earth metal, residual sulfuric acid and residual acid can be adjusted by thoroughly washing the cellulose ester obtained by synthesis.
  • Cellulose esters such as cellulose acetate and cellulose acetate propionate can be produced by known methods.
  • cellulose is esterified by mixing cellulose as a raw material, a predetermined organic acid (such as acetic acid or propionic acid), an acid anhydride (such as acetic anhydride or propionic anhydride), and a catalyst (such as sulfuric acid). The reaction proceeds until the triester is formed. In the triester, the three hydroxy groups (hydroxyl groups) of the glucose unit are substituted with an acyl acid of an organic acid.
  • a mixed ester type cellulose ester such as cellulose acetate propionate or cellulose acetate butyrate can be produced.
  • a cellulose ester resin having a desired degree of acyl substitution is synthesized by hydrolyzing the cellulose triester. Thereafter, the cellulose ester is completed through steps such as filtration, precipitation, washing with water, dehydration, and drying. Specifically, it can be synthesized with reference to the method described in JP-A-10-45804.
  • the cellulose ester may be a commercially available product.
  • Commercially available products include Daicel Corporation L20, L30, L40, and L50, Eastman Chemical Co. Ca398-3, Ca398-6, Ca398-10, Ca398-30, Ca394-60S, and the like.
  • the cellulose ester film as the protective film B preferably contains a retardation increasing agent.
  • the “retardation increasing agent” means an additive having a function of increasing the retardation of the cellulose ester film by the addition thereof.
  • the retardation increasing agent for example, a compound represented by the following general formula (1) may be mentioned.
  • the compound of the following general formula (1) can raise the retardation value of the thickness direction of a cellulose-ester film especially, and can also reduce the moisture permeability of the said film.
  • the compound of the following general formula (1) has low volatility even under high temperature and high humidity. For this reason, the bleed resistance of the cellulose ester film can be improved, and as a result, the sharpness of the image can be improved.
  • R 1 to R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a halogen atom.
  • R 1 to R 4 may be the same or different from each other.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and an isopropyl group.
  • hydrogen atoms, methyl groups, ethyl groups, fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms are A methyl group is preferable, and a methyl group is particularly preferable.
  • each X independently represents —O— or —O—C ( ⁇ O) —.
  • X represents —O—C ( ⁇ O) —
  • the ether oxygen (—O—) of —O—C ( ⁇ O) — is bonded to the phenyl skeleton in the general formula (1).
  • X is preferably —O—.
  • R 5 and R 6 each independently have the following definition.
  • R 5 and R 6 each independently represents a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with an optionally substituted aromatic group; or a glycidyl group .
  • R 5 and R 6 may each independently be substituted with a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an optionally substituted aromatic group. Represents an alkyl group; or an optionally substituted aromatic group.
  • the ester group capable of substituting the alkyl group is represented by the formula: —O—C ( ⁇ O) —R or —C ( ⁇ O) —O—R, wherein R is a straight chain having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • R is a straight chain having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group and aromatic group are as defined below.
  • the alkyl group as R 5 and R 6 is not particularly limited, but is methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, sec-butyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, isopentyl group.
  • the aromatic group may be an aryl group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms. More specifically, a phenyl group, p-tolyl group, naphthyl group, biphenyl group, fluorenyl group, anthryl group, pyrenyl group, azulenyl group, acenaphthylenyl group, terphenyl group, phenanthryl group and the like can be mentioned. Of these, a phenyl group and a naphthyl group are preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent.
  • the substituent capable of substituting the aromatic group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, and a phenylphenyl group. , Methylphenylphenyl group, cyano group, halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), nitro group and the like.
  • the said substituent may be one, or may be two or more, and in the latter case, each substituent may be the same or different.
  • the aromatic group is a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, or a methylphenylphenyl group. It is preferable that
  • the method for producing the compound of the general formula (1) when R 5 and R 6 are alkyl groups having a substituent is not particularly limited.
  • the compound can be obtained by reacting an epoxy compound with an aromatic monocarboxylic acid.
  • an epoxy compound the diglycidyl ether type epoxy compound obtained by reaction with biphenols and epichlorohydrin is mentioned.
  • this epoxy compound 3,3 ′, 5,5′-tetramethyl-4,4′-diglycidyloxybiphenyl (commercially available product is “jER YX-4000” manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.) Biphenol type epoxy compounds such as epoxy equivalent of 180 to 192)) can be used.
  • aromatic monocarboxylic acid examples include benzoic acid, dimethylbenzoic acid, trimethylbenzoic acid, tetramethylbenzoic acid, ethylbenzoic acid, propylbenzoic acid, cumic acid, o-toluic acid, m-toluic acid, p-toluic acid, anisic acid, ethoxybenzoic acid, propoxybenzoic acid, cyanobenzoic acid, fluorobenzoic acid, nitrobenzoic acid, 4-phenylbenzoic acid, 4- (3-methylphenyl) benzoic acid, 4- (4- Methylphenyl) benzoic acid, 4- (3,5-dimethylphenyl) benzoic acid, 2-methyl-4-phenylbenzoic acid, 2,6-dimethyl-4-phenylbenzoic acid, 2,6-dimethyl-4- ( 3,5-dimethylphenyl) benzoic acid, naphthoic acid, nicotinic acid, furoic acid,
  • the epoxy group of the epoxy compound and the carboxyl group of the aromatic monocarboxylic acid react to synthesize the compound of the general formula (1).
  • the reaction conditions are not particularly limited as long as the reaction proceeds.
  • the reaction temperature is 80 to 130 ° C, more preferably 100 ° C to 115 ° C.
  • the reaction time is preferably 10 to 25 hours.
  • the mixing ratio (preparation ratio) of the epoxy compound and the aromatic monocarboxylic acid is not particularly limited as long as the reaction proceeds.
  • the ratio of the number of moles of epoxy groups in the epoxy compound to the number of moles of aromatic monocarboxylic acid is 1 / 0.9 to 1.0. It is preferable that it is the range of these.
  • a catalyst may be used as necessary.
  • the catalyst include phosphine compounds such as trimethylphosphine, triethylphosphine, tributylphosphine, trioctylphosphine, and triphenylphosphine; 2-methylimidazole, 2-ethylimidazole, 2-isopropylimidazole, 2-ethyl-4-methyl Imidazole compounds such as imidazole and 4-phenyl-2-methylimidazole; triethylamine, tributylamine, trihexylamine, triamylamine, triethanolamine, dimethylaminoethanol, tritylenediamine, dimethylphenylamine, dimethylbenzylamine, 2 -(Dimethylaminomethyl) phenol, amine compounds such as 1,8-diazabicyclo (5,4,0) undecene-7; Such as emission compounds.
  • These catalysts are preferably used in an amount of 0.05 to 1
  • R 5 and R 6 are preferably an alkyl group having a hydroxyl group and an ester group as a substituent, or a glycidyl group.
  • X is more preferably —O—.
  • the compounds described in JP 2011-140637 A and JP 2011-116912 A are included in the compound of the general formula (1).
  • some of the compounds described in JP-A-2006-45468 are also included in the compound of the general formula (1). More specifically, the following is mentioned as a more preferable example of the compound of General formula (1).
  • a compound is prescribed
  • the content of the retardation raising agent in the cellulose-ester film which comprises the protective film B is preferably 0.5 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the cellulose ester contained in the cellulose ester film. Particularly preferred is 2 to 5 parts by mass. If it is such quantity, sufficient retardation can be provided to a cellulose-ester film.
  • the tear strength of the film can be improved by adding such an amount, and the volatile property under high temperature and high humidity. Therefore, it is possible to improve the bleed resistance of the film and thus the sharpness of the image.
  • the retardation increasing agent it may be added to the resin forming the cellulose ester film as a powder, or after being dissolved in a solvent, it may be added to the resin forming the cellulose ester film.
  • the cellulose ester film as the protective film B may contain a plasticizer in order to improve the fluidity of the composition during film production and the flexibility and workability of the film.
  • plasticizers include sugar ester plasticizers, polyester plasticizers, polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizers, acrylic compounds, polycarboxylic acid ester plasticizers (including phthalate ester plasticizers), glycosates.
  • rate plasticizers ester plasticizers (including citrate ester plasticizers, fatty acid ester plasticizers, phosphate ester plasticizers, trimellitic ester plasticizers, etc.), styrene compounds, and the like.
  • plasticizers it is effective for moisture permeability to include at least one plasticizer selected from the group consisting of the following sugar ester plasticizers (sugar ester compounds), polyester plasticizers, and acrylic compounds. This is preferable from the viewpoint of achieving both high control and compatibility with the cellulose ester. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 5000 or less, and more preferably 3000 or less from the viewpoint of achieving both improvement in wet heat resistance and compatibility with the cellulose ester.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 3000 or less.
  • a preferable molecular weight (Mw) is in the range of 100 to 2500, and more preferably in the range of 300 to 2000.
  • Sugar ester plasticizer is a compound having 1 to 12 furanose structures or pyranose structures, in which all or part of the hydroxy groups in the compound are esterified.
  • the sugar ester plasticizer can be added for the purpose of preventing hydrolysis.
  • sugar as a raw material for synthesizing the sugar ester compound according to the present invention examples include the following, but the present invention is not limited to these.
  • gentiobiose, gentiotriose, gentiotetraose, xylotriose, galactosyl sucrose, and the like are also included.
  • the monocarboxylic acid used for esterifying all or part of the OH group in the pyranose structure or furanose structure is not particularly limited, and is a known aliphatic monocarboxylic acid, alicyclic monocarboxylic acid, aromatic A monocarboxylic acid or the like can be used.
  • the carboxylic acid used may be one type or a mixture of two or more types.
  • Examples of preferred aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, isobutyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, enanthic acid, caprylic acid, pelargonic acid, capric acid, 2-ethyl-hexanecarboxylic acid, undecylic acid, Saturation of lauric acid, tridecylic acid, myristic acid, pentadecylic acid, palmitic acid, heptadecylic acid, stearic acid, nonadecanoic acid, arachidic acid, behenic acid, lignoceric acid, serotic acid, heptacosanoic acid, montanic acid, mellicic acid, and laxaric acid
  • unsaturated fatty acids such as fatty acids, undecylenic acid, oleic acid, sorbic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, arachidonic acid and o
  • Examples of preferable alicyclic monocarboxylic acids include cyclopentane carboxylic acid, cyclohexane carboxylic acid, cyclooctane carboxylic acid, and derivatives thereof.
  • aromatic monocarboxylic acids examples include aromatic monocarboxylic acids having 1 to 5 alkyl groups or alkoxy groups introduced into the benzene ring of benzoic acid such as benzoic acid, phenylacetic acid, toluic acid, cinnamic acid, Examples thereof include aromatic monocarboxylic acids having two or more benzene rings such as benzylic acid, biphenylcarboxylic acid, naphthalenecarboxylic acid, tetralincarboxylic acid, or derivatives thereof, and benzoic acid is particularly preferable.
  • sugar esters represented by the following general formula (FA).
  • R 1 to R 8 in formula (FA) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group.
  • R 1 to R 8 may be the same as or different from each other.
  • the substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group include a methylcarbonyl group (acetyl group).
  • the substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms.
  • the arylcarbonyl group include a phenylcarbonyl group.
  • the substituent that the aromatic hydrocarbon ring group has include an alkyl group such as a methyl group, an alkoxyl group such as a methoxy group, and the like.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (FA) preferably has an average degree of substitution of 3.0 to 8.0, more preferably 4.0 to 7.5, and even more preferably 4.5 to 7.0. By taking this value, the moisture permeability control and the compatibility with the cellulose ester can be highly compatible.
  • the degree of substitution of the compound represented by the general formula (FA) represents the number substituted with a substituent other than hydrogen among the eight hydroxyl groups contained in the general formula (FA).
  • this represents a number containing a group other than hydrogen. Therefore, when all of R 1 to R 8 are substituted with a substituent other than hydrogen, the degree of substitution is a maximum value of 8.0, and when R 1 to R 8 are all hydrogen atoms, 0.0 It becomes.
  • the compound having the structure represented by the general formula (FA) is difficult to synthesize a single kind of compound in which the number of hydroxyl groups and the number of OR groups are fixed. Since it is known that it becomes a compound in which several different components are mixed, it is appropriate to use the average substitution degree as the substitution degree of the general formula (FA) in the present invention.
  • the average substitution degree can be measured from the area ratio of the chart showing the substitution degree distribution.
  • R 1 to R 8 represent a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group, and R 1 to R 8 may be the same or different.
  • R 1 to R 8 are also referred to as acyl groups).
  • Specific examples of R 1 to R 8 include acyl groups derived from monocarboxylic acids used during the synthesis of the sugar ester compounds exemplified above.
  • sugar ester compound according to the present invention any of R 1 to R 8 may be the same substituent R, and the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • polyester compounds are defined by the following symbols.
  • sugar ester compounds in which R 1 to R 8 are different groups can be used.
  • the sugar ester compound according to the present invention can be produced by reacting the sugar with an acylating agent (also referred to as an esterifying agent, for example, an acid halide such as acetyl chloride, an anhydride such as acetic anhydride).
  • an acylating agent also referred to as an esterifying agent, for example, an acid halide such as acetyl chloride, an anhydride such as acetic anhydride.
  • the distribution of the degree of substitution is made by adjusting the amount of acylating agent, the timing of addition, and the esterification reaction time, but it is a mixture of sugar ester compounds with different degrees of substitution or purely isolated compounds with different degrees of substitution. Can be used to adjust components having a target average substitution degree and a substitution degree of 4 or less.
  • the inside of the Kolben was depressurized to 4 ⁇ 10 2 Pa or less, and after excess pyridine was distilled off at 60 ° C., the inside of the Kolben was depressurized to 1.3 ⁇ 10 Pa or less and the temperature was raised to 120 ° C. Most of the acid and benzoic acid formed were distilled off. Then, 1 L of toluene and 300 g of a 0.5% by mass aqueous sodium carbonate solution were added, and the mixture was stirred at 50 ° C. for 30 minutes and then allowed to stand to separate a toluene layer.
  • the obtained mixture was analyzed by high performance liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (HPLC-MS). As a result, A-1 was 1.2% by mass, A-2 was 13.2% by mass, and A-3 was 14.2% by mass. , A-4 was 35.4% by mass, A-5 and the like were 40.0% by mass. The average degree of substitution was 5.2.
  • A-5 etc. means a mixture of all components having a substitution degree of 4 or less, that is, compounds having substitution degrees of 4, 3, 2, 1. The average degree of substitution was calculated with A-5 as the degree of substitution of 4.
  • the average degree of substitution was adjusted by adding in combination the sugar ester close to the desired degree of average substitution and the isolated A-1 to A-5 etc. by the method prepared here.
  • sugar esters examples include compounds described in JP-A Nos. 62-42996 and 10-237084.
  • the polyester plasticizer is not particularly limited.
  • a polymer in which the terminal hydroxy group of the polyester polyol is sealed with a monocarboxylic acid (end-capped polyester) can be used.
  • the ester-forming derivative referred to here is an esterified product of dicarboxylic acid, dicarboxylic acid chloride, or dicarboxylic acid anhydride.
  • a polyester plasticizer represented by the following general formula (FB-1) from the viewpoint of high compatibility between moisture permeability control and compatibility with the cellulose ester.
  • B represents a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms or a cycloalkylene group
  • A represents an aromatic ring group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, or 4 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • N represents a natural number of 1 or more.
  • the compound represented by the above formula is obtained from a dicarboxylic acid having an aromatic ring (also referred to as an aromatic dicarboxylic acid) and a linear or branched alkylene or cycloalkylene diol having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at both ends. Is not sealed with a monocarboxylic acid.
  • aromatic dicarboxylic acid having 6 to 16 carbon atoms examples include phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,4-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,8-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,3 -Naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,8-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,2'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid, 4,4'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid, and the like. Of these, phthalic acid and terephthalic acid are preferred.
  • aromatic dicarboxylic acid having 4 to 12 carbon atoms examples include 1,2-ethanedicarboxylic acid (succinic acid), 1,3-propanedicarboxylic acid (glutaric acid), 1,4-butanedicarboxylic acid (adipic acid), Examples include 1,5-pentanedicarboxylic acid (pimelic acid) and 1,8-octanedicarboxylic acid (sebacic acid), and adipic acid and succinic acid are particularly preferable.
  • the dicarboxylic acid is mixed with an aromatic dicarboxylic acid or an aliphatic dicarboxylic acid.
  • linear or branched alkylene or cycloalkylene diol having 2 to 6 carbon atoms examples include ethylene glycol, 1,2-propanediol, 1,3-propanediol, 1,2-butanediol, and 1,3-butane.
  • diol and 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol examples include diol and 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol. Of these, ethanediol, 1,2-propanediol, 1,3-propanediol, and 1,3-butanediol are preferable.
  • A is a naphthalene ring or a biphenyl ring which may have a substituent.
  • the substituent is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, or alkoxyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • the hydroxyl value (OH value) of the polyester compound is preferably 100 mgKOH / g or more and 500 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 170 mgKOH / g to 400 mgKOH / g. When the hydroxyl value is in this range, the compatibility with the cellulose ester and the cellulose ether becomes suitable.
  • the hydroxyl value is 400 mgKOH / g or less, the hydrophobicity of the polyester compound does not increase too much, and when the hydroxyl value is 170 mgKOH / g or more, the intermolecular interaction (hydrogen bond, etc.) between the polyester compounds is excessively strong. It is thought that this is because precipitation in the film can be prevented.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polyester compound can be calculated from the following formula.
  • the polyester compound can be obtained by a conventional method such as a hot melt condensation method using a polyesterification reaction or a transesterification reaction between the dicarboxylic acid and a diol, or an interfacial condensation method between an acid chloride of these acids and a glycol. Easy to synthesize.
  • a polyester plasticizer represented by the following general formula (FB-2) from the viewpoint of high compatibility between moisture permeability control and compatibility with cellulose ester.
  • B represents a hydroxy group or a carboxylic acid residue
  • G represents an alkylene glycol residue having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, an aryl glycol residue having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 4 carbon atoms.
  • A represents an alkylene dicarboxylic acid residue having 4 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl dicarboxylic acid residue having 6 to 12 carbon atoms
  • n represents an integer of 1 or more.
  • a hydroxy group or carboxylic acid residue represented by B an alkylene glycol residue, an oxyalkylene glycol residue or an aryl glycol residue represented by G, and an alkylene dicarboxylic acid residue represented by A It is composed of a group or an aryl dicarboxylic acid residue, and can be obtained by a reaction similar to that of a normal ester compound.
  • Examples of the carboxylic acid component of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, benzoic acid, p-tert-butylbenzoic acid, orthotoluic acid, metatoluic acid, p-toluic acid, and dimethyl.
  • acetic acid propionic acid
  • butyric acid butyric acid
  • benzoic acid p-tert-butylbenzoic acid
  • orthotoluic acid metatoluic acid
  • p-toluic acid and dimethyl.
  • benzoic acid ethyl benzoic acid
  • normal propyl benzoic acid aminobenzoic acid
  • acetoxybenzoic acid aliphatic acid and the like
  • Examples of the alkylene glycol component having 2 to 18 carbon atoms of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include ethylene glycol, 1,2-propylene glycol, 1,3-propylene glycol, and 1,2-butanediol.
  • an alkylene glycol having 2 to 12 carbon atoms is particularly preferable because of excellent compatibility with the cellulose ester resin. More preferred are alkylene glycols having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferred are alkylene glycols having 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • Examples of the aryl glycol having 6 to 12 carbon atoms of the polyester plasticizer represented by the general formula (FB-2) include 1,4-cyclohexanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, cyclohexanediethanol, 1,4 -There are cyclic glycols such as benzenedimethanol, and these glycols can be used as one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
  • Examples of the oxyalkylene glycol component having 4 to 12 carbon atoms of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, and tripropylene glycol. These glycols can be used as one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
  • Examples of the alkylene dicarboxylic acid component having 4 to 12 carbon atoms of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, azelaic acid, and sebacic acid. , Dodecanedicarboxylic acid and the like, and these are used as one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds, respectively.
  • Examples of the aryl dicarboxylic acid component having 6 to 12 carbon atoms of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, and 1,4-naphthalene. There are dicarboxylic acids and the like.
  • the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) has a weight average molecular weight of preferably 300 to 3000, more preferably 350 to 1500.
  • the acid value is 0.5 mgKOH / g or less
  • the hydroxy group (hydroxyl group) value is 25 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably the acid value is 0.3 mgKOH / g or less
  • the hydroxy group (hydroxyl group) value is 15 mgKOH / g or less. Is.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polyester plasticizer is calculated by measurement using gel permeation chromatography (GPC) under the following measurement conditions.
  • polyester compounds are defined by the following symbols.
  • the viscosity of the polyester plasticizer depends on the molecular structure and molecular weight, but in the case of an adipic acid plasticizer, it has a high compatibility with the cellulose ester and has a high effect of imparting plasticity. It is preferably in the range of s (25 ° C.).
  • One type of polyester plasticizer may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • the polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer is an ester compound (alcohol ester) of a dihydric or higher aliphatic polyhydric alcohol and a monocarboxylic acid, preferably a divalent to 20-valent aliphatic polyhydric alcohol ester.
  • the polyhydric alcohol ester compound preferably has an aromatic ring or a cycloalkyl ring in the molecule.
  • the acrylic compound is not particularly limited, but at least one selected from the group consisting of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, (meth) acrylamides, and (meth) acrylonitrile. Examples thereof include a polymer having a repeating unit derived from a certain acrylic monomer. These acrylic compounds can improve the water resistance of the film.
  • the acrylic compound is preferably one in which the methyl methacrylate unit is 50 to 99% by mass and the total amount of other monomer units copolymerizable therewith is 1 to 50% by mass.
  • Examples of other copolymerizable monomers include alkyl methacrylates having an alkyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms; alkyl acrylates having an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms; amides such as acryloylmorpholine and N, N-dimethylacrylamide
  • the acrylic compound used in the present invention may have a ring structure, specifically, a lactone ring structure, a glutaric anhydride structure, a glutarimide structure, an N-substituted maleimide structure and a maleic anhydride structure. And a pyran ring structure.
  • alkyl acrylates having 1 to 18 carbon atoms in the alkyl group examples include alkyl acrylates having 1 to 18 carbon atoms in the alkyl group, amides such as acryloylmorpholine and dimethylacrylamide, from the viewpoint of thermal decomposition resistance and fluidity of the copolymer.
  • amides such as acryloylmorpholine and dimethylacrylamide
  • Preferred are a vinyl monomer having a group, a methacrylic acid ester or an acrylate ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 22 carbon atoms in the ester portion, an N-substituted maleimide structure, a pyran ring structure and the like.
  • alkyl acrylate having 1 to 18 carbon atoms in the alkyl group include methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, n-propyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, s-butyl acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate. And methyl acrylate.
  • vinyl monomer having an amide group examples include acrylamide, N-methylacrylamide, N-butylacrylamide, N, N-dimethylacrylamide, N, N-diethylacrylamide, acryloylmorpholine, N-hydroxyethylacrylamide, acryloylpyrrolidine, Acryloylpiperidine, methacrylamide, N-methylmethacrylamide, N-butylmethacrylamide, N, N-dimethylmethacrylamide, N, N-diethylmethacrylamide, methacryloylmorpholine, N-hydroxyethylmethacrylamide, methacryloylpyrrolidine, methacryloylpiperidine, N-vinylformamide, N-vinylacetamide, vinylpyrrolidone and the like can be mentioned.
  • methacrylic acid ester or acrylate ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 22 carbon atoms in the ester moiety include, for example, cyclopentyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, methyl cyclohexyl acrylate, trimethylcyclohexyl acrylate, Norbornyl acrylate, norbornyl acrylate, cyano norbornyl acrylate, isobornyl acrylate, bornyl acrylate, menthyl acrylate, fentyl acrylate, adamantyl acrylate, dimethyladamantyl acrylate, tricycloacrylate [5.2 .1.0 2,6 ] dec-8-yl, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] dec-4-methyl acrylate, cyclodecyl acrylate, cyclopentyl methacrylate, cyclohexane methacrylate Xylyl, methyl cyclohe
  • isobornyl methacrylate dicyclopentanyl methacrylate, dimethyladamantyl methacrylate and the like can be mentioned.
  • N-substituted maleimide examples include N-methylmaleimide, N-ethylmaleimide, N-propylmaleimide, Ni-propylmaleimide, N-butylmaleimide, Ni-butylmaleimide, Nt-butylmaleimide, N-laurylmaleimide, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, N-benzylmaleimide, N-phenylmaleimide, N- (2-chlorophenyl) maleimide, N- (4-chlorophenyl) maleimide, N- (4-bromophenyl) phenylmaleimide, N -(2-methylphenyl) maleimide, N- (2-ethylphenylmaleimide), N- (2-methoxyphenyl) maleimide, N- (2,4,6-trimethylphenyl) maleimide, N- (4-benzylphenyl) Maleimide, N- (2,4,6-tribromoph Yl
  • the acrylic compound preferably has a weight average molecular weight (Mw) in the range of 15000 or less, more preferably in the range of 10,000 or less, from the viewpoint of achieving both moisture permeability control and compatibility with the cellulose ester. More preferably, it is in the range of 5000 to 10,000.
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic compound according to the present invention is calculated by measurement using gel permeation chromatography (GPC) under the following measurement conditions.
  • aliphatic polyhydric alcohol examples include ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, trimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol and the like.
  • the monocarboxylic acid can be an aliphatic monocarboxylic acid, an alicyclic monocarboxylic acid, an aromatic monocarboxylic acid, or the like.
  • One kind of monocarboxylic acid may be used, or a mixture of two or more kinds may be used.
  • all of the OH groups contained in the aliphatic polyhydric alcohol may be esterified, or a part of the OH groups may be left as they are.
  • the aliphatic monocarboxylic acid is preferably a fatty acid having a straight chain or a side chain having 1 to 32 carbon atoms.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic monocarboxylic acid is more preferably 1-20, and still more preferably 1-10.
  • Examples of such aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, and the like, and acetic acid may be preferable in order to enhance compatibility with the cellulose ester.
  • Examples of the alicyclic monocarboxylic acid include cyclopentane carboxylic acid, cyclohexane carboxylic acid, cyclooctane carboxylic acid and the like.
  • aromatic monocarboxylic acids examples include benzoic acid; one having 1 to 3 alkyl groups or alkoxy groups (for example, methoxy group or ethoxy group) introduced into the benzene ring of benzoic acid (for example, toluic acid); benzene ring Aromatic monocarboxylic acids having two or more (for example, biphenyl carboxylic acid, naphthalene carboxylic acid, tetralin carboxylic acid, etc.) are included, and benzoic acid is preferred.
  • the molecular weight of the polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 300 to 1500, and more preferably in the range of 350 to 750. In order to make it hard to volatilize, the one where molecular weight is larger is preferable. In order to improve moisture permeability and compatibility with the cellulose ester, a smaller molecular weight is preferable.
  • polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer examples include trimethylolpropane triacetate, trimethylolpropane benzoate, pentaerythritol tetraacetate, and an ester represented by the general formula (I) described in JP-A-2008-88292. Compound (A) and the like are included.
  • the polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer is an ester compound of a divalent or higher, preferably 2 to 20 valent polycarboxylic acid and an alcohol compound.
  • the polyvalent carboxylic acid is preferably a 2-20 valent aliphatic polyvalent carboxylic acid, a 3-20 valent aromatic polyvalent carboxylic acid, or a 3-20 valent alicyclic polyvalent carboxylic acid.
  • polyvalent carboxylic acids include trivalent or higher aromatic polyvalent carboxylic acids such as trimellitic acid, trimesic acid, pyromellitic acid or derivatives thereof; succinic acid, adipic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, oxalic acid Contains aliphatic polycarboxylic acids such as fumaric acid, maleic acid and tetrahydrophthalic acid; oxypolycarboxylic acids such as tartaric acid, tartronic acid, malic acid and citric acid, etc., and suppresses volatilization from the film. For this, oxypolycarboxylic acids are preferred.
  • the alcohol compound examples include an aliphatic saturated alcohol compound having a straight chain or a side chain, an aliphatic unsaturated alcohol compound having a straight chain or a side chain, an alicyclic alcohol compound, or an aromatic alcohol compound.
  • the carbon number of the aliphatic saturated alcohol compound or the aliphatic unsaturated alcohol compound is preferably 1 to 32, more preferably 1 to 20, and still more preferably 1 to 10.
  • Examples of the alicyclic alcohol compound include cyclopentanol, cyclohexanol and the like.
  • the aromatic alcohol compound include phenol, paracresol, dimethylphenol, benzyl alcohol, cinnamyl alcohol and the like.
  • the alcohol compound may be one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
  • the molecular weight of the polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 300 to 1000, and more preferably in the range of 350 to 750. A larger molecular weight of the polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing bleeding out. From the viewpoint of moisture permeability and compatibility with cellulose ester, a smaller one is preferable.
  • the acid value of the polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer is preferably 1 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 0.2 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the acid value refers to the number of milligrams of potassium hydroxide necessary for neutralizing the acid (carboxy group present in the sample) contained in 1 g of the sample. The acid value is measured according to JIS K0070 (1992).
  • Examples of the polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer include an ester compound (B) represented by the general formula (II) described in JP-A-2008-88292.
  • the polycarboxylic acid ester plasticizer may be a phthalate ester plasticizer.
  • the phthalate ester plasticizer include diethyl phthalate, dimethoxyethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate, dicyclohexyl phthalate, dicyclohexyl terephthalate and the like.
  • glycolate plasticizers include alkylphthalyl alkyl glycolates.
  • alkyl phthalyl alkyl glycolates include methyl phthalyl methyl glycolate, ethyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, propyl phthalyl propyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, octyl phthalyl octyl glycolate and the like. .
  • the ester plasticizer includes a fatty acid ester plasticizer, a citrate ester plasticizer, a phosphate ester plasticizer, a trimellitic acid plasticizer, and the like.
  • Examples of the fatty acid ester plasticizer include butyl oleate, methylacetyl ricinoleate, dibutyl sebacate and the like.
  • Examples of the citrate plasticizer include acetyl trimethyl citrate, acetyl triethyl citrate, acetyl tributyl citrate and the like.
  • Examples of the phosphate ester plasticizer include triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, cresyl diphenyl phosphate, octyl diphenyl phosphate, diphenyl biphenyl phosphate (BDP), trioctyl phosphate, tributyl phosphate and the like.
  • trimellitic acid plasticizers include octyl trimellitic acid, n-octyl trimellitic acid, isodecyl trimellitic acid, and isononyl trimellitic acid.
  • the styrene compound may be a homopolymer of a styrene monomer or a copolymer of a styrene monomer and another copolymer monomer.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the styrenic monomer in the styrenic compound may be preferably 30 to 100 mol%, more preferably 50 to 100 mol%, in order for the molecular structure to have a certain bulkiness.
  • the styrene monomer is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (A).
  • R 101 to R 103 in the formula (A) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or an aryl group.
  • R 104 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryloxycarbonyl Group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylcarbonyloxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an amino group, an amide group, and a nitro group.
  • Each of these groups may further have a substituent (for example, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, etc.).
  • R 104 may be the same as or different from each other, and may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • styrenic monomers include styrene; alkyl-substituted styrenes such as ⁇ -methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, and p-methylstyrene; halogen-substituted styrenes such as 4-chlorostyrene and 4-bromostyrene; p-hydroxy Hydroxystyrenes such as styrene, ⁇ -methyl-p-hydroxystyrene, 2-methyl-4-hydroxystyrene, 3,4-dihydroxystyrene; vinylbenzyl alcohols; p-methoxystyrene, p-tert-butoxystyrene, m Alkoxy substituted styrenes such as tert-butoxystyrene; vinyl benzoic acids such as 3-vinylbenzoic acid and 4-vinylbenzoic acid; 4-vinylbenzyl acetate; 4-acetoxy
  • the copolymerizable monomer combined with the styrenic monomer is a (meth) acrylic acid ester compound represented by the following formula (B), maleic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, cis-1-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride, Acid anhydrides such as 3-methyl-cis-1-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride and 4-methyl-cis-1-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride, and nitrile groups such as acrylonitrile and methacrylonitrile -Containing radical polymerizable monomers; amide bond-containing radical polymerizable monomers such as acrylamide, methacrylamide, trifluoromethanesulfonylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate; fatty acid vinyls such as vinyl acetate; chlorine such as vinyl chloride and vinylidene chloride Containing radical polymerizable monomer; 1,
  • R 105 to R 107 in the formula (B) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or an aryl group.
  • R 108 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group.
  • Each of these groups may further have a substituent (for example, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, etc.).
  • (meth) acrylic acid ester compounds include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate (i-, n-), butyl (meth) acrylate (n- , I-, s-, tert-), pentyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-, s-), hexyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-), heptyl (meth) acrylate (n -, I-), octyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-), nonyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-), myristyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-), (meta ) Acrylic acid (2-ethylhexyl), (meth) acrylic acid ( ⁇ -caprolactone), (meth) acrylic acid (2-hydroxyethyl), acrylic acid (2-hydroxypropyl
  • styrene compound examples include styrene / maleic anhydride copolymer, styrene / acrylic ester copolymer, styrene / hydroxystyrene polymer, styrene / acetoxystyrene polymer, and the like. Of these, a styrene / maleic anhydride copolymer is preferable.
  • the content of the plasticizer is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 30% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the cellulose ester contained in the cellulose ester film. More preferably within the range. If it is such quantity, a cellulose-ester film will not produce bleeding out easily.
  • the retardation film of the present invention may further contain other additives, if necessary, instead of the plasticizer or in addition to the plasticizer.
  • additives include, but are not limited to, hydrogen bonding compounds, activators, antioxidants, colorants, ultraviolet absorbers, matting agents, acrylic particles, hydrogen bonding solvents, ionic interfaces. An active agent etc. are mentioned.
  • the hydrogen bonding compound can reduce the fluctuation of the retardation value Rt with respect to the change in humidity.
  • the hydrogen bonding compound preferably has at least a plurality of functional groups selected from a hydroxy group, an amino group, a thiol group, and a carboxylic acid group in one molecule, and a plurality of different functional groups in one molecule. It is more preferable to have a hydroxy group and a carboxylic acid group in one molecule.
  • the hydrogen bonding compound preferably contains 1 to 2 aromatic rings as a mother nucleus, and the value obtained by dividing the number of functional groups contained in one molecule by the molecular weight of the compound is 0.00. It is preferably 01 or more.
  • the above effect is such that the hydrogen-bonding compound is bonded (hydrogen bond) to a site where the cellulose ester and water molecules interact (hydrogen bonds), thereby suppressing the change in charge distribution due to desorption of water molecules. For the reason.
  • the hydrogen bonding compound can be added in the range of 1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the cellulose ester.
  • the film of the present invention is preferably used on the viewing side or the backlight side of the polarizing plate, it preferably contains an ultraviolet absorber for the purpose of imparting an ultraviolet absorbing function. It does not specifically limit as a ultraviolet absorber, What was mentioned above as what can be contained in the polyester film as the protective film A can be used similarly.
  • the amount of the UV absorber used in the cellulose ester film as the protective film B is not uniform depending on the type of UV absorber, usage conditions, etc., but generally it is preferably 0.05 with respect to 100% by mass of the cellulose ester. It is added in a range of ⁇ 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass.
  • the matting agent is fine particles imparting slipperiness of the film, and may be either an inorganic compound or an organic compound as long as it does not impair the transparency of the resulting film and has heat resistance during melting. These matting agents can be used alone or in combination of two or more. By using particles having different particle sizes and shapes (for example, acicular and spherical), both transparency and slipperiness can be made highly compatible. Among these, silicon dioxide, which is excellent in transparency (haze), is particularly preferably used because it has a refractive index close to that of the acrylic copolymer or cellulose ester used as a compatible resin.
  • silicon dioxide examples include Aerosil 200V, Aerosil R972V, Aerosil R972, R974, R812, 200, 300, R202, OX50, TT600, NAX50 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.), Sea Hoster KEP-10, Sea Hoster KEP- 30, Seahoster KEP-50 (above, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.), Silo Hovic 100 (manufactured by Fuji Silysia), Nip Seal E220A (manufactured by Nippon Silica Industry), Admafine SO (manufactured by Admatechs) Goods etc. can be preferably used.
  • the shape of the particles can be used without particular limitation, such as indefinite shape, needle shape, flat shape, spherical shape, etc. However, the use of spherical particles is preferable because the transparency of the resulting film can be improved.
  • the particle size is preferably smaller than the wavelength of visible light, and more preferably 1 ⁇ 2 or less of the wavelength of visible light. . If the size of the particles is too small, the slipperiness may not be improved, so the range of 80 nm to 180 nm is particularly preferable.
  • the particle size means the size of the aggregate when the particle is an aggregate of primary particles. Moreover, when a particle is not spherical, it means the diameter of a circle corresponding to the projected area.
  • the matting agent is added in an amount of 0.05 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass with respect to the resin (cellulose ester).
  • the film of the present invention may contain, for example, acrylic particles described in International Publication No. 2010/001668 in an amount within a range where transparency can be maintained.
  • the acrylic particles have an action of improving the brittleness of the film.
  • acrylic particles examples include, for example, “Metablene W-341” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., “Kane Ace” manufactured by Kaneka Corporation, “Paraloid” manufactured by Kureha Co., Ltd., “Roid and Haas Co.” “Acryloid”, “Staffroid” manufactured by Ganz Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd., Chemisnow MR-2G, MS-300X (above, manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd.) and “Parapet SA” manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd. Or 2 or more types can be used.
  • the hydrogen bonding solvent can be added for the purpose of adjusting (reducing) the solution viscosity in a solvent for dissolving the constituent materials of the film when a film is produced by the solution casting method.
  • the hydrogen bonding solvent is J.I. N. As described in Israel Ativili, “Intermolecular Forces and Surface Forces” (Takeshi Kondo, Hiroyuki Oshima, Maglow Hill Publishing, 1991) and electrically negative atoms (oxygen, nitrogen, fluorine, chlorine)
  • a hydrogen bond is added to the solvent for dissolution.
  • a part or all of the solvent may be used.
  • An ionic surfactant can be added for the purpose of reducing the peeling force during film formation.
  • ionic surfactant examples include a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and an amphoteric surfactant.
  • cationic surfactant examples include aliphatic amine salts, aliphatic quaternary ammonium salts, benzalkonium salts, benzethonium chloride, pyridinium salts, imidazolinium salts, and the like.
  • anionic surfactant examples include higher alcohol (C 8 -C 22 ) sulfate salts (for example, sodium salt of lauryl alcohol sulfate, sodium salt of octyl alcohol sulfate, ammonium salt of lauryl alcohol sulfate, “Tepol-81” ( Trade name, manufactured by Shell Chemical Co., Ltd.), secondary sodium alkyl sulfate, etc.), aliphatic alcohol phosphate salts (eg, sodium salt of cetyl alcohol phosphate), alkylaryl sulfonates (eg, dodecylbenzenesulfonic acid) Sodium salt, isopropyl naphthalene sulfonic acid sodium salt, dinaphthalenedisulfonic acid sodium salt, metanitrobenzene sulfonic acid sodium salt), alkylamide sulfonates (eg Examples thereof include C 17 H 33 CON (CH 3 ) CH 2 SO 3 Na) and sulfonates of dibas
  • amphoteric surfactants include carboxybetaine type, sulfobetaine type, aminocarboxylate, imidazolinium betaine and the like.
  • an anionic surfactant is preferable in the present invention.
  • the above surfactant is 0.01% by mass or more and 5% by mass or less, preferably 0.05% by mass or more and 3% by mass or less, more preferably 0.2% by mass with respect to the total amount of the resin constituting the film. % To 2% by mass is preferable.
  • the addition amount is larger than this range, the surfactant is precipitated from the film, or the hygroscopicity of the film is increased, and a quality undesirable for the quality of the retardation film is exhibited. If the addition amount is less than this range, the effect of the present invention using a surfactant may not be obtained.
  • a haze value (turbidity) is used as an index for judging the transparency of the cellulose ester film.
  • the haze value is preferably 0.6% or less, and is 0.4% or less. More preferably.
  • the haze value may exceed the above range.
  • the internal haze of the film is preferably 0.01 to 0.1.
  • the film of the present invention preferably has a total light transmittance of 90% or more, more preferably 93% or more. Moreover, as a realistic upper limit, it is about 99%.
  • the haze value and transmittance can be measured using a haze meter.
  • a film satisfying the above physical properties can be preferably used as a polarizing plate protective film for a large-sized liquid crystal display device or a liquid crystal display device for outdoor use.
  • the retardation value in the cellulose ester film as the protective film B is not particularly limited, but the in-plane retardation value Ro defined by the following formulas (i) and (ii) is in the range of 30 to 70 nm,
  • the retardation value Rt in the thickness direction is preferably in the range of 100 to 140 nm from the viewpoint of improving contrast and viewing angle when mounted on a VA display device.
  • the retardation value Ro in the in-plane direction is in the range of 45 to 60 nm and the retardation value Rt in the thickness direction is in the range of 110 to 135 nm
  • the contrast and viewing angle when mounted on the VA display device Is particularly improved and preferable.
  • n x a refractive index in the direction x in which the refractive index in the plane direction is maximized in the film.
  • n y in-plane direction of the film, the refractive index in the direction y perpendicular to the direction x.
  • nz represents the refractive index in the thickness direction z of the film.
  • d represents the thickness (nm) of the film. The measurement is performed at a measurement wavelength of 590 nm in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH.
  • the film forming method is preferably a solution casting film forming method and a melt casting film forming method. More preferred for obtaining.
  • the cellulose ester film is produced by dissolving the cellulose ester and a desired additive in a solvent to prepare a dope (dissolution process; dope preparation process), and moving the dope indefinitely.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a dope preparation step, a casting step, and a drying step (solvent evaporation step) of a solution casting film forming method preferable for the present invention.
  • the main dope is filtered by the main filter 3, and the additive solution is added in-line from 16 to this.
  • the main dope may contain about 10 to 50% by mass of the recycled material.
  • the return material is a product obtained by finely pulverizing a film, and is produced by forming a film by cutting off both sides of the film, or by using a film raw material that has been speculated out by scratches or the like.
  • a pellet obtained by pelletizing cellulose ester and a desired additive in advance can be preferably used as a raw material for the resin used for preparing the dope.
  • Dissolution process This step is a step of forming a dope by dissolving the cellulose ester and a desired additive in a dissolving kettle in a solvent mainly composed of a good solvent for the cellulose ester while stirring.
  • the concentration of cellulose ester in the dope is preferably higher because the drying load after casting on the metal support can be reduced. However, if the concentration of cellulose ester is too high, the load during filtration increases and the filtration accuracy is poor. Become.
  • the concentration for achieving both of these is preferably 10 to 35% by mass, more preferably 15 to 22% by mass.
  • Solvents used in the dope may be used alone or in combination of two or more. However, it is preferable to use a mixture of a good solvent and a poor solvent of cellulose ester in terms of production efficiency, and there are many good solvents. This is preferable from the viewpoint of solubility of cellulose acetate.
  • the preferable range of the mixing ratio of the good solvent and the poor solvent is 70 to 98% by mass for the good solvent and 2 to 30% by mass for the poor solvent.
  • the good solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include organic halogen compounds such as methylene chloride, dioxolanes, acetone, methyl acetate, and methyl acetoacetate. Particularly preferred is methylene chloride or methyl acetate.
  • the poor solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but for example, methanol, ethanol, n-butanol, cyclohexane, cyclohexanone and the like are preferably used.
  • the dope preferably contains 0.01 to 2% by mass of water.
  • the solvent used for dissolving the cellulose ester is used by collecting the solvent removed from the film by drying in the film-forming process and reusing it.
  • the recovery solvent may contain trace amounts of additives added to cellulose acetate, such as plasticizers, UV absorbers, polymers, monomer components, etc., but these are preferably reused even if they are included. Can be purified and reused if necessary.
  • a general method can be used as a method for dissolving the cellulose ester in preparing the dope described above. Specifically, a method carried out at normal pressure, a method carried out below the boiling point of the main solvent, a method carried out under pressure above the boiling point of the main solvent, JP-A-9-95544, JP-A-9-95557, Various dissolution methods such as a method using a cooling dissolution method as described in Kaihei 9-95538 and a method using a high pressure as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-21379 can be used. Among them, a method of performing pressurization at a temperature equal to or higher than the boiling point of the main solvent is preferable.
  • a method of stirring and dissolving while heating at a temperature that is equal to or higher than the boiling point of the solvent at normal pressure and does not boil under pressure is preferable in order to prevent the generation of massive undissolved material called gel or mako.
  • a method in which cellulose acetate is mixed with a poor solvent and wetted or swollen, and then a good solvent is added and dissolved is also preferably used.
  • the pressurization may be performed by a method of injecting an inert gas such as nitrogen gas or a method of increasing the vapor pressure of the solvent by heating. Heating is preferably performed from the outside.
  • a jacket type is preferable because temperature control is easy.
  • the heating temperature with the addition of the solvent is preferably higher from the viewpoint of the solubility of cellulose acetate, but if the heating temperature is too high, the required pressure increases and the productivity deteriorates.
  • the preferred heating temperature is 45 to 120 ° C, more preferably 60 to 110 ° C, and still more preferably 70 ° C to 105 ° C.
  • the pressure is adjusted so that the solvent does not boil at the set temperature.
  • a cooling dissolution method is also preferably used, whereby the cellulose ester can be dissolved in a solvent such as methyl acetate.
  • this cellulose ester solution (doping during or after dissolution) is preferably filtered using a suitable filter medium such as filter paper.
  • the filter medium it is preferable that the absolute filtration accuracy is small in order to remove insoluble matters and the like, but if the absolute filtration accuracy is too small, there is a problem that the filter medium is likely to be clogged. For this reason, a filter medium with an absolute filtration accuracy of 0.008 mm or less is preferable, a filter medium with 0.001 to 0.008 mm is more preferable, and a filter medium with 0.003 to 0.007 mm is more preferable.
  • the material of the filter medium there are no particular restrictions on the material of the filter medium, and ordinary filter media can be used. However, plastic filter media such as polypropylene and Teflon (registered trademark), and metal filter media such as stainless steel do not drop off fibers. preferable.
  • a bright spot foreign object is placed when two polarizing plates are placed in a crossed Nicol state, a film or the like is placed between them, light is applied from one polarizing plate, and the opposite is observed when observed from the other polarizing plate. It is a point (foreign matter) where light from the side appears to leak, and the number of bright spots having a diameter of 0.01 mm or more is preferably 200 / cm 2 or less. More preferably, it is 100 pieces / cm 2 or less, further preferably 50 pieces / m 2 or less, and further preferably 0 to 10 pieces / cm 2 . Further, it is preferable that the number of bright spots of 0.01 mm or less is small.
  • the dope can be filtered by a normal method, but the method of filtering while heating at a temperature not lower than the boiling point of the solvent at normal pressure and in a range where the solvent does not boil under pressure is the filtration pressure before and after filtration.
  • the increase in the difference (referred to as differential pressure) is small and preferable.
  • a preferable temperature is 45 to 120 ° C, more preferably 45 to 70 ° C, and further preferably 45 to 55 ° C.
  • the filtration pressure is preferably 1.6 MPa or less, more preferably 1.2 MPa or less, and further preferably 1.0 MPa or less.
  • the dope is cast on a metal support. That is, in this step, the dope is fed to the pressurizing die 30 through a liquid feed pump (for example, a pressurized metering gear pump) and transferred indefinitely, for example, an endless metal belt 31 such as a stainless steel belt or a rotating metal drum. The dope is cast from the pressure die slit to the casting position on the metal support.
  • a liquid feed pump for example, a pressurized metering gear pump
  • ⁇ Pressure dies that can adjust the slit shape of the die base and make the film thickness uniform are preferred.
  • the pressure die include a coat hanger die and a T die, and any of them is preferably used.
  • the surface of the metal support is preferably a mirror surface.
  • two or more pressure dies may be provided on the metal support, and the dope amount may be divided and stacked. Or it is also preferable to obtain the film of a laminated structure by the co-casting method which casts several dope simultaneously.
  • the cast width is preferably 1.4 m or more from the viewpoint of productivity. More preferably, it is 1.4 to 4 m. When it exceeds 4 m, there is a risk of streaking in the manufacturing process or lowering of stability in the subsequent transport process. More preferably, it is 1.6 to 2.5 m in terms of transportability and productivity.
  • the metal support in the casting process is preferably a mirror-finished surface, and a stainless steel belt or a drum whose surface is plated with a casting is preferably used as the metal support.
  • the surface temperature of the metal support in the casting step is ⁇ 50 ° C. to less than the boiling point of the solvent, and a higher temperature is preferable because the web drying rate can be increased. May deteriorate.
  • the preferred support temperature is 0 to 55 ° C, more preferably 25 to 50 ° C.
  • the method for controlling the temperature of the metal support is not particularly limited, but there are a method of blowing hot air or cold air, and a method of contacting hot water with the back side of the metal support. It is preferable to use warm water because heat transfer is performed efficiently, so that the time until the temperature of the metal support becomes constant is short. When warm air is used, wind at a temperature higher than the target temperature may be used.
  • Solvent evaporation step This step is a step of evaporating the solvent by heating the web (the dope is cast on the casting support and the formed dope film is called the web) on the casting support. It is.
  • the drying efficiency is good and preferable.
  • a method of combining them is also preferably used.
  • the web on the support after casting is preferably dried on the support in an atmosphere of 40 to 100 ° C. In order to maintain the atmosphere at 40 to 100 ° C., it is preferable to apply hot air at this temperature to the upper surface of the web or heat by means such as infrared rays.
  • peeling step Next, the web is peeled from the metal support. That is, this step is a step of peeling the web where the solvent is evaporated on the metal support at the peeling position. The peeled web is sent to the next process.
  • the temperature at the peeling position on the metal support is preferably within the range of ⁇ 50 to 40 ° C., more preferably within the range of 10 to 40 ° C., and within the range of 15 to 30 ° C. when the stainless steel belt is formed. Most preferably, it is ⁇ 30 to 10 ° C. when forming a drum.
  • the residual solvent amount of the web on the metal support at the time of peeling is appropriately adjusted depending on the strength of drying conditions, the length of the metal support, and the like.
  • the amount of residual solvent is defined by the following formula.
  • M is the mass of a sample collected during or after the production of the web or film
  • N is the mass after heating M at 115 ° C. for 1 hour.
  • the peeling tension when peeling the metal support and the film is preferably 300 N / m or less. More preferably, it is within the range of 196 to 245 N / m. However, when wrinkles easily occur during peeling, peeling with a tension of 190 N / m or less, preferably 100 to 190 N / m is preferred.
  • the web is peeled from the metal support, and further dried, and the residual solvent amount is preferably 1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and particularly preferably. Is 0 to 0.01% by mass or less.
  • a roll drying method (a method in which webs are alternately passed through a plurality of rolls arranged above and below) and a method in which the web is dried while being conveyed by a tenter method are employed.
  • the web is fed using a drying device 35 that alternately conveys the web through rollers arranged in a drying device and / or a tenter stretching device 34 that clips and conveys both ends of the web with clips. dry.
  • the means for drying the web is not particularly limited, and can be generally performed with hot air, infrared rays, a heating roll, microwave, or the like, but is preferably performed with hot air in terms of simplicity. Too rapid drying tends to impair the flatness of the finished film. Drying at a high temperature is preferably performed from about 8% by mass or less of the residual solvent. Throughout, the drying is generally carried out in the range of 40-250 ° C. It is particularly preferable to dry within the range of 40 to 200 ° C. The drying temperature is increased stepwise and is preferably heated to about 100 to 150 ° C., preferably 5 to 30 minutes, more preferably 6 to 12 minutes.
  • tenter stretching apparatus When using a tenter stretching apparatus, it is preferable to use an apparatus that can independently control the film gripping length (distance from the start of gripping to the end of gripping) left and right by the left and right gripping means of the tenter. In the tenter process, it is also preferable to intentionally create sections having different temperatures in order to improve planarity.
  • the web is preferably stretched in at least one direction from the metal support.
  • the orientation of molecules in the film can be controlled by the stretching treatment.
  • the retardation value can be changed by lowering or increasing the tension in the longitudinal direction.
  • two axes are sequentially or simultaneously applied to the longitudinal direction (film forming direction; casting direction; MD direction) of the film and the direction orthogonal to the film plane, that is, the width direction (TD direction).
  • Stretching or uniaxial stretching can be performed.
  • it is a biaxially stretched film that is biaxially stretched in the casting direction (MD direction) and the width direction (TD direction), but the cellulose ester film according to the present invention may be a uniaxially stretched film. And an unstretched film may be sufficient.
  • the stretching operation may be performed in multiple stages. When biaxial stretching is performed, simultaneous biaxial stretching may be performed or may be performed stepwise.
  • stepwise means that, for example, stretching in different stretching directions can be sequentially performed, stretching in the same direction is divided into multiple stages, and stretching in different directions is added to any one of the stages.
  • stretching steps are possible: -Stretch in the casting direction-> Stretch in the width direction-> Stretch in the casting direction-> Stretch in the casting direction-Stretch in the width direction-> Stretch in the width direction-> Stretch in the casting direction-> Stretch in the casting direction.
  • Simultaneous biaxial stretching includes stretching in one direction and contracting the other while relaxing the tension.
  • the draw ratios in the biaxial directions perpendicular to each other are preferably in the range of 0.01 to 2.0% in the casting direction (MD direction) and 10 to 50% in the width direction, respectively.
  • a range of 0.1 to 1.0% in the extending direction and 20 to 40% in the width direction is preferable.
  • the residual solvent amount at this time is preferably in the range of 15 to 40% so that the cellulose ester film exhibits a predetermined toughness value.
  • the stretching temperature is usually preferably performed in the temperature range of Tg to Tg + 60 ° C. of the resin constituting the film.
  • the stretching temperature is preferably from 120 ° C. to 200 ° C., more preferably from 130 ° C. to 200 ° C., and more preferably from 140 ° C. to 190 ° C. or less.
  • the amount of residual solvent in the film at the time of stretching is not particularly limited, but in order for the cellulose ester film to exhibit a predetermined toughness value, the amount of residual solvent at the time of stretching in the width direction is 2 to 5 mass. % Is preferred.
  • the method of stretching the web For example, a method in which a difference in peripheral speed is applied to a plurality of rolls, and the roll peripheral speed difference is used to stretch in the longitudinal direction, the both ends of the web are fixed with clips and pins, and the interval between the clips and pins is increased in the traveling direction And a method of stretching in the vertical direction, a method of stretching in the horizontal direction and stretching in the horizontal direction, a method of stretching in the vertical and horizontal directions and stretching in both the vertical and horizontal directions, and the like. Of course, these methods may be used in combination. Among them, it is particularly preferable to perform stretching in the width direction (lateral direction) by a tenter method in which both ends of the web are gripped by clips or the like.
  • a tenter it may be a pin tenter or a clip tenter.
  • the slow axis or the fast axis of the cellulose ester film according to the present invention exists in the film plane, and ⁇ 1 is ⁇ 1 ° or more and + 1 ° or less when the angle formed with the film forming direction is ⁇ 1 in the entire film width and length. It is preferably ⁇ 0.5 ° or more and + 0.5 ° or less, more preferably ⁇ 0.2 ° or more and + 0.2 ° or less.
  • This ⁇ 1 can be defined as an orientation angle, and ⁇ 1 can be measured using an automatic birefringence meter KOBRA-21ADH (Oji Scientific Instruments).
  • KOBRA-21ADH Oji Scientific Instruments
  • a cellulose ester film is obtained by winding the obtained web (finished film). More specifically, it is a step of winding the film as a film by a winder 37 after the residual solvent amount in the web becomes 2% by mass or less, and the dimensional stability is achieved by setting the residual solvent amount to 0.4% by mass or less. A film having good properties can be obtained. In particular, it is preferable to wind in the range of 0.00 to 0.10% by mass.
  • a generally used one may be used, and there are a constant torque method, a constant tension method, a taper tension method, a program tension control method with a constant internal stress, etc., and these may be used properly.
  • the end Before winding, the end may be slit and cut to the product width, and knurled (embossed) may be applied to both ends to prevent sticking and scratching during winding.
  • the knurling method can process a metal ring having an uneven pattern on its side surface by heating or pressing. Note that the clip holding portions at both ends of the film are usually cut off because the film is deformed and cannot be used as a product. If the material has not deteriorated due to heat, it is reused after recovery.
  • the cellulose ester film is preferably a long film.
  • the cellulose ester film has a thickness of about 100 m to 10000 m, and is usually in the form of a roll.
  • the width of the film is preferably 1.4 to 4 m, more preferably 1.4 to 4 m, and more preferably 1.6 to 4 m in order to meet demands for an increase in the size of liquid crystal display devices and production efficiency. More preferably, it is ⁇ 3 m.
  • the cellulose ester film laminate produced by the above method is preferably subjected to aging treatment for 3 days or more under conditions of 50 ° C. or higher after the outer peripheral portion is packaged.
  • aging treatment for 3 days or more under conditions of 50 ° C. or higher after the outer peripheral portion is packaged.
  • the polarizer which is the main component of the polarizing plate of the present invention, is an element that passes only light having a plane of polarization in a certain direction
  • a typical known polarizer is a polyvinyl alcohol polarizing film.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol polarizing film includes those obtained by dyeing iodine on a polyvinyl alcohol film and those obtained by dyeing a dichroic dye.
  • a polarizer obtained by forming a polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution into a film and dyeing it by uniaxial stretching or dyeing and then uniaxially stretching and then preferably performing a durability treatment with a boron compound may be used.
  • the thickness of the polarizer is preferably 2 to 30 ⁇ m, more preferably 2 to 15 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of thin film suitability, and further preferably 3 to 10 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of further thin film suitability and handleability.
  • the ethylene unit content described in JP-A-2003-248123, JP-A-2003-342322, etc. is 1 to 4 mol%
  • the degree of polymerization is 2000 to 4000
  • the degree of saponification is 99.0 to 99.99 mol%.
  • the ethylene-modified polyvinyl alcohol is also preferably used.
  • an ethylene-modified polyvinyl alcohol film having a hot water cutting temperature of 66 to 73 ° C. is preferably used.
  • a polarizer using this ethylene-modified polyvinyl alcohol film is excellent in polarization performance and durability, and has few color spots, and is particularly preferably used for a large-sized liquid crystal display device.
  • a coating-type polarizer is prepared by the method described in JP 2011-1000016 A, JP 4691205 A, JP 4751481 A, and JP 4804589 A and bonded to the cellulose ester film according to the present invention. It is also preferable to produce a polarizing plate.
  • each of the protective film A and the protective film B demonstrated above and the polarizer are bonded by the ultraviolet curable adhesive.
  • the productivity is high and the durability of the polarizer is increased. Excellent properties can be obtained.
  • composition of UV curable adhesive As the UV curable adhesive composition for polarizing plates, a photo radical polymerization composition using photo radical polymerization, a photo cation polymerization composition using photo cation polymerization, and photo radical polymerization and photo cation polymerization are used in combination. Hybrid type compositions are known.
  • the radical photopolymerizable composition includes a radically polymerizable compound containing a polar group such as a hydroxy group and a carboxy group described in JP-A-2008-009329 and a radically polymerizable compound not containing a polar group at a specific ratio.
  • Composition) and the like are known.
  • the radical polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having a radical polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated bond.
  • the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond capable of radical polymerization include a compound having a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • Examples of the compound having a (meth) acryloyl group include an N-substituted (meth) acrylamide compound and a (meth) acrylate compound.
  • (Meth) acrylamide means acrylamide or methacrylamide.
  • cationic photopolymerization type composition as disclosed in JP2011-08234A, ( ⁇ ) a cationic polymerizable compound, ( ⁇ ) a cationic photopolymerization initiator, and ( ⁇ ) a wavelength longer than 380 nm.
  • an ultraviolet curable adhesive composition containing each component of a photosensitizer exhibiting maximum absorption in the light of ( ⁇ ) and a naphthalene-based photosensitization aid.
  • other ultraviolet curable adhesives may be used.
  • a pre-processing process is a process of performing an easily bonding process to the adhesive surface of a cellulose-ester film with a polarizer.
  • an easy adhesion treatment is performed on the surface of each protective film that is bonded to the polarizer. Examples of the easy adhesion treatment include corona treatment and plasma treatment.
  • the ultraviolet curable adhesive is applied to at least one of the adhesive surfaces of the polarizer and the protective film.
  • the application method is not particularly limited. For example, various wet coating methods such as a doctor blade, a wire bar, a die coater, a comma coater, and a gravure coater can be used.
  • various wet coating methods such as a doctor blade, a wire bar, a die coater, a comma coater, and a gravure coater can be used.
  • the method of pressurizing with a roll etc. and spreading it uniformly can also be utilized.
  • Bonding process After apply
  • this bonding step for example, when an ultraviolet curable adhesive is applied to the surface of the polarizer in the previous application step, a protective film is superimposed thereon.
  • a polarizer is superimposed thereon.
  • the ultraviolet curable adhesive is cast between the polarizer and the protective film, the polarizer and the protective film A are superposed in that state.
  • the protective film A and the protective film B are bonded to both surfaces of the polarizer, respectively, and both surfaces use an ultraviolet curable adhesive
  • the protective film is provided on both surfaces of the polarizer via an ultraviolet curable adhesive.
  • a and protective film B are overlaid.
  • both sides when the protective film A is superposed on one side of the polarizer, the protective film A and the protective film B are superposed on the polarizer side and the protective film A side, and on both sides of the polarizer.
  • the pressure is sandwiched between a pressure roller or the like from the protective film A and the protective film B side).
  • Metal, rubber, or the like can be used as the material of the pressure roller.
  • the pressure rollers arranged on both sides may be made of the same material or different materials.
  • an uncured ultraviolet curable adhesive is irradiated with ultraviolet rays, and a cationic polymerizable compound (for example, epoxy compound or oxetane compound) or a radical polymerizable compound (for example, acrylate compound, acrylamide compound, etc.)
  • a cationic polymerizable compound for example, epoxy compound or oxetane compound
  • a radical polymerizable compound for example, acrylate compound, acrylamide compound, etc.
  • ultraviolet rays are applied in a state where the protective film A and the protective film B are superimposed on the both surfaces of the polarizer via an ultraviolet curable adhesive, respectively. It is advantageous to irradiate and simultaneously cure the UV curable adhesive on both sides.
  • the ultraviolet irradiation conditions can be adopted as the ultraviolet irradiation conditions as long as the ultraviolet curable adhesive applied to the present invention can be cured.
  • the dose of ultraviolet is 50 ⁇ 1500mJ / cm 2 in accumulated light quantity, and even more preferably 100 ⁇ 500mJ / cm 2.
  • the line speed depends on the curing time of the adhesive, but is preferably 1 to 500 m / min, more preferably 5 to 300 m / min, and further preferably 10 to 100 m / min. is there. If the line speed is 1 m / min or more, productivity can be ensured, or damage to the protective film A can be suppressed, and a polarizing plate having excellent durability can be produced. If the line speed is 500 m / min or less, the ultraviolet curable adhesive is sufficiently cured, and an ultraviolet curable adhesive layer having a desired hardness and excellent adhesiveness can be formed.
  • the polarizing plate according to the present invention can be used for various display devices, but is particularly preferably applied to a liquid crystal display device.
  • a TN (Twisted Nematic) method As a liquid crystal display device having the polarizing plate of the present invention, a TN (Twisted Nematic) method, a STN (Super Twisted Nematic) method, an IPS (In-Plane Switched) method, an OCB (Optically Compensated Birefringence Vrefringence Virgent Affinity A nt Virgentence V irencement V irencement V irencement V irencement V irencement V refrenceence method. It can be preferably used for MVA (including Multi-domain / Vertical / Alignment and PVA; Patterned / Vertical / Alignment), HAN (Hybrid Aligned / Nematic), and the like. In order to increase the contrast, the VA (MVA, PVA) method is preferable.
  • MVA Multi-domain / Vertical / Alignment and PVA; Patterned / Vertical / Alignment
  • HAN Hybri
  • the pressure was increased and the pressure esterification reaction was performed under conditions of a gauge pressure of 0.34 MPa and 240 ° C., and then the esterification reaction vessel was returned to normal pressure, and 0.014 parts by mass of phosphoric acid was added. Furthermore, it heated up to 260 degreeC over 15 minutes, and 0.012 mass part of trimethyl phosphate was added. Then, after 15 minutes, dispersion treatment was performed with a high-pressure disperser, and after 15 minutes, the obtained esterification reaction product was transferred to a polycondensation reaction can and subjected to polycondensation reaction at 280 ° C. under reduced pressure.
  • PET (B) 10 parts by weight of dried UV absorber (2,2 ′-(1,4-phenylene) bis (4H-3,1-benzoxazinon-4-one), 90 parts by weight of PET (A) containing no particles And a polyethylene terephthalate resin (B) containing an ultraviolet absorber was obtained using a kneading extruder (the obtained one is also referred to as “PET (B)”).
  • PET film 1 A polyethylene terephthalate film having a three-layer structure was produced by the following method.
  • PET (A) resin pellets containing no particles and 10 parts by weight of PET (B) resin pellets containing an ultraviolet absorber were dried under reduced pressure (1 Torr) at 135 ° C. for 6 hours, and then an extruder (for intermediate layer)
  • PET (A) was dried by a conventional method and supplied to an extruder (for both outer layers) and dissolved at 285 ° C.
  • These two types of polymers were each filtered twice with a filter medium made of a sintered stainless steel (nominal filtration accuracy of 10 ⁇ m particles, 95% cut), laminated in a two-type, three-layer confluence block, and extruded into a sheet form from the die.
  • the film was wound around a casting drum having a surface temperature of 30 ° C. using an electrostatic application casting method, and solidified by cooling to obtain an unstretched film.
  • the discharge amount of each extruder was adjusted so that the thickness ratio of each layer was 10 (outer layer): 80 (intermediate layer): 10 (outer layer).
  • the unstretched film on which this coating layer was formed was preheated to 145 ° C. using a heated roll group and an infrared heater, and then stretched 3 times in the running direction (MD direction) with a roll group having a difference in peripheral speed. Thereafter, the film was guided to a tenter stretching machine and guided to a hot air zone having a temperature of 135 ° C. while being gripped by a clip, and stretched 4 times in the width direction (TD direction). In this way, a biaxially oriented PET film 1 (film thickness 60 ⁇ m) was obtained.
  • the obtained dope was uniformly cast on a stainless band support using a belt casting apparatus under the conditions of a dope liquid temperature of 35 ° C. and a width of 1.95 m.
  • membrane was evaporated until the amount of residual solvents became 30 mass%, and the web was formed, Then, the web was peeled from the stainless steel band support body.
  • the obtained web was further dried at 35 ° C. and then slit to have a width of 1.90 m. Thereafter, the web was stretched 0.5% in the running direction (MD direction) with a group of rolls having a difference in peripheral speed under the condition of 160 ° C. Subsequently, it extended
  • the residual solvent amount of the web at the start of stretching in the TD direction was 3% by mass.
  • the obtained film was dried at 120 ° C. for 15 minutes while being conveyed by a number of rolls in the drying apparatus, and then slit to 1.6 m width to obtain a cellulose acetate film.
  • the end was knurled.
  • the lengthy cellulose acetate film of width 1.6m, length 6000m, and thickness 30micrometer obtained in this way is wound up in the length direction, and the laminated roll body 1 of the cellulose acetate film 1 is obtained. It was.
  • the produced laminated roll body 1A was subjected to an aging treatment for 3 days in a constant temperature environment of 50 ° C. to produce a cellulose acetate film 1.
  • test piece 1) Cut out five optical films into 120 mm (MD direction) ⁇ 10 mm (TD direction) to obtain test pieces for MD direction measurement.
  • the obtained test piece is conditioned for 24 hours in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH.
  • the tensile elastic modulus of the test piece is measured by the method described in JISK7127.
  • Tensilon RTC-1225 manufactured by Orientec Co., Ltd. is used as the tensile tester, and the upper end and the lower end in the longitudinal direction (MD direction) of the test piece are sandwiched by 100 mm between the chucks.
  • Toughness stress at break T (N / mm 2 or MPa) ⁇ cross-sectional area A (mm 2 ) of test piece in a direction perpendicular to the tensile direction ⁇ (elongation at break E (%) / 100) 1/2
  • Cross-sectional area A (mm 2 ) of the test piece width 10 (mm) of the test piece ⁇ film thickness t (mm) of the test piece
  • TD direction toughness of the optical film five optical films are cut into a size of 120 mm (TD direction) ⁇ 10 mm (MD direction) to prepare a test piece for TD direction measurement. The same measurement as described above is performed except that the test pieces are pulled in the longitudinal direction (TD direction) of the test piece, and the toughness in the TD direction is calculated.
  • the thickness of the unstretched polarizer was changed to 8 ⁇ m, 10 ⁇ m, 75 ⁇ m, and 90 ⁇ m, respectively, thereby further producing a polarizer having a thickness of 1.5 ⁇ m, 2 ⁇ m, 15 ⁇ m, or 18 ⁇ m. .
  • a polarizer having a thickness of 1.5 ⁇ m, 2 ⁇ m, 15 ⁇ m, or 18 ⁇ m.
  • UV curable adhesive solution Each of the following components was mixed and then defoamed to prepare an ultraviolet curable adhesive solution.
  • Triarylsulfonium hexafluorophosphate was blended as a 50% propylene carbonate solution, and the solid content of triarylsulfonium hexafluorophosphate was shown below.
  • 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl-3,4-epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate 45 parts by mass Epolide GT-301 (alicyclic epoxy resin manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries) 40 parts by mass 1,4-butanediol diglycidyl ether 15 parts by mass Triarylsulfonium hexafluorophosphate 2.3 parts by mass 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene 0.1 parts by mass 1,4-diethoxynaphthalene 2.0 parts by mass [Preparation of Polarizing Plate] (Preparation of polarizing plate 1) A polarizing plate 1 (101) having the configuration shown in FIG. 1 was produced according to the following method. The numerical value in parentheses indicates the number of each component described in FIG.
  • the cellulose ester film (105) as the protective film B the cellulose ester film 1 prepared above was used, and the surface thereof was subjected to corona discharge treatment.
  • the corona discharge treatment was performed at a corona output intensity of 2.0 kW and a line speed of 18 m / min.
  • the ultraviolet curable adhesive liquid prepared above is applied to the corona discharge treated surface of the cellulose ester film 1 (105) with a bar coater so that the film thickness after curing is about 3 ⁇ m, and is photocurable.
  • a resin layer (103B) was formed.
  • the polyvinyl alcohol-iodine polarizer (104, thickness 10 ⁇ m) produced above was bonded to the obtained photocurable resin layer (103B).
  • the PET film 1 produced above was used as the protective film A (102), and the surface was subjected to corona discharge treatment.
  • the conditions of the corona discharge treatment were a corona output intensity of 2.0 kW and a speed of 18 m / min.
  • UV curable adhesive solution prepared above is applied to the corona discharge treated surface of the PET film 1 (102) with a bar coater so that the film thickness after curing is about 3 ⁇ m.
  • An agent layer (103A) was formed.
  • a polarizer (104) bonded to one side of the cellulose ester film 1 (105) is bonded to the UV curable adhesive layer (103A), and a protective film A (PET film, 102) / UV curable type is bonded.
  • a laminate in which the adhesive layer (103A) / polarizer (104) / ultraviolet curable adhesive layer (103B) / protective film B (cellulose ester film, 105) was laminated was obtained. In that case, it bonded so that the slow axis of a cellulose-ester film (105) and the absorption axis of a polarizer (104) might mutually orthogonally cross.
  • UV curable adhesive layers (103A, 103B) were cured to produce polarizing plate 1 (101).
  • the polarizing plates produced above were cut into squares each having a size of 20 cm ⁇ 20 cm and bonded to a glass substrate using an acrylic adhesive. Next, the bonded polarizing plate was peeled from the glass with a strength of 5N from the corner. This operation was performed with 10 polarizing plates for one type of sample, and the number of polarizing plates that were not peeled completely due to tears in the polarizing plate was counted. And it ranked by the following references
  • The number of polarizing plates that were not completely peeled was 3 to 3. 4 sheets ⁇ : The number of polarizing plates that were not completely peeled was 5 or more. Note that the reworkability of the polarizing plates is practically acceptable as long as it is at the level of ⁇ , but is preferably at least the level of ⁇ . And ⁇ are particularly preferred.
  • the total film thickness of each produced polarizing plate was measured, and the suitability of the thin film was evaluated according to the following criteria. If it was a rank of ⁇ or higher, it was determined that it had suitability as a polarizing plate in response to a request for thinning the display: A: The total film thickness of the polarizing plate is less than 100 ⁇ m. O: The total film thickness of the polarizing plate is 100 ⁇ m or more and 150 ⁇ m or less. ⁇ : The total film thickness of the polarizing plate is thicker than 150 ⁇ m and less than 180 ⁇ m. X: The layer thickness of the polarizing plate is 180 ⁇ m or more. Each evaluation result obtained as described above is shown in Table 3 below.
  • the polarizing plate of the present invention having the structure defined in the present invention is a case where a thinned cellulose ester film is used as the protective film B for the comparative example. (That is, while having thin film suitability), it is found to be excellent in reworkability.
  • the polarizing plate 28 using cellulose ester film No. 12 using cellulose acetate having an acetyl group substitution degree of 2.45) was weak in strength. It was easy to tear.
  • the display device on which the polarizing plates 31, 37, and 44 are mounted has a large change in color when observed obliquely as compared with the other polarizing plates, and the polarizing plate 36 is also oblique compared with the other polarizing plates. The color change when observed from was slightly inferior.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a means for improving reworkability of a polarizing plate wherein a thin cellulose ester film is used as one of protective films. [Solution] A polarizing plate which comprises a protective film (A), a polarizer and a protective film (B) in this order. The protective film (A) is a polyester film that is formed from a polyester, and this polyester film has an elastic modulus of 5.0-8.0 GPa in the MD direction and/or in the TD direction. The protective film (B) is a cellulose ester film that is formed from a cellulose ester, and this cellulose ester film is characterized in that (1) the film thickness thereof is within the range of 15-60 μm, and (2) the toughness both in the MD direction and in the TD direction is 10-20.

Description

偏光板およびこれを用いた液晶表示装置Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same
 本発明は、偏光板およびこれを用いた液晶表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a polarizing plate and a liquid crystal display device using the same.
 液晶表示装置は、液晶テレビやパソコンの液晶ディスプレイ等の用途で、需要が拡大している。液晶表示装置は、透明電極、液晶層、カラーフィルター等をガラス板で挟み込んだ液晶セルと、その両側に設けられた2枚の偏光板で一般的に構成されている。それぞれの偏光板は、通常偏光子を2枚の透明樹脂フィルムで挟持する構成になっている。このような透明樹脂フィルムの一つとして、偏光子を保護する目的をもち、セルロースアセテートなどのセルロースエステルフィルムがよく使用されている(例えば、国際公開第2011/016279号パンフレットを参照)。セルロースエステルフィルムは透過率が高く、アルカリ水溶液に浸漬させてその表面をケン化し、親水化することで、偏光子との優れた密着性を実現している。 Demand for liquid crystal display devices is expanding for applications such as liquid crystal televisions and personal computer liquid crystal displays. A liquid crystal display device is generally composed of a liquid crystal cell in which a transparent electrode, a liquid crystal layer, a color filter and the like are sandwiched between glass plates, and two polarizing plates provided on both sides thereof. Each polarizing plate is usually configured to sandwich a polarizer between two transparent resin films. As one of such transparent resin films, a cellulose ester film such as cellulose acetate is often used for the purpose of protecting a polarizer (see, for example, International Publication No. 2011/016279 pamphlet). The cellulose ester film has a high transmittance, and by immersing it in an alkaline aqueous solution to saponify its surface and make it hydrophilic, excellent adhesion to a polarizer is realized.
 近年、ディスプレイの大型化や薄型化の要求に呼応する形で、偏光板にも薄膜化が求められている。もちろん、偏光板の構成部材である保護フィルムとしてのセルロースエステルフィルムに対しても、薄膜化の要求が強く存在する。しかしながら、保護フィルムであるセルロースエステルフィルムを薄くすると、偏光板のリワーク性が低下してしまうという問題があった。すなわち、保護フィルムが薄膜化されてなる偏光板を液晶セルに貼合する際には、貼合時にズレが生じた場合に貼り直そうとして偏光板を液晶セルから剥離するときに、うまく剥離できないなどの問題が生じて、液晶表示装置の生産性の低下に繋がるという問題があったのである。 In recent years, there has been a demand for thinner polarizing plates in response to demands for larger and thinner displays. Of course, there is a strong demand for thinning the cellulose ester film as a protective film, which is a constituent member of the polarizing plate. However, when the cellulose ester film which is a protective film is thinned, there is a problem that the reworkability of the polarizing plate is lowered. That is, when laminating a polarizing plate having a protective film made thin, to a liquid crystal cell, when the misalignment occurs at the time of laminating, when the polarizing plate is peeled off from the liquid crystal cell in order to re-paste, it cannot be peeled off well. Thus, there is a problem that the productivity of the liquid crystal display device is reduced.
 ところで、従来、セルロースエステルフィルム以外の樹脂フィルムを偏光板の保護フィルムとして用いることも提案されている。例えば特開2012-256057号公報では、ポリエチレンテレフタレート等からなるポリエステルフィルムを偏光板の保護フィルムとして用いる際に、フィルムのリターデーションを所定の値に制御したものを特定の光源と組み合わせて用いることで、耐久性および視認性に優れた偏光板が提供されることが謳われている。ただし、かようなポリエステルフィルムを偏光板の保護フィルムとして用いることで、上述したようなリワーク性が改善しうることについては、従来何ら知られていない。 By the way, conventionally, it has been proposed to use a resin film other than the cellulose ester film as a protective film for the polarizing plate. For example, in JP 2012-256057 A, when a polyester film made of polyethylene terephthalate or the like is used as a protective film for a polarizing plate, a film whose retardation is controlled to a predetermined value is used in combination with a specific light source. It is said that a polarizing plate excellent in durability and visibility is provided. However, it has not been known at all that reworkability as described above can be improved by using such a polyester film as a protective film for a polarizing plate.
 本発明は、上記問題に鑑みてなされたものであり、その解決課題は、一方の保護フィルムとして薄膜のセルロースエステルフィルムが用いられてなる偏光板において、リワーク性を向上させうる手段を提供することである。 The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and a solution to the problem is to provide means capable of improving reworkability in a polarizing plate in which a thin cellulose ester film is used as one protective film. It is.
 本発明者は、上記課題に鑑み鋭意検討を進めた結果、保護フィルムA、偏光子及び保護フィルムBをこの順に有する偏光板において、保護フィルムAとしてポリエステルからなるポリエステルフィルムを用い、さらに当該ポリエステルフィルムは、MD方向およびTD方向の少なくとも一方について5.0~8.0GPaの弾性率を有するものとし、かつ、保護フィルムBとしてセルロースエステルからなるセルロースエステルフィルムを用い、当該セルロースエステルフィルムは、(1)膜厚が15~60μmの範囲内であり、(2)MD方向およびTD方向の双方についてタフネスが10~20であるものとすることによって、保護フィルムBとして薄膜化されたセルロースエステルフィルムを用いた場合であってもリワーク性に優れた偏光板を実現することができることを見出し、本発明に至った次第である。 As a result of intensive studies in view of the above problems, the inventor of the present invention uses a polyester film made of polyester as the protective film A in the polarizing plate having the protective film A, the polarizer and the protective film B in this order. Has a modulus of elasticity of 5.0 to 8.0 GPa in at least one of the MD direction and the TD direction, and a cellulose ester film made of cellulose ester is used as the protective film B. The cellulose ester film is (1 ) The film thickness is in the range of 15 to 60 μm, and (2) the thinned cellulose ester film is used as the protective film B by assuming that the toughness is 10 to 20 in both the MD direction and the TD direction. Excellent reworkability even when It found that it is possible to realize a polarizer, a completed the invention.
 すなわち、本発明の上記課題は、下記の手段により解決される。 That is, the above-mentioned problem of the present invention is solved by the following means.
 1.保護フィルムA、偏光子および保護フィルムBをこの順に有する偏光板であって、
 前記保護フィルムAがポリエステルからなるポリエステルフィルムであり、
 前記ポリエステルフィルムは、MD方向およびTD方向の少なくとも一方について5.0~8.0GPaの弾性率を有し、
 前記保護フィルムBがセルロースエステルからなるセルロースエステルフィルムであり、
 前記セルロースエステルフィルムは、
 (1)膜厚が15~60μmの範囲内であり、
 (2)MD方向およびTD方向の双方についてタフネスが10~20である、
ことを特徴とする、偏光板;
 2.前記ポリエステルがポリエチレンテレフタレートである、上記1に記載の偏光板;
 3.前記保護フィルムAの膜厚が40~100μmの範囲内である、上記1または2に記載の偏光板;
 4.前記保護フィルムBについて、下記式(i)及び(ii)で定義される面内方向のリターデーション値Roが30~70nmの範囲内であり、厚さ方向のリターデーション値Rtが100~140nmの範囲内である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板:
 式(i):Ro=(n-n)×d(nm)
 式(ii):Rt={(n+n)/2-n}×d(nm)
 式中、nは、フィルムの面内方向において屈折率が最大になる方向xにおける屈折率を表す。nは、フィルムの面内方向において、前記方向xと直交する方向yにおける屈折率を表す。nは、フィルムの厚さ方向zにおける屈折率を表す。dは、フィルムの厚さ(nm)を表す。測定は、23℃・55%RHの環境下、590nmの測定波長で行う。〕
 5.前記セルロースエステルがセルロースアセテートを主成分として含む、上記1~4のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板;
 6.前記セルロースアセテートのアセチル基置換度が2.1~2.95である、上記5に記載の偏光板;
 7.前記保護フィルムBがリターデーション上昇剤を含む、上記1~6のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板;
 8.前記リターデーション上昇剤が、下記一般式(1):
1. A polarizing plate having a protective film A, a polarizer and a protective film B in this order,
The protective film A is a polyester film made of polyester,
The polyester film has an elastic modulus of 5.0 to 8.0 GPa in at least one of the MD direction and the TD direction,
The protective film B is a cellulose ester film made of cellulose ester,
The cellulose ester film is
(1) The film thickness is in the range of 15-60 μm,
(2) The toughness is 10 to 20 in both the MD direction and the TD direction.
A polarizing plate characterized by that;
2. The polarizing plate according to 1 above, wherein the polyester is polyethylene terephthalate;
3. 3. The polarizing plate according to 1 or 2 above, wherein the protective film A has a thickness in the range of 40 to 100 μm;
4). For the protective film B, the in-plane retardation value Ro defined by the following formulas (i) and (ii) is in the range of 30 to 70 nm, and the retardation value Rt in the thickness direction is 100 to 140 nm. The polarizing plate according to any one of claims 1 to 3, which is within a range:
Formula (i): Ro = (n x −n y ) × d (nm)
Formula (ii): Rt = {(n x + n y ) / 2−n z } × d (nm)
Wherein, n x represents a refractive index in the direction x in which the refractive index in the plane direction is maximized in the film. n y, in-plane direction of the film, the refractive index in the direction y perpendicular to the direction x. nz represents the refractive index in the thickness direction z of the film. d represents the thickness (nm) of the film. The measurement is performed at a measurement wavelength of 590 nm in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH. ]
5. The polarizing plate according to any one of 1 to 4, wherein the cellulose ester contains cellulose acetate as a main component;
6). 6. The polarizing plate according to 5 above, wherein the cellulose acetate has a degree of acetyl group substitution of 2.1 to 2.95;
7). The polarizing plate according to any one of 1 to 6, wherein the protective film B contains a retardation increasing agent;
8). The retardation increasing agent is represented by the following general formula (1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、炭素数1~3のアルキル基またはハロゲン原子を表し;
 Xは、それぞれ独立して、-O-または-O-C(=O)-(このとき、一般式(1)におけるフェニル骨格にOが結合する)を表し;
 RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、
Xが-O-のとき、ヒドロキシル基、エステル基もしくは置換されていてもよい芳香族基で置換されていてもよいアルキル基;またはグリシジル基を表し、
Xが-O-C(=O)-のとき、ヒドロキシル基、エステル基もしくは置換されていてもよい芳香族基で置換されていてもよいアルキル基;または置換されていてもよい芳香族基を表す、
で表される化合物を含む、上記7に記載の偏光板;
 9.前記保護フィルムAおよび前記保護フィルムBが、ともに紫外線硬化型接着剤によって前記偏光子と貼合されている、上記1~8のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板;
 10.前記偏光子の膜厚が2~15μmの範囲内である、上記1~9のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板;
 11.厚さが80~150μmの範囲内である、上記1~10のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板;
 12.上記1~11のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板を具備している、液晶表示装置。
In the formula, R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a halogen atom;
Each X independently represents —O— or —O—C (═O) — (wherein O is bonded to the phenyl skeleton in the general formula (1));
R 5 and R 6 are each independently
When X is —O—, it represents a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with an optionally substituted aromatic group; or a glycidyl group,
When X is —O—C (═O) —, a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with an optionally substituted aromatic group; or an optionally substituted aromatic group To express,
The polarizing plate of said 7 containing the compound represented by these;
9. The polarizing plate according to any one of 1 to 8, wherein the protective film A and the protective film B are both bonded to the polarizer with an ultraviolet curable adhesive;
10. 10. The polarizing plate according to any one of 1 to 9, wherein the polarizer has a thickness in the range of 2 to 15 μm;
11. 11. The polarizing plate according to any one of 1 to 10 above, which has a thickness in the range of 80 to 150 μm;
12 12. A liquid crystal display device comprising the polarizing plate according to any one of 1 to 11 above.
本発明の偏光板の構成の一例を示す概略断面図である。It is a schematic sectional drawing which shows an example of a structure of the polarizing plate of this invention. 本発明に好ましい溶液流延製膜法のドープ調製工程、流延工程及び乾燥工程(溶媒蒸発工程)の一例を模式的に示した図である。It is the figure which showed typically an example of the dope preparation process of the solution casting film forming method preferable for this invention, a casting process, and a drying process (solvent evaporation process).
 本発明に係る偏光板は、保護フィルムA、偏光子および保護フィルムBをこの順に有する偏光板であって、前記保護フィルムAがポリエステルからなるポリエステルフィルムであり、前記ポリエステルフィルムは、MD方向およびTD方向の少なくとも一方について5.0~8.0GPaの弾性率を有し、前記保護フィルムBがセルロースエステルからなるセルロースエステルフィルムであり、前記セルロースエステルフィルムは、
 (1)膜厚が15~60μmの範囲内であり、
 (2)MD方向およびTD方向の双方についてタフネスが10~20である、
ことを特徴とするものである。本発明に係る偏光板によれば、一方の保護フィルムとして薄膜のセルロースエステルフィルムが用いられる場合であっても、リワーク性を向上させることが可能となる。
The polarizing plate which concerns on this invention is a polarizing plate which has the protective film A, the polarizer, and the protective film B in this order, Comprising: The said protective film A is a polyester film which consists of polyester, The said polyester film is MD direction and TD. The elastic film has an elastic modulus of 5.0 to 8.0 GPa in at least one of the directions, and the protective film B is a cellulose ester film made of cellulose ester.
(1) The film thickness is in the range of 15-60 μm,
(2) The toughness is 10 to 20 in both the MD direction and the TD direction.
It is characterized by this. According to the polarizing plate concerning this invention, even if it is a case where a thin cellulose-ester film is used as one protective film, it becomes possible to improve rework property.
 本発明で規定する上記構成により、本発明の目的とする効果が得られる技術的理由に関しては、その機構の詳細は全て解明されてはいないが、本発明は以下のような仮説-検証過程を経て完成されたものである。 Although the details of the mechanism have not been clarified as to the technical reason for obtaining the intended effect of the present invention by the above configuration defined in the present invention, the present invention has the following hypothesis-verification process. It was completed after that.
 すなわち、本発明者は、上記課題に鑑み、保護フィルムA、偏光子及び保護フィルムBをこの順に有する偏光板に関する特性について鋭意検討を進めた。その過程で、保護フィルムBとして薄膜化されたセルロースエステルフィルムを用いた場合のリワーク性の低下について、偏光板の引き裂き強度の低下がその原因となっているのではないかとの仮説を立てた。そしてその上で、保護フィルムAとして引き裂き強度の高いポリエステルフィルムを用いるとリワーク性に改善が見られることを確認し、上記仮説を実証した。その後、リワーク性がよりいっそう改善された偏光板を得るべく、保護フィルムAを構成するポリエステルフィルムの物性を種々変更して偏光板の性能を調べたところ、所定範囲の弾性率を有するポリエステルフィルムを用いた場合に、特に優れたリワーク性が達成できることを見出した。その一方で、このような保護フィルムAを用いれば、保護フィルムBとしては従来と同様にセルロースエステルフィルムが用いられうることを確認し、さらには当該セルロースエステルフィルムに要求される物性としてタフネスの下限値を見出して、本発明を完成させるに至ったのである。 That is, in view of the above-mentioned problems, the present inventor has eagerly studied the characteristics relating to the polarizing plate having the protective film A, the polarizer, and the protective film B in this order. In the process, it was hypothesized that a decrease in the tear strength of the polarizing plate might be the cause of the decrease in reworkability when a thinned cellulose ester film was used as the protective film B. On that basis, it was confirmed that the reworkability was improved when a polyester film having a high tear strength was used as the protective film A, and the hypothesis was verified. Thereafter, in order to obtain a polarizing plate with further improved reworkability, various properties of the polyester film constituting the protective film A were changed and the performance of the polarizing plate was examined. As a result, a polyester film having a predetermined range of elastic modulus was obtained. It has been found that particularly excellent reworkability can be achieved when used. On the other hand, if such a protective film A is used, it is confirmed that a cellulose ester film can be used as the protective film B as in the conventional case, and further, the lower limit of toughness as a physical property required for the cellulose ester film. The value was found and the present invention was completed.
 以下、本発明とその構成要素、及び本発明を実施するための形態・態様について詳細な説明をする。なお、本発明において示す「~」は、その前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用する。 Hereinafter, the present invention, its components, and modes and modes for carrying out the present invention will be described in detail. In the present invention, “˜” is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after it are included as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
 《偏光板》
 以下、本発明の偏光板の各構成要素の詳細について説明する。
"Polarizer"
Hereinafter, the detail of each component of the polarizing plate of this invention is demonstrated.
 [偏光板の構成]
 本発明の偏光板は、保護フィルムA、偏光子及び保護フィルムBをこの順に有し、保護フィルムAはポリエステルフィルム(例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム)であり、保護フィルムBはセルロースエステルフィルム(例えば、セルロースアセテートフィルム)である。
[Configuration of polarizing plate]
The polarizing plate of the present invention has a protective film A, a polarizer and a protective film B in this order, the protective film A is a polyester film (for example, polyethylene terephthalate film), and the protective film B is a cellulose ester film (for example, cellulose). Acetate film).
 図1は、本発明の偏光板の構成の一例を示す概略断面図である。図1において、本発明の偏光板101は、表面側より、保護フィルムAであるポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム102と、偏光子104を有し、このポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム102と偏光子104とは、紫外線硬化型接着剤層103Aにより接着されている。この紫外線硬化型接着剤層103Aは、紫外線等を照射することにより硬化する材料により構成されている。なお、紫外線硬化型接着剤の詳細については、後述する。 FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of the configuration of the polarizing plate of the present invention. In FIG. 1, a polarizing plate 101 of the present invention has a polyethylene terephthalate film 102, which is a protective film A, and a polarizer 104 from the surface side. The polyethylene terephthalate film 102 and the polarizer 104 are bonded to each other by ultraviolet curing. Bonded by the agent layer 103A. The ultraviolet curable adhesive layer 103A is made of a material that is cured by irradiating ultraviolet rays or the like. The details of the ultraviolet curable adhesive will be described later.
 図1に示す偏光板101では、さらに、保護フィルムAであるポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム102が配置されている面とは反対側の偏光子104の面に、さらに紫外線硬化型接着剤層103Bを介して、保護フィルムBであるセルロースアセテートフィルム105が積層されている。 In the polarizing plate 101 shown in FIG. 1, the surface of the polarizer 104 opposite to the surface on which the polyethylene terephthalate film 102 that is the protective film A is further disposed, further through the ultraviolet curable adhesive layer 103B, A cellulose acetate film 105 as the protective film B is laminated.
 また、図1において記載はしていないが、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム102のさらに外側(最表面部)には、必要に応じて、例えば、防眩層、反射防止層、防汚層、ハードコート層等を設けてもよい。 Although not shown in FIG. 1, on the further outer side (outermost surface portion) of the polyethylene terephthalate film 102, for example, an antiglare layer, an antireflection layer, an antifouling layer, a hard coat layer, etc. May be provided.
 [保護フィルムA]
 保護フィルムAは、ポリエステルからなるポリエステルフィルムである。このポリエステルフィルムの具体的な形態としては、弾性率が所定の範囲内の値であることを除き、従来公知の知見が適宜参照されうる。具体的には、本発明に係る偏光板に用いられる保護フィルムAを構成するポリエステルフィルムはMD方向およびTD方向の少なくとも一方について5.0~8.0GPa、好ましくは5.5~7.0GPa、より好ましくは5.8~6.5GPaの弾性率を有するものである。弾性率が低いと偏光板のリワーク性が劣化し、また弾性率が高いフィルムは作成自体が困難である。また、好ましくは、MD方向およびTD方向の双方について上記所定の弾性率を有するものである。なお、ポリエステルフィルムの弾性率の値としては、後述する実施例の欄に記載の測定方法により測定された値を採用するものとする。
[Protective film A]
The protective film A is a polyester film made of polyester. As a specific form of the polyester film, conventionally known knowledge can be appropriately referred to except that the elastic modulus is a value within a predetermined range. Specifically, the polyester film constituting the protective film A used for the polarizing plate according to the present invention is 5.0 to 8.0 GPa, preferably 5.5 to 7.0 GPa in at least one of the MD direction and the TD direction. More preferably, it has an elastic modulus of 5.8 to 6.5 GPa. If the elastic modulus is low, the reworkability of the polarizing plate deteriorates, and it is difficult to produce a film having a high elastic modulus. Moreover, it preferably has the predetermined elastic modulus in both the MD direction and the TD direction. In addition, as a value of the elasticity modulus of a polyester film, the value measured by the measuring method as described in the column of the Example mentioned later shall be employ | adopted.
 ポリエステルフィルムを構成するポリエステルとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートやポリエチレンナフタレートを用いることができるが、他の共重合成分を含んでも構わない。これらの樹脂は透明性に優れるとともに、熱的、機械的特性にも優れており、延伸加工によって容易にリターデーションを制御することができる。特に、ポリエチレンテレフタレートは固有複屈折が大きく、フィルムの厚みが薄くても比較的容易に大きなリターデーションが得られることから、最も好適な素材である。 As the polyester constituting the polyester film, polyethylene terephthalate or polyethylene naphthalate can be used, but other copolymer components may be included. These resins are excellent in transparency and excellent in thermal and mechanical properties, and the retardation can be easily controlled by stretching. In particular, polyethylene terephthalate is the most suitable material because it has a large intrinsic birefringence and relatively large retardation can be obtained even when the film is thin.
 また、ヨウ素色素などの光学機能性色素の劣化を抑制することを目的として、保護フィルムAにおける380nmの波長を有する光の光線透過率が20%以下であることが好ましい。この光線透過率は15%以下であることがより好ましく、10%以下であることがさらに好ましく、5%以下であることが特に好ましい。前記光線透過率が20%以下であれば、光学機能性色素の紫外線による変質を抑制することができる。なお、本発明における透過率は、フィルムの平面に対して垂直方法に測定したものであり、分光光度計(例えば、日立U-3500型)を用いて測定することができる。 Further, for the purpose of suppressing deterioration of optical functional dyes such as iodine dyes, it is preferable that the light transmittance of light having a wavelength of 380 nm in the protective film A is 20% or less. The light transmittance is more preferably 15% or less, further preferably 10% or less, and particularly preferably 5% or less. If the light transmittance is 20% or less, the optical functional dye can be prevented from being deteriorated by ultraviolet rays. The transmittance in the present invention is measured by a method perpendicular to the plane of the film, and can be measured using a spectrophotometer (for example, Hitachi U-3500 type).
 ここで、保護フィルムAの上記光線透過率を20%以下にするためには、紫外線吸収剤の種類、濃度、及びフィルムの厚みを適宜調節することが望ましい。本発明で使用される紫外線吸収剤は公知の物質である。紫外線吸収剤としては、有機系紫外線吸収剤と無機系紫外線吸収剤が挙げられるが、透明性の観点から有機系紫外線吸収剤が好ましい。2種以上の紫外線吸収剤を併用した場合には、別々の波長の紫外線を同時に吸収させることができるので、より紫外線吸収効果を改善することができる。 Here, in order to reduce the light transmittance of the protective film A to 20% or less, it is desirable to appropriately adjust the type, concentration, and thickness of the ultraviolet absorber. The ultraviolet absorber used in the present invention is a known substance. Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include an organic ultraviolet absorber and an inorganic ultraviolet absorber, and an organic ultraviolet absorber is preferable from the viewpoint of transparency. When two or more kinds of ultraviolet absorbers are used in combination, ultraviolet rays having different wavelengths can be absorbed simultaneously, so that the ultraviolet absorption effect can be further improved.
 なお、紫外線吸収剤のうちでも、分子量が400以上の紫外線吸収剤は、昇華しにくいか、あるいは高沸点で揮発しにくく、フィルムの高温乾燥時にも飛散しにくいため、比較的少量の添加で効果的に耐候性を改良することができる観点から好ましい。 Of the UV absorbers, UV absorbers having a molecular weight of 400 or more are not sublimated or are not easily volatilized at a high boiling point. From the viewpoint of improving weather resistance, it is preferable.
 分子量が400以上の紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、2-[2-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ビス(α,α-ジメチルベンジル)フェニル]-2-ベンゾトリアゾール、2,2-メチレンビス[4-(1,1,3,3-テトラブチル)-6-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)フェノール]等のベンゾトリアゾール系、ビス(2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル)セバケート、ビス(1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル)セバケート等のヒンダードアミン系、さらには2-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)-2-n-ブチルマロン酸ビス(1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル)、1-[2-[3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオニルオキシ]エチル]-4-[3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオニルオキシ]-2,2,6,6-テトラメチルピペリジン等の分子内にヒンダードフェノールとヒンダードアミンの構造を共に有するハイブリッド系のものが挙げられ、これらは単独で、あるいは2種以上を併用して使用することができる。これらのうちでも、2-[2-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ビス(α,α-ジメチルベンジル)フェニル]-2-ベンゾトリアゾールや2,2-メチレンビス[4-(1,1,3,3-テトラブチル)-6-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)フェノール]が、特に好ましい。 Examples of the ultraviolet absorber having a molecular weight of 400 or more include 2- [2-hydroxy-3,5-bis (α, α-dimethylbenzyl) phenyl] -2-benzotriazole, 2,2-methylenebis [4- ( Benzotriazoles such as 1,1,3,3-tetrabutyl) -6- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) phenol], bis (2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl) sebacate, Hindered amines such as bis (1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl) sebacate and 2- (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) -2-n-butyl Bis (1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl) malonate, 1- [2- [3- (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionylo Xyl] ethyl] -4- [3- (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionyloxy] -2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidine The hybrid type | system | group which has the structure of a hindered amine is mentioned, These can be used individually or in combination of 2 or more types. Among these, 2- [2-hydroxy-3,5-bis (α, α-dimethylbenzyl) phenyl] -2-benzotriazole and 2,2-methylenebis [4- (1,1,3,3- Tetrabutyl) -6- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) phenol] is particularly preferred.
 これら紫外線吸収剤としては、市販品を用いてもよく、例えば、BASFジャパン社製のチヌビン109、チヌビン171、チヌビン234、チヌビン326、チヌビン327、チヌビン328、チヌビン928等のチヌビンシリーズ、あるいは2,2’-メチレンビス[6-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4-(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)フェノール](分子量659;市販品の例としては、株式会社ADEKA製のLA31)を好ましく使用できる。 As these ultraviolet absorbers, commercially available products may be used, for example, Tinuvin 109, Tinuvin 171, Tinuvin 234, Tinuvin 326, Tinuvin 327, Tinuvin 328, Tinuvin 928, etc. manufactured by BASF Japan, or 2, 2′-methylenebis [6- (2H-benzotriazol-2-yl) -4- (1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl) phenol] (molecular weight 659; examples of commercially available products are manufactured by ADEKA Corporation LA31) can be preferably used.
 上記紫外線吸収剤は、1種単独でまたは2種以上組み合わせて用いることができる。 The above ultraviolet absorbers can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 また、紫外線吸収剤以外に、本発明の効果を妨げない範囲で、各種の添加剤を含有させることも好ましい様態である。添加剤として、例えば、無機粒子、耐熱性高分子粒子、アルカリ金属化合物、アルカリ土類金属化合物、リン化合物、帯電防止剤、耐光剤、難燃剤、熱安定剤、酸化防止剤、ゲル化防止剤、界面活性剤等が挙げられる。また、高い透明性を奏するためにはポリエステルフィルムに実質的に粒子を含有しないことも好ましい。「ポリエステルフィルムが実質的に粒子を含有しない」とは、例えば無機粒子の場合、ケイ光X線分析で無機元素を定量した場合に50質量ppm以下、好ましくは10質量ppm以下、特に好ましくは検出限界以下となる含有量を意味する。 In addition to the ultraviolet absorber, it is also preferable to include various additives within a range not impeding the effects of the present invention. Examples of additives include inorganic particles, heat resistant polymer particles, alkali metal compounds, alkaline earth metal compounds, phosphorus compounds, antistatic agents, light proofing agents, flame retardants, thermal stabilizers, antioxidants, and antigelling agents. And surfactants. Moreover, in order to show high transparency, it is also preferable that a polyester film does not contain a particle | grain substantially. “Polyester film substantially does not contain particles” means, for example, in the case of inorganic particles, when inorganic elements are quantified by fluorescent X-ray analysis, 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 10 ppm by mass or less, particularly preferably detection The content is below the limit.
 さらに、保護フィルムAを構成するポリエステルフィルムには、偏光子との接着性を良好にするためにコロナ処理、コーティング処理や火炎処理等を施したりすることも可能である。 Furthermore, the polyester film constituting the protective film A can be subjected to corona treatment, coating treatment, flame treatment or the like in order to improve the adhesion to the polarizer.
 なお、特許文献2に記載されているように、液晶表示装置のバックライト光源として白色発光ダイオードを用いる場合には、ポリエステルフィルムのリターデーション値を所定の範囲内の値に制御することが好ましい。具体的には、保護フィルムAに用いられるポリエステルフィルムは、3000~30000nmのリターデーションを有することが好ましい。リターデーションが3000nm未満では、保護フィルムとして用いた場合、斜め方向から観察したときに強い干渉色を呈するため、包絡線形状が光源の発光スペクトルと相違し、良好な視認性を確保することが難しくなる虞がある。好ましいリターデーションの下限値は4500nmであり、次に好ましい下限値は5000nmであり、より好ましい下限値は6000nmであり、さらに好ましい下限値は8000nmであり、特に好ましい下限値は10000nmである。 In addition, as described in Patent Document 2, when a white light emitting diode is used as a backlight light source of a liquid crystal display device, it is preferable to control the retardation value of the polyester film to a value within a predetermined range. Specifically, the polyester film used for the protective film A preferably has a retardation of 3000 to 30000 nm. When the retardation is less than 3000 nm, when used as a protective film, it exhibits a strong interference color when observed from an oblique direction, so the envelope shape is different from the emission spectrum of the light source, and it is difficult to ensure good visibility. There is a risk of becoming. The lower limit value of the preferred retardation is 4500 nm, the next preferred lower limit value is 5000 nm, the more preferred lower limit value is 6000 nm, the still more preferred lower limit value is 8000 nm, and the particularly preferred lower limit value is 10,000 nm.
 一方、ポリエステルフィルムのリターデーションの上限値は好ましくは30000nmであり、さらに好ましくは20000nmである。それ以上のリターデーションを有するポリエステルフィルムを保護フィルムAとして用いたとしても、さらなる視認性の改善効果は実質的に得られないばかりか、フィルムの厚みも相当に厚くなり、工業材料としての取り扱い性が低下する虞もある。 On the other hand, the upper limit of the retardation of the polyester film is preferably 30000 nm, more preferably 20000 nm. Even if a polyester film having a retardation higher than that is used as the protective film A, the effect of improving the visibility is not substantially obtained, and the thickness of the film is considerably increased, so that it can be handled as an industrial material. May decrease.
 なお、本発明において、保護フィルムAのリターデーション値は、2軸方向の屈折率と厚みを測定して求めることもできるし、KOBRA-21ADH(王子計測機器株式会社)といった市販の自動複屈折測定装置を用いて求めることもできる。 In the present invention, the retardation value of the protective film A can be obtained by measuring the refractive index and thickness in the biaxial direction, or a commercially available automatic birefringence measurement such as KOBRA-21ADH (Oji Scientific Instruments). It can also be determined using an apparatus.
 保護フィルムAを構成するポリエステルフィルムは、一般的なポリエステルフィルムの製造方法に従って製造することができる。例えば、ポリエステル樹脂を溶融し、シート状に押出し成形された無配向ポリエステルをガラス転移温度以上の温度において、ロールの速度差を利用して縦方向に延伸した後、テンターにより横方向に延伸し、熱処理を施す方法が挙げられる。 The polyester film constituting the protective film A can be manufactured according to a general polyester film manufacturing method. For example, the polyester resin is melted and the non-oriented polyester extruded and formed into a sheet shape is stretched in the longitudinal direction by utilizing the speed difference of the roll at a temperature equal to or higher than the glass transition temperature, and then stretched in the transverse direction by a tenter. The method of performing heat processing is mentioned.
 本発明のポリエステルフィルムは一軸延伸フィルムであっても、二軸延伸フィルムであってもかまわないが、二軸延伸フィルムを偏光子保護フィルムとして用いた場合、フィルム面の真上から観察しても虹状の色斑が見られないが、斜め方向から観察したときに虹状の色斑が観察される場合があるので注意が必要である。この現象は、二軸延伸フィルムが、走行方向、幅方向、厚さ方向で異なる屈折率を有する屈折率楕円体からなり、フィルム内部での光の透過方向によりリターデーションがゼロになる(屈折率楕円体が真円に見える)方向が存在するためである。従って、液晶表示画面を斜め方向の特定の方向から観察すると、リターデーションがゼロになる点を生じる場合があり、その点を中心として虹状の色斑が同心円状に生じることとなる。そして、フィルム面の真上(法線方向)から虹状の色斑が見える位置までの角度をθとすると、この角度θは、フィルム面内の複屈折が大きいほど大きくなり、虹状の色斑は見え難くなる。二軸延伸フィルムでは角度θが小さくなる傾向があるため、一軸延伸フィルムのほうが虹状の色斑は見え難くなり好ましい。 The polyester film of the present invention may be a uniaxially stretched film or a biaxially stretched film, but when the biaxially stretched film is used as a polarizer protective film, it may be observed from directly above the film surface. Although rainbow-like color spots are not seen, caution is necessary because rainbow-like color spots may be observed when observed from an oblique direction. This phenomenon is because biaxially stretched films are composed of refractive index ellipsoids having different refractive indexes in the running direction, width direction, and thickness direction, and the retardation becomes zero depending on the direction of light transmission inside the film (refractive index). This is because there is a direction in which the ellipsoid looks like a perfect circle. Therefore, when the liquid crystal display screen is observed from a specific oblique direction, a point where the retardation becomes zero may be generated, and a rainbow-like color spot is generated concentrically around that point. When the angle from the position directly above the film surface (normal direction) to the position where the rainbow-like color spots are visible is θ, the angle θ increases as the birefringence in the film increases, and the rainbow-like color increases. Spots are difficult to see. The biaxially stretched film tends to reduce the angle θ, and therefore the uniaxially stretched film is more preferable because rainbow-like color spots are less visible.
 しかしながら、完全な1軸性(1軸対称)フィルムでは配向方向と直行する方向の機械的強度が著しく低下することから、リワーク性の改善の観点からは好ましくない。本発明においてポリエステルフィルムは、実質的に虹状の色斑を生じない範囲、または液晶表示画面に求められる視野角範囲において虹状の色斑を生じない範囲で、2軸性(2軸対称性)を有していることが好ましい。 However, a perfect uniaxial (uniaxial symmetry) film is not preferable from the viewpoint of improving the reworkability because the mechanical strength in the direction orthogonal to the orientation direction is significantly reduced. In the present invention, the polyester film is biaxial (biaxial symmetry) in a range that does not substantially cause rainbow-like color spots or a range that does not cause rainbow-like color spots in a viewing angle range required for a liquid crystal display screen. ) Is preferable.
 なお、保護フィルムAを構成するポリエステルフィルムの膜厚は特に制限されないが、好ましくは40~100μmであり、より好ましくは60~95μmである。ポリエステルフィルムの膜厚が40μm以上であれば、フィルムの力学特性の異方性が発現しにくく、機械的強度に優れた保護フィルムAが構成されうる。また、ポリエステルフィルムの膜厚が100μm以下であれば、偏光板の厚みの増大が防止されるため、好ましい。 The film thickness of the polyester film constituting the protective film A is not particularly limited, but is preferably 40 to 100 μm, more preferably 60 to 95 μm. When the film thickness of the polyester film is 40 μm or more, the anisotropy of the mechanical properties of the film is difficult to be exhibited, and the protective film A having excellent mechanical strength can be configured. Moreover, if the film thickness of a polyester film is 100 micrometers or less, since the increase in the thickness of a polarizing plate is prevented, it is preferable.
 続いて、ポリエステルフィルムの製膜条件を具体的に説明する。 Subsequently, the film forming conditions of the polyester film will be specifically described.
 ポリエステルフィルムの弾性率の値を上述した範囲に制御するためには、まず、フィルムの製膜原料であるポリエステルを溶融した状態で2回以上、濾過処理することが好ましい。かような処理を施すことによって、原料ポリエステルに含まれる高分子成分(ダマ)を除去することができ、ポリエステルの分子量分布をよりシャープなものとすることができる。なお、濾過処理の具体的な手段について特に制限はなく、従来公知のステンレス焼結体等の濾材を用いて濾過処理を行えばよい。ここで、濾材の濾過粒子サイズ(初期濾過効率95%)は、好ましくは25μm以下であり、より好ましくは10μm以下である。 In order to control the value of the elastic modulus of the polyester film within the above-described range, first, it is preferable to perform filtration treatment twice or more in a state where the polyester as a film forming raw material is melted. By performing such treatment, the polymer component (dama) contained in the raw material polyester can be removed, and the molecular weight distribution of the polyester can be made sharper. In addition, there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the specific means of a filtration process, What is necessary is just to perform a filtration process using filter media, such as a conventionally well-known stainless steel sintered compact. Here, the filter particle size (initial filtration efficiency 95%) of the filter medium is preferably 25 μm or less, and more preferably 10 μm or less.
 その後、濾過処理を施された原料ポリエステルを、必要に応じて紫外線吸収剤等の添加材と混合して押出機に投入し、溶融し、T-ダイより押し出し、冷却ロールに密着することで未延伸シートが得られる。未延伸シートは、速度差を有するロール間での延伸(ロール延伸)によってMD方向に延伸され、さらに必要に応じてクリップに把持して拡げていくことによる延伸(テンター延伸)や空気圧によって拡げることによる延伸(インフレーション延伸)などによってTD方向にも延伸されて、最終的には二軸配向処理される。 Thereafter, the raw material polyester subjected to the filtration treatment is mixed with an additive such as an ultraviolet absorber if necessary, and is then introduced into an extruder, melted, extruded from a T-die, and adhered to a cooling roll. A stretched sheet is obtained. The unstretched sheet is stretched in the MD direction by stretching (roll stretching) between rolls having a speed difference, and further stretched by stretching (tenter stretching) or holding by a clip and expanding as needed. The film is also stretched in the TD direction by stretching (inflation stretching) or the like, and finally biaxially oriented.
 ここでまず、第1段の縦延伸工程は、周速が異なる2本または多数本のロール間で延伸する。この際の延伸倍率(縦延伸倍率)は、好ましくは2~5倍であり、より好ましくは3~5倍であり、特に好ましくは3~4倍である。このときの加熱手段としては、加熱ロールを用いる方法でも非接触の加熱方法を用いる方法でもよく、それらを併用してもよい。この中で最も好ましい延伸方法としては、ロール加熱と非接触加熱を併用する方法が挙げられる。この場合、まずフィルムを120~150℃という比較的高温に予備加熱することが、ポリエステルフィルムの弾性率を高めるという観点からは重要である。その後、赤外線ヒータで加熱することによって、後述する横延伸工程に導入することができる。なお、この予備加熱の重要性は、横延伸工程を先に実施し、次いで縦延伸工程を実施する場合についても、同様に当てはまる。なお、縦延伸工程における延伸温度は、好ましくは90~180℃であり、より好ましくは100~180℃である。 Here, first, in the first stage longitudinal stretching step, stretching is performed between two or many rolls having different peripheral speeds. The draw ratio (longitudinal draw ratio) at this time is preferably 2 to 5 times, more preferably 3 to 5 times, and particularly preferably 3 to 4 times. As a heating means at this time, a method using a heating roll or a method using a non-contact heating method may be used, or they may be used in combination. Among these, the most preferable stretching method includes a method using both roll heating and non-contact heating. In this case, preheating the film to a relatively high temperature of 120 to 150 ° C. is important from the viewpoint of increasing the elastic modulus of the polyester film. Then, it can introduce | transduce into the horizontal extending process mentioned later by heating with an infrared heater. The importance of this preheating is similarly applied to the case where the transverse stretching step is performed first and then the longitudinal stretching step is performed. The stretching temperature in the longitudinal stretching step is preferably 90 to 180 ° C, more preferably 100 to 180 ° C.
 続いて、このようにして得られた一軸延伸フィルムをテンターに導入し、幅方向に延伸することができる。この際の延伸倍率(横延伸倍率)は、好ましくは1~5倍であり、より好ましくは2~5倍であり、さらに好ましくは2~4倍であり、特に好ましくは3~4倍である。また、横延伸工程における延伸温度は、好ましくは90~180℃であり、より好ましくは100~150℃である。このようにして得られた二軸延伸フィルムに対し、必要に応じて熱処理を施す。熱処理はテンター中で行うのが好ましく、ポリエステルの融点Tm-50℃~Tmの範囲で行うのが好ましい。 Subsequently, the uniaxially stretched film thus obtained can be introduced into a tenter and stretched in the width direction. The draw ratio (transverse draw ratio) at this time is preferably 1 to 5 times, more preferably 2 to 5 times, still more preferably 2 to 4 times, and particularly preferably 3 to 4 times. . The stretching temperature in the transverse stretching step is preferably 90 to 180 ° C, more preferably 100 to 150 ° C. The biaxially stretched film thus obtained is subjected to heat treatment as necessary. The heat treatment is preferably carried out in a tenter, preferably in the range of the melting point Tm-50 ° C. to Tm of the polyester.
 さらに、ポリエステルフィルムの弾性率を高めるという観点からは、縦延伸倍率と横延伸倍率との合計値を制御することが好ましい。具体的には、当該合計値を6.0~9.0倍に制御することが好ましく、6.0~8.0倍に制御することがより好ましく、6.5~7.5倍に制御することがさらに好ましい。 Furthermore, from the viewpoint of increasing the elastic modulus of the polyester film, it is preferable to control the total value of the longitudinal draw ratio and the transverse draw ratio. Specifically, the total value is preferably controlled to 6.0 to 9.0 times, more preferably 6.0 to 8.0 times, and more preferably 6.5 to 7.5 times. More preferably.
 保護フィルムAを構成するポリエステルフィルムに紫外線吸収剤を配合する方法としては、公知の方法を組み合わせて採用しうるが、例えば予め混練押出機を用い、乾燥させた紫外線吸収剤とポリマー原料とをブレンドしマスターバッチを作製しておき、フィルム製膜時に所定の該マスターバッチとポリマー原料を混合する方法などによって配合することができる。 As a method of blending the ultraviolet absorber with the polyester film constituting the protective film A, a known method can be used in combination. For example, a preliminarily kneaded extruder is used to blend the dried ultraviolet absorber and the polymer raw material. A master batch can be prepared and blended by, for example, a method of mixing the predetermined master batch and polymer raw material during film formation.
 このとき、マスターバッチの紫外線吸収剤濃度は紫外線吸収剤を均一に分散させ、かつ経済的に配合するために5~30質量%の濃度にするのが好ましい。マスターバッチを作製する条件としては混練押出機を用い、押し出し温度はポリエステル原料の融点以上、290℃以下の温度で1~15分間で押し出すのが好ましい。290℃以上では紫外線吸収剤の減量が大きく、また、マスターバッチの粘度低下が大きくなる。押し出し温度が融点-50℃以下では紫外線吸収剤の均一な混合が困難となる。この時、必要に応じて安定剤、色調調整剤、帯電防止剤を添加してもよい。 At this time, the concentration of the UV absorber in the master batch is preferably 5 to 30% by mass in order to uniformly disperse the UV absorber and mix it economically. As a condition for producing the master batch, it is preferable to use a kneading extruder and to extrude at a temperature not lower than the melting point of the polyester raw material and not higher than 290 ° C. for 1 to 15 minutes. Above 290 ° C, the weight loss of the UV absorber is large, and the viscosity of the master batch is greatly reduced. When the extrusion temperature is -50 ° C. or lower, uniform mixing of the UV absorber becomes difficult. At this time, if necessary, a stabilizer, a color tone adjusting agent, and an antistatic agent may be added.
 ポリエステルフィルムを少なくとも3層以上の多層構造とし、フィルムの中間層に紫外線吸収剤を添加することとしてもよい。中間層に紫外線吸収剤を含む3層構造のフィルムは、具体的には次のように作製することができる。外層用としてポリエステルのペレット単独、中間層用として紫外線吸収剤を含有したマスターバッチとポリエステルのペレットを所定の割合で混合し、乾燥したのち、公知の溶融積層用押出機に供給し、スリット状のダイからシート状に押出し、キャスティングロール上で冷却固化させて未延伸フィルムを作る。すなわち、2台以上の押出機、3層のマニホールドまたは合流ブロック(例えば角型合流部を有する合流ブロック)を用いて、両外層を構成するフィルム層、中間層を構成するフィルム層を積層し、口金から3層のシートを押し出し、キャスティングロールで冷却して未延伸フィルムを作ることが可能である。 The polyester film may have a multilayer structure of at least three layers, and an ultraviolet absorber may be added to the intermediate layer of the film. A film having a three-layer structure containing an ultraviolet absorber in the intermediate layer can be specifically produced as follows. Polyester pellets alone for the outer layer, master batches containing UV absorbers for the intermediate layer and polyester pellets are mixed at a predetermined ratio, dried, and then supplied to a known melt laminating extruder, which is slit-shaped. Extruded into a sheet from a die and cooled and solidified on a casting roll to make an unstretched film. That is, using two or more extruders, a three-layer manifold or a merging block (for example, a merging block having a square merging portion), a film layer constituting both outer layers and a film layer constituting an intermediate layer are laminated, An unstretched film can be produced by extruding a three-layer sheet from a die and cooling it with a casting roll.
 [保護フィルムB]
 保護フィルムBは、セルロースエステルからなるセルロースエステルフィルムである。このセルロースエステルフィルムの具体的な形態としては、膜厚およびタフネスが所定の範囲内の値であることを除き、従来公知の知見が適宜参照されうる。
[Protective film B]
The protective film B is a cellulose ester film made of cellulose ester. As a specific form of the cellulose ester film, conventionally known knowledge can be appropriately referred to except that the film thickness and toughness are values within a predetermined range.
 具体的には、本発明に係る偏光板に用いられる保護フィルムBを構成するセルロースエステルフィルムは、その膜厚が15~60μmの範囲内であることを特徴とし、さらに好ましくは、20~40μmの範囲内である。保護フィルムBとしてのセルロースエステルフィルムの膜厚が15μm以上であれば、十分な剛度を備え、取扱い性に優れて特性を得ることができ、60μm以下であれば、薄膜の偏光板を作製しやすくなる。 Specifically, the cellulose ester film constituting the protective film B used in the polarizing plate according to the present invention is characterized in that the film thickness is in the range of 15 to 60 μm, and more preferably 20 to 40 μm. Within range. If the film thickness of the cellulose ester film as the protective film B is 15 μm or more, it has sufficient rigidity and can be obtained with excellent handleability, and if it is 60 μm or less, it is easy to produce a thin film polarizing plate. Become.
 また、本発明に係る偏光板に用いられる保護フィルムBを構成するセルロースエステルフィルムは、MD方向およびTD方向の双方についてタフネスが10~20であることを特徴とし、さらに好ましくは、15~20の範囲内である。本発明者は、セルロースエステルフィルムのタフネスの値をかような範囲に制御した上で、上述したような弾性率を備えたポリエステルフィルムからなる保護フィルムAと併用して偏光板を構成することで、薄膜のセルロースエステルフィルムを保護フィルムBとして用いた場合であってもリワーク性に優れた偏光板が実現できることを見出したのである。なお、セルロースエステルフィルムのタフネスの値としては、後述する実施例の欄に記載の測定方法により測定された値を採用するものとする。 In addition, the cellulose ester film constituting the protective film B used in the polarizing plate according to the present invention has a toughness of 10 to 20 in both the MD direction and the TD direction, and more preferably 15 to 20 Within range. By controlling the toughness value of the cellulose ester film in such a range, the inventor configures the polarizing plate in combination with the protective film A made of the polyester film having the elastic modulus as described above. It was found that even when a thin cellulose ester film was used as the protective film B, a polarizing plate excellent in reworkability could be realized. In addition, as a toughness value of the cellulose ester film, a value measured by the measuring method described in the column of Examples described later is adopted.
 (セルロースエステル)
 セルロースエステル(セルロースエステル樹脂)は、セルロースを構成するβ-1,4結合しているグルコース単位中の2位、3位および6位の水酸基(-OH)の水素原子の一部または全部がアシル基で置換されたセルロースアシレート樹脂である。
(Cellulose ester)
Cellulose ester (cellulose ester resin) is formed by acylating some or all of the hydrogen atoms of hydroxyl groups (—OH) at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions in β-1,4 bonded glucose units constituting cellulose. This is a cellulose acylate resin substituted with a group.
 本形態のフィルムに含まれるセルロースエステルは、特に限定されないが、炭素数2~22程度の直鎖または分岐のカルボン酸のエステルであることが好ましい。エステルを構成するカルボン酸は脂肪族カルボン酸でもよいし、環を形成してもよく、芳香族カルボン酸でもよい。例えば、セルロースの水酸基部分の水素原子が、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブチリル基、イソブチリル基、バレリル基、ピバロイル基、ヘキサノイル基、オクタノイル基、ラウロイル基、ステアロイル等の炭素数2~22のアシル基で置換されたセルロースエステルが挙げられる。エステルを構成するカルボン酸(アシル基)は、置換基を有してもよい。エステルを構成するカルボン酸は、特に炭素数が2~6の低級脂肪酸であることが好ましく、炭素数が2~4の低級脂肪酸であることがより好ましく、炭素数が2または3の低級脂肪酸であることがさらに好ましい。なお、セルロースエステル中のアシル基は単一種であってもよいし、複数のアシル基の組み合わせであってもよい。 The cellulose ester contained in the film of this embodiment is not particularly limited, but is preferably an ester of a linear or branched carboxylic acid having about 2 to 22 carbon atoms. The carboxylic acid constituting the ester may be an aliphatic carboxylic acid, may form a ring, or may be an aromatic carboxylic acid. For example, the hydrogen atom of the hydroxyl group of cellulose is an acyl group having 2 to 22 carbon atoms such as acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, valeryl, pivaloyl, hexanoyl, octanoyl, lauroyl, stearoyl, etc. Examples include substituted cellulose esters. The carboxylic acid (acyl group) constituting the ester may have a substituent. The carboxylic acid constituting the ester is particularly preferably a lower fatty acid having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a lower fatty acid having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, and a lower fatty acid having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. More preferably it is. Note that the acyl group in the cellulose ester may be a single species or a combination of a plurality of acyl groups.
 好ましいセルロースエステルの具体例には、セルロースアセテート(ジアセチルセルロース(DAC)、トリアセチルセルロース(TAC))のほか、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート(CAP)、セルロースアセテートブチレート、セルロースアセテートプロピオネートブチレートのようなアセチル基の他にプロピオネート基またはブチレート基が結合したセルロースの混合脂肪酸エステルが挙げられる。好ましくはセルロースアセテート、セルロースアセテートブチレートまたはセルロースアセテートプロピオネートであり、特に好ましくはセルロースアセテートである。本発明では、取扱い性や製膜適性という観点から、保護フィルムBを構成するセルロースエステルはセルロースアセテートを主成分として含むものであることが好ましい。ここで、「主成分として含む」とは、セルロースアセテートの含有量がセルロースエステルの全量に対して50質量%以上であることを意味する。なお、セルロースアセテートの含有量は、セルロースエステルの全量に対して、好ましくは70質量%以上であり、より好ましくは90質量%以上であり、さらに好ましくは95質量%以上であり、特に好ましくは98質量%以上であり、最も好ましくは100質量%である。 Specific examples of preferred cellulose esters include cellulose acetate (diacetyl cellulose (DAC), triacetyl cellulose (TAC)), cellulose acetate propionate (CAP), cellulose acetate butyrate, and cellulose acetate propionate butyrate. Examples thereof include mixed fatty acid esters of cellulose to which a propionate group or a butyrate group is bound in addition to such an acetyl group. Preferred is cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate or cellulose acetate propionate, and particularly preferred is cellulose acetate. In this invention, it is preferable that the cellulose ester which comprises the protective film B contains a cellulose acetate as a main component from a viewpoint of a handleability or film forming ability. Here, “including as a main component” means that the content of cellulose acetate is 50% by mass or more based on the total amount of cellulose ester. The cellulose acetate content is preferably 70% by mass or more, more preferably 90% by mass or more, still more preferably 95% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 98% by mass with respect to the total amount of cellulose ester. It is at least mass%, most preferably 100 mass%.
 なお、セルロースエステルに含まれうるブチリル基は、直鎖状であっても分岐状であってもよい。また、これらのセルロースエステルは単一種を使用してもよいし、複数種を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 The butyryl group that can be contained in the cellulose ester may be linear or branched. Moreover, these cellulose esters may use a single kind, and may use it in combination of multiple types.
 セルロースエステルのアシル基の総置換度(総アシル基置換度)は、1.0~3.0程度としうる。アシル基の総置換度は、透湿性を低くする観点からは、2.0~2.95、より好ましくは2.1~2.7の範囲内であることが好ましい。また、セルロースエステルがセルロースアセテートを主成分として含む場合製膜適性やフィルム強度という観点からは、当該セルロースアセテートのアセチル基置換度はフィルム加工適性の観点から2.1~2.95であることが好ましく、2.2~2.75であることがより好ましく、2.2~2.6であることがより好ましい。2.2~2.75の範囲ではフィルムが硬く、引裂き強度が良好である、また、2.2~2.6の範囲では特に位相差として用いた時に視認性が良い。なお、セルロースエステルのアシル基の置換度は、ASTM-D817-96に規定の方法で測定することができる。 The total degree of acyl group substitution (total acyl group substitution degree) of the cellulose ester can be about 1.0 to 3.0. The total degree of substitution of the acyl group is preferably in the range of 2.0 to 2.95, more preferably 2.1 to 2.7 from the viewpoint of lowering moisture permeability. Further, when the cellulose ester contains cellulose acetate as a main component, from the viewpoint of film forming suitability and film strength, the degree of acetyl group substitution of the cellulose acetate is 2.1 to 2.95 from the viewpoint of film processing suitability. Preferably, it is 2.2 to 2.75, more preferably 2.2 to 2.6. In the range of 2.2 to 2.75, the film is hard and the tear strength is good, and in the range of 2.2 to 2.6, the visibility is particularly good when used as a phase difference. The acyl group substitution degree of cellulose ester can be measured by the method prescribed in ASTM-D817-96.
 なお、アシル基の置換度は、1グルコース単位あたりのアシル基の平均数を示し、1グルコース単位の2位、3位および6位の水酸基の水素原子のいくつがアシル基に置換されているかを示す。従って、最大の置換度は3.0であり、この場合には2位、3位および6位の水酸基の水素原子がすべてアシル基で置換されていることを意味する。これらアシル基は、グルコース単位の2位、3位、6位に平均的に置換していてもよいし、分布をもって置換していてもよい。置換度は、ASTM-D817-96に規定の方法により求められる。 The degree of substitution of acyl groups indicates the average number of acyl groups per glucose unit, and how many hydrogen atoms of hydroxyl groups at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions of 1 glucose unit are substituted with acyl groups. Show. Therefore, the maximum degree of substitution is 3.0. In this case, it means that the hydrogen atoms of the hydroxyl groups at the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions are all substituted with acyl groups. These acyl groups may be substituted on the 2nd, 3rd and 6th positions of the glucose unit on average, or may be substituted with a distribution. The degree of substitution is determined by the method prescribed in ASTM-D817-96.
 所望の光学特性を得るために置換度の異なるセルロースアセテートを混合して用いてもよい。異なるセルロースアセテートの混合比は特に限定されない。 In order to obtain desired optical characteristics, cellulose acetates having different degrees of substitution may be mixed and used. The mixing ratio of different cellulose acetates is not particularly limited.
 セルロースエステルの数平均分子量は、得られるフィルムの機械的強度を高めるためには、4×104~3×105の範囲であることが好ましく、4.5×104~2×105の範囲であることがより好ましく、5×104~7×104の範囲であることが特に好ましい。本明細書において、「重量平均分子量(Mw)」及び「数平均分子量(Mn)」は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)を用いて測定される値である。測定条件は以下のとおりである。 The number average molecular weight of the cellulose ester is preferably in the range of 4 × 10 4 to 3 × 10 5 in order to increase the mechanical strength of the resulting film, and is 4.5 × 10 4 to 2 × 10 5 . The range is more preferable, and the range of 5 × 10 4 to 7 × 10 4 is particularly preferable. In the present specification, “weight average molecular weight (Mw)” and “number average molecular weight (Mn)” are values measured using gel permeation chromatography (GPC). The measurement conditions are as follows.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 セルロースエステル中の残留硫酸の含有量は、硫黄元素換算で0.1~45質量ppmの範囲であることが好ましく、1~30質量ppmの範囲がより好ましい。硫酸は、塩の状態でフィルムに残留していると考えられる。残留硫酸の含有量が45質量ppmを超えると、フィルムを熱延伸する際や、熱延伸後にスリッティングする際に破断しやすくなる。残留硫酸の含有量は、ASTM D817-96に規定の方法により測定することができる。 The content of residual sulfuric acid in the cellulose ester is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 45 ppm by mass in terms of elemental sulfur, and more preferably in the range of 1 to 30 ppm by mass. Sulfuric acid is considered to remain in the film in a salt state. When the content of the residual sulfuric acid exceeds 45 ppm by mass, the film tends to break when the film is stretched hot or when slitting is performed after the hot stretch. The content of residual sulfuric acid can be measured by the method prescribed in ASTM D817-96.
 セルロースエステル中の遊離酸の含有量は、1~500質量ppmの範囲内であることが好ましく、1~100質量ppmであることがより好ましく、1~70質量ppmの範囲内であることがさらに好ましい。遊離酸の含有量が上記範囲であると、前述と同様に、フィルムを熱延伸する際や、熱延伸後にスリッティングする際に破断しにくい。遊離酸の含有量はASTM D817-96に規定の方法により測定することができる。 The content of free acid in the cellulose ester is preferably in the range of 1 to 500 ppm by mass, more preferably 1 to 100 ppm by mass, and further preferably in the range of 1 to 70 ppm by mass. preferable. When the content of the free acid is in the above range, it is difficult to break when the film is hot stretched or slitted after the hot stretch, as described above. The content of free acid can be measured by the method prescribed in ASTM D817-96.
 セルロースエステルは、微量の金属成分を含有することがある。微量の金属成分は、セルロース誘導体の合成工程で用いられる水に由来すると考えられる。これらの金属成分のように、不溶性の核となりうるような成分の含有量はできるだけ少ないことが好ましい。特に鉄、カルシウム、マグネシウム等の金属イオンは、有機の酸性基を含んでいる可能性のある樹脂分解物等と塩形成して不溶物を形成する場合がある。また、カルシウム(Ca)成分は、カルボン酸やスルホン酸等の酸性成分と、また多くの配位子と配位化合物(すなわち、錯体)を形成しやすく、多くの不溶なカルシウムに由来するスカム(不溶性の澱、濁り)を形成する虞がある。 Cellulose ester may contain a trace amount of metal components. It is thought that a trace amount metal component originates in the water used in the synthesis process of the cellulose derivative. Like these metal components, the content of components that can become insoluble nuclei is preferably as small as possible. In particular, metal ions such as iron, calcium, and magnesium may form an insoluble matter by forming a salt with a resin decomposition product or the like that may contain an organic acidic group. In addition, the calcium (Ca) component easily forms a coordination compound (that is, a complex) with an acidic component such as a carboxylic acid or a sulfonic acid, and many ligands. There is a risk of forming an insoluble starch or turbidity.
 具体的には、セルロースエステル中の鉄(Fe)成分の含有量は、3質量ppm以下であることが好ましく、1質量ppm以下であることがさらに好ましい。また、セルロース誘導体中のカルシウム(Ca)成分の含有量は、好ましくは60質量ppm以下であり、より好ましくは0~30質量ppmの範囲内である。セルロースエステル中のマグネシウム(Mg)成分の含有量は、0~70質量ppmの範囲内であることが好ましく、特に0~20質量ppmの範囲内であることが好ましい。 Specifically, the content of the iron (Fe) component in the cellulose ester is preferably 3 mass ppm or less, and more preferably 1 mass ppm or less. Further, the content of the calcium (Ca) component in the cellulose derivative is preferably 60 ppm by mass or less, and more preferably in the range of 0 to 30 ppm by mass. The content of the magnesium (Mg) component in the cellulose ester is preferably in the range of 0 to 70 ppm by mass, and particularly preferably in the range of 0 to 20 ppm by mass.
 鉄(Fe)成分、カルシウム(Ca)成分、及びマグネシウム(Mg)成分などの金属成分の含有量は、絶乾したセルロースエステルをマイクロダイジェスト湿式分解装置(硫硝酸分解)、アルカリ溶融で前処理を行った後、ICP-AES(誘導結合プラズマ発光分光分析装置)を用いて測定することができる。 The content of metal components such as iron (Fe) component, calcium (Ca) component, and magnesium (Mg) component is pre-processed by microdigest wet cracking device (sulfuric acid decomposition) and alkali melting of completely dried cellulose ester. After the measurement, it can be measured using ICP-AES (Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectrometer).
 残留アルカリ土類金属、残留硫酸及び残留酸の含有量は、合成して得られるセルロースエステルを、十分に洗浄することによって調整することができる。 The contents of residual alkaline earth metal, residual sulfuric acid and residual acid can be adjusted by thoroughly washing the cellulose ester obtained by synthesis.
 セルロースアセテート、セルロースアセテートプロピオネートなどのセルロースエステルは、公知の方法により製造することができる。一般的には、原料のセルロースと所定の有機酸(酢酸、プロピオン酸など)と酸無水物(無水酢酸、無水プロピオン酸など)、触媒(硫酸など)と混合して、セルロースをエステル化し、セルロースのトリエステルができるまで反応を進める。トリエステルにおいてはグルコース単位の三個のヒドロキシ基(水酸基)は、有機酸のアシル酸で置換されている。同時に二種類の有機酸を使用すると、混合エステル型のセルロースエステル、例えばセルロースアセテートプロピオネートやセルロースアセテートブチレートを作製することができる。次いで、セルロースのトリエステルを加水分解することで、所望のアシル置換度を有するセルロースエステル樹脂を合成する。その後、濾過、沈殿、水洗、脱水、乾燥などの工程を経て、セルロースエステルができあがる。具体的には特開平10-45804号公報に記載の方法を参考にして合成することができる。 Cellulose esters such as cellulose acetate and cellulose acetate propionate can be produced by known methods. Generally, cellulose is esterified by mixing cellulose as a raw material, a predetermined organic acid (such as acetic acid or propionic acid), an acid anhydride (such as acetic anhydride or propionic anhydride), and a catalyst (such as sulfuric acid). The reaction proceeds until the triester is formed. In the triester, the three hydroxy groups (hydroxyl groups) of the glucose unit are substituted with an acyl acid of an organic acid. When two kinds of organic acids are used at the same time, a mixed ester type cellulose ester such as cellulose acetate propionate or cellulose acetate butyrate can be produced. Next, a cellulose ester resin having a desired degree of acyl substitution is synthesized by hydrolyzing the cellulose triester. Thereafter, the cellulose ester is completed through steps such as filtration, precipitation, washing with water, dehydration, and drying. Specifically, it can be synthesized with reference to the method described in JP-A-10-45804.
 セルロースエステルは市販品を使用してもよい。市販品としては、ダイセル社L20、L30、L40、L50、イーストマンケミカル社のCa398-3、Ca398-6、Ca398-10、Ca398-30、Ca394-60S等が挙げられる。 The cellulose ester may be a commercially available product. Commercially available products include Daicel Corporation L20, L30, L40, and L50, Eastman Chemical Co. Ca398-3, Ca398-6, Ca398-10, Ca398-30, Ca394-60S, and the like.
 (リターデーション上昇剤)
 保護フィルムBとしてのセルロースエステルフィルムは、リターデーション上昇剤を含有することが好ましい。「リターデーション上昇剤」とは、その添加によってセルロースエステルフィルムのリターデーションが上昇するような機能を有する添加剤を意味する。リターデーション上昇剤の具体的な形態について特に制限はなく、従来公知の知見が適宜参照されうる。
(Retardation increasing agent)
The cellulose ester film as the protective film B preferably contains a retardation increasing agent. The “retardation increasing agent” means an additive having a function of increasing the retardation of the cellulose ester film by the addition thereof. There is no restriction | limiting in particular about the specific form of a retardation raising agent, A conventionally well-known knowledge can be referred suitably.
 ここでは、リターデーション上昇剤の好ましい形態として、例えば、下記一般式(1)の化合物が挙げられる。ただし、その他のリターデーション上昇剤が用いられてもよいことはもちろんである。下記一般式(1)の化合物は、特にセルロースエステルフィルムの厚さ方向のリターデーション値を上昇させ、しかも当該フィルムの透湿性を低減させることもできる。また、下記一般式(1)の化合物は、高温多湿下でも揮発性が低い。このため、セルロースエステルフィルムの耐ブリード性をも向上させることができ、その結果として映像の鮮明度を向上できる。 Here, as a preferable form of the retardation increasing agent, for example, a compound represented by the following general formula (1) may be mentioned. However, it goes without saying that other retardation increasing agents may be used. The compound of the following general formula (1) can raise the retardation value of the thickness direction of a cellulose-ester film especially, and can also reduce the moisture permeability of the said film. Moreover, the compound of the following general formula (1) has low volatility even under high temperature and high humidity. For this reason, the bleed resistance of the cellulose ester film can be improved, and as a result, the sharpness of the image can be improved.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 上記一般式(1)において、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、炭素数1~3のアルキル基またはハロゲン原子を表す。ここで、R~Rは、それぞれ同じであってもあるいは相互に異なるものであってもよい。上記炭素数1~3のアルキル基としては、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基及びイソプロピル基がある。なかでも、リターデーション値(特にフィルムの厚さ方向のレターデーション値)を向上させる効果、セルロースエステルとの相溶性などの観点からは、水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、フッ素原子、塩素原子が好ましく、メチル基が特に好ましい。 In the general formula (1), R 1 to R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a halogen atom. Here, R 1 to R 4 may be the same or different from each other. Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and an isopropyl group. Among them, from the viewpoint of improving the retardation value (particularly the retardation value in the thickness direction of the film) and compatibility with the cellulose ester, hydrogen atoms, methyl groups, ethyl groups, fluorine atoms, chlorine atoms are A methyl group is preferable, and a methyl group is particularly preferable.
 上記一般式(1)において、Xは、それぞれ独立して、-O-または-O-C(=O)-を表す。ここで、Xが-O-C(=O)-を表す場合、-O-C(=O)-のエーテル酸素(-O-)が一般式(1)におけるフェニル骨格に結合することになる。なかでも、Xは、-O-であることが好ましい。 In the general formula (1), each X independently represents —O— or —O—C (═O) —. Here, when X represents —O—C (═O) —, the ether oxygen (—O—) of —O—C (═O) — is bonded to the phenyl skeleton in the general formula (1). . Among these, X is preferably —O—.
 上記一般式(1)において、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、以下の定義を有する。 In the general formula (1), R 5 and R 6 each independently have the following definition.
 Xが-O-のとき、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、ヒドロキシル基、エステル基もしくは置換されていてもよい芳香族基で置換されていてもよいアルキル基;またはグリシジル基を表す。 When X is —O—, R 5 and R 6 each independently represents a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with an optionally substituted aromatic group; or a glycidyl group .
 また、Xが-O-C(=O)-のとき、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、ヒドロキシル基、エステル基もしくは置換されていてもよい芳香族基で置換されていてもよいアルキル基;または置換されていてもよい芳香族基を表す。 When X is —O—C (═O) —, R 5 and R 6 may each independently be substituted with a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an optionally substituted aromatic group. Represents an alkyl group; or an optionally substituted aromatic group.
 上記アルキル基を置換しうるエステル基は、式:-O-C(=O)-Rまたは-C(=O)-O-Rで表され、この際Rは、炭素数1~8の直鎖または分岐鎖のアルキル基または芳香族基である。上記アルキル基及び芳香族基は下記定義と同様である。 The ester group capable of substituting the alkyl group is represented by the formula: —O—C (═O) —R or —C (═O) —O—R, wherein R is a straight chain having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. A chain or branched chain alkyl group or an aromatic group. The alkyl group and aromatic group are as defined below.
 RおよびRとしてのアルキル基としては、特に制限されないが、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、ブチル基、イソブチル基、sec-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、ペンチル基、イソペンチル基、ネオペンチル基、ヘキシル基、ヘプチル基及びオクチル基等の、炭素数1~8の直鎖または分岐鎖のアルキル基であることが好ましい。これらのうち、炭素数1~5のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数2~4のアルキル基が好ましい。 The alkyl group as R 5 and R 6 is not particularly limited, but is methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, isopropyl group, butyl group, isobutyl group, sec-butyl group, tert-butyl group, pentyl group, isopentyl group. A linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, such as neopentyl group, hexyl group, heptyl group and octyl group. Among these, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable.
 芳香族基としては、炭素数6~24のアリール基でありうる。より具体的には、フェニル基、p-トリル基、ナフチル基、ビフェニル基、フルオレニル基、アンスリル基、ピレニル基、アズレニル基、アセナフチレニル基、ターフェニル基、フェナンスリル基などが挙げられる。これらのうち、フェニル基、ナフチル基が好ましく、フェニル基がより好ましい。また、上記芳香族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。ここで、芳香族基を置換しうる置換基としては、特に制限されないが、例えば、炭素数1~3のアルキル基、炭素数1~3のアルコキシ基、フェニル基、メチルフェニル基、フェニルフェニル基、メチルフェニルフェニル基、シアノ基、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、ニトロ基等が挙げられる。また、上記置換基は、1個でもあるいは2個以上であってもよく、後者の場合には、各置換基は同じであってもあるいは異なるものであってもよい。これらのうち、レターデーション値(特にフィルムの厚さ方向のレターデーション値)の向上効果、セルロースエステルとの相溶性などの観点から、芳香族基は、フェニル基、メチルフェニル基、メチルフェニルフェニル基であることが好ましい。 The aromatic group may be an aryl group having 6 to 24 carbon atoms. More specifically, a phenyl group, p-tolyl group, naphthyl group, biphenyl group, fluorenyl group, anthryl group, pyrenyl group, azulenyl group, acenaphthylenyl group, terphenyl group, phenanthryl group and the like can be mentioned. Of these, a phenyl group and a naphthyl group are preferable, and a phenyl group is more preferable. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Here, the substituent capable of substituting the aromatic group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, and a phenylphenyl group. , Methylphenylphenyl group, cyano group, halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), nitro group and the like. Moreover, the said substituent may be one, or may be two or more, and in the latter case, each substituent may be the same or different. Among these, from the viewpoint of improving the retardation value (particularly the retardation value in the thickness direction of the film) and compatibility with the cellulose ester, the aromatic group is a phenyl group, a methylphenyl group, or a methylphenylphenyl group. It is preferable that
 RおよびRが置換基を有するアルキル基である場合の一般式(1)の化合物の製造方法は特に制限されない。具体的には、当該化合物は、エポキシ化合物と芳香族モノカルボン酸とを反応させることにより得ることができる。前記エポキシ化合物としては、ビフェノール類とエピクロルヒドリンとの反応によって得られるジグリシジルエーテル型のエポキシ化合物が挙げられる。このエポキシ化合物の具体的な例として、3,3’,5,5’-テトラメチル-4,4’-ジグリシジルオキシビフェニル(市販品では、ジャパンエポキシレジン株式会社製「jER YX-4000」(エポキシ当量180~192))等のビフェノール型エポキシ化合物を使用できる。 The method for producing the compound of the general formula (1) when R 5 and R 6 are alkyl groups having a substituent is not particularly limited. Specifically, the compound can be obtained by reacting an epoxy compound with an aromatic monocarboxylic acid. As said epoxy compound, the diglycidyl ether type epoxy compound obtained by reaction with biphenols and epichlorohydrin is mentioned. As a specific example of this epoxy compound, 3,3 ′, 5,5′-tetramethyl-4,4′-diglycidyloxybiphenyl (commercially available product is “jER YX-4000” manufactured by Japan Epoxy Resin Co., Ltd.) Biphenol type epoxy compounds such as epoxy equivalent of 180 to 192)) can be used.
 また、前記芳香族モノカルボン酸としては、例えば、安息香酸、ジメチル安息香酸、トリメチル安息香酸、テトラメチル安息香酸、エチル安息香酸、プロピル安息香酸、クミン酸、o-トルイル酸、m-トルイル酸、p-トルイル酸、アニス酸、エトキシ安息香酸、プロポキシ安息香酸、シアノ安息香酸、フルオロ安息香酸、ニトロ安息香酸、4-フェニル安息香酸、4-(3-メチルフェニル)安息香酸、4-(4-メチルフェニル)安息香酸、4-(3,5-ジメチルフェニル)安息香酸、2-メチル-4-フェニル安息香酸、2,6-ジメチル-4-フェニル安息香酸、2,6-ジメチル-4-(3,5-ジメチルフェニル)安息香酸、ナフトエ酸、ニコチン酸、フロ酸、1-ナフタレンカルボン酸、2-ナフタレンカルボン酸等が挙げられる。これらの芳香族モノカルボン酸は、単独で用いることも2種以上併用することもできる。 Examples of the aromatic monocarboxylic acid include benzoic acid, dimethylbenzoic acid, trimethylbenzoic acid, tetramethylbenzoic acid, ethylbenzoic acid, propylbenzoic acid, cumic acid, o-toluic acid, m-toluic acid, p-toluic acid, anisic acid, ethoxybenzoic acid, propoxybenzoic acid, cyanobenzoic acid, fluorobenzoic acid, nitrobenzoic acid, 4-phenylbenzoic acid, 4- (3-methylphenyl) benzoic acid, 4- (4- Methylphenyl) benzoic acid, 4- (3,5-dimethylphenyl) benzoic acid, 2-methyl-4-phenylbenzoic acid, 2,6-dimethyl-4-phenylbenzoic acid, 2,6-dimethyl-4- ( 3,5-dimethylphenyl) benzoic acid, naphthoic acid, nicotinic acid, furoic acid, 1-naphthalene carboxylic acid, 2-naphthalene carboxylic acid, etc. It is below. These aromatic monocarboxylic acids can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 上記反応において、エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基と芳香族モノカルボン酸のカルボキシル基とが反応して、一般式(1)の化合物が合成される。ここで、上記反応条件は上記反応が進行する条件であれば特に制限されない。例えば、反応温度は、80~130℃、より好ましくは100℃~115℃である。反応時間は、10~25時間であることが好ましい。また、記エポキシ化合物と前記芳香族モノカルボン酸との混合比(仕込み比)は、上記反応が進行する条件であれば特に制限されない。例えば、エポキシ化合物のエポキシ基のモル数と、芳香族モノカルボン酸のモル数の比(エポキシ基モル数)/(芳香族モノカルボン酸のモル数)が、1/0.9~1.0の範囲であることが好ましい。 In the above reaction, the epoxy group of the epoxy compound and the carboxyl group of the aromatic monocarboxylic acid react to synthesize the compound of the general formula (1). Here, the reaction conditions are not particularly limited as long as the reaction proceeds. For example, the reaction temperature is 80 to 130 ° C, more preferably 100 ° C to 115 ° C. The reaction time is preferably 10 to 25 hours. The mixing ratio (preparation ratio) of the epoxy compound and the aromatic monocarboxylic acid is not particularly limited as long as the reaction proceeds. For example, the ratio of the number of moles of epoxy groups in the epoxy compound to the number of moles of aromatic monocarboxylic acid (number of moles of epoxy group) / (number of moles of aromatic monocarboxylic acid) is 1 / 0.9 to 1.0. It is preferable that it is the range of these.
 また、上記反応において、必要に応じて触媒を用いてもよい。この触媒としては、例えば、トリメチルホスフィン、トリエチルホスフィン、トリブチルホスフィン、トリオクチルホスフィン、トリフェニルホスフィン等のホスフィン化合物;2-メチルイミダゾール、2-エチルイミダゾール、2-イソプロピルイミダゾール、2-エチル-4-メチルイミダゾール、4-フェニル-2-メチルイミダゾール等のイミダゾール系化合物;トリエチルアミン、トリブチルアミン、トリヘキシルアミン、トリアミルアミン、トリエタノールアミン、ジメチルアミノエタノール、トリアチレンジアミン、ジメチルフェニルアミン、ジメチルベンジルアミン、2-(ジメチルアミノメチル)フェノール、1,8-ジアザビシクロ(5,4,0)ウンデセン-7等のアミン化合物;ジメチルアミノピリジン等のピリジン化合物などが挙げられる。これらの触媒は、前記エポキシ化合物及び前記芳香族モノカルボン酸の合計100質量部に対して、0.05~1質量部の量で使用されることが好ましい。 In the above reaction, a catalyst may be used as necessary. Examples of the catalyst include phosphine compounds such as trimethylphosphine, triethylphosphine, tributylphosphine, trioctylphosphine, and triphenylphosphine; 2-methylimidazole, 2-ethylimidazole, 2-isopropylimidazole, 2-ethyl-4-methyl Imidazole compounds such as imidazole and 4-phenyl-2-methylimidazole; triethylamine, tributylamine, trihexylamine, triamylamine, triethanolamine, dimethylaminoethanol, tritylenediamine, dimethylphenylamine, dimethylbenzylamine, 2 -(Dimethylaminomethyl) phenol, amine compounds such as 1,8-diazabicyclo (5,4,0) undecene-7; Such as emission compounds. These catalysts are preferably used in an amount of 0.05 to 1 part by mass with respect to a total of 100 parts by mass of the epoxy compound and the aromatic monocarboxylic acid.
 これらのうち、RおよびRとしては、置換基としてヒドロキシル基及びエステル基を有するアルキル基、またはグリシジル基であることが好ましい。この際、Xは-O-であることがより好ましい。また、一般式(1)の化合物としては、特開2011-140637号公報及び特開2011-116912号公報に記載の化合物が一般式(1)の化合物に包含される。また、特開2006-45468号公報に記載の化合物の一部もまた、一般式(1)の化合物に包含される。より具体的には、一般式(1)の化合物のより好ましい例としては、下記が挙げられる。なお、下記番号にて、化合物を規定する。すなわち、下記(1-1)の化合物を「化合物(1-1)」とも称する。 Among these, R 5 and R 6 are preferably an alkyl group having a hydroxyl group and an ester group as a substituent, or a glycidyl group. In this case, X is more preferably —O—. Further, as the compound of the general formula (1), the compounds described in JP 2011-140637 A and JP 2011-116912 A are included in the compound of the general formula (1). In addition, some of the compounds described in JP-A-2006-45468 are also included in the compound of the general formula (1). More specifically, the following is mentioned as a more preferable example of the compound of General formula (1). In addition, a compound is prescribed | regulated by the following number. That is, the following compound (1-1) is also referred to as “compound (1-1)”.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 保護フィルムBを構成するセルロースエステルフィルムにおけるリターデーション上昇剤の含有量について特に制限はなく、後述する形態に挙げられるような所望のリターデーションの値を達成できるような含有量に適宜調節することが可能である。一例として、セルロースエステルフィルムにおけるリターデーション上昇剤の含有量は、セルロースエステルフィルムに含まれるセルロースエステル100質量部に対して、好ましくは0.5~30質量部、より好ましくは1~10質量部、特に好ましくは2~5質量部である。このような量であれば、セルロースエステルフィルムに十分なリターデーションを付与することができる。また、上記一般式(1)で表されるリターデーション上昇剤を用いる場合には、かような量で添加することによってフィルムの引き裂き強度を向上させることができ、しかも高温多湿下での揮発性を低減するため、フィルムの耐ブリード性、ひいては映像の鮮明度を向上させることができる。 There is no restriction | limiting in particular about content of the retardation raising agent in the cellulose-ester film which comprises the protective film B, It can adjust suitably to content which can achieve the value of the desired retardation as mentioned in the form mentioned later. Is possible. As an example, the content of the retardation increasing agent in the cellulose ester film is preferably 0.5 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the cellulose ester contained in the cellulose ester film. Particularly preferred is 2 to 5 parts by mass. If it is such quantity, sufficient retardation can be provided to a cellulose-ester film. Moreover, when using the retardation raising agent represented by the above general formula (1), the tear strength of the film can be improved by adding such an amount, and the volatile property under high temperature and high humidity. Therefore, it is possible to improve the bleed resistance of the film and thus the sharpness of the image.
 なお、リターデーション上昇剤の添加方法としては、セルロースエステルフィルムを形成する樹脂に粉体で添加してもよく、溶媒に溶解した後、セルロースエステルフィルムを形成する樹脂に添加してもよい。 In addition, as a method for adding the retardation increasing agent, it may be added to the resin forming the cellulose ester film as a powder, or after being dissolved in a solvent, it may be added to the resin forming the cellulose ester film.
 (可塑剤)
 保護フィルムBとしてのセルロースエステルフィルムは、フィルム製造時の組成物の流動性や、フィルムの柔軟性や加工性を向上するために可塑剤を含有していていもよい。可塑剤の例には、糖エステル系可塑剤、ポリエステル系可塑剤、多価アルコールエステル系可塑剤、アクリル系化合物、多価カルボン酸エステル系可塑剤(フタル酸エステル系可塑剤を含む)、グリコレート系可塑剤、エステル系可塑剤(クエン酸エステル系可塑剤、脂肪酸エステル系可塑剤、リン酸エステル系可塑剤、トリメリット酸エステル系可塑剤等を含む)、スチレン系化合物等が含まれる。可塑剤の中でも、下記糖エステル系可塑剤(糖エステル化合物)、ポリエステル系可塑剤、およびアクリル系化合物からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の可塑剤を含むことが、透湿性の効果的な制御およびセルロースエステルとの相溶性を高度に両立できる観点から好ましい。これらは、単独で用いても、二種類以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
(Plasticizer)
The cellulose ester film as the protective film B may contain a plasticizer in order to improve the fluidity of the composition during film production and the flexibility and workability of the film. Examples of plasticizers include sugar ester plasticizers, polyester plasticizers, polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizers, acrylic compounds, polycarboxylic acid ester plasticizers (including phthalate ester plasticizers), glycosates. Examples include rate plasticizers, ester plasticizers (including citrate ester plasticizers, fatty acid ester plasticizers, phosphate ester plasticizers, trimellitic ester plasticizers, etc.), styrene compounds, and the like. Among the plasticizers, it is effective for moisture permeability to include at least one plasticizer selected from the group consisting of the following sugar ester plasticizers (sugar ester compounds), polyester plasticizers, and acrylic compounds. This is preferable from the viewpoint of achieving both high control and compatibility with the cellulose ester. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 当該可塑剤は、分子量が5000以下、さらには3000以下であることが、耐湿熱性の改善とセルロースエステルとの相溶性を両立する観点から好ましい。当該分子量が3000以下である化合物が重合体である場合は、重量平均分子量(Mw)が3000以下であることが好ましい。好ましい分子量(Mw)の範囲は100~2500の範囲内であり、さらに好ましくは300~2000の範囲内である。 The molecular weight of the plasticizer is preferably 5000 or less, and more preferably 3000 or less from the viewpoint of achieving both improvement in wet heat resistance and compatibility with the cellulose ester. When the compound having a molecular weight of 3000 or less is a polymer, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 3000 or less. A preferable molecular weight (Mw) is in the range of 100 to 2500, and more preferably in the range of 300 to 2000.
 糖エステル系可塑剤(糖エステル化合物)は、フラノース構造もしくはピラノース構造を1~12個有する化合物であって、該化合物中のヒドロキシ基の全部または一部がエステル化された化合物をいう。糖エステル系可塑剤は加水分解防止を目的として添加されうる。 Sugar ester plasticizer (sugar ester compound) is a compound having 1 to 12 furanose structures or pyranose structures, in which all or part of the hydroxy groups in the compound are esterified. The sugar ester plasticizer can be added for the purpose of preventing hydrolysis.
 本発明に係る糖エステル化合物の合成原料の糖の例としては、例えば以下のようなものを挙げることができるが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。グルコース、ガラクトース、マンノース、フルクトース、キシロース、あるいはアラビノース、ラクトース、スクロース、ニストース、1F-フラクトシルニストース、スタキオース、マルチトール、ラクチトール、ラクチュロース、セロビオース、マルトース、セロトリオース、マルトトリオース、ラフィノースあるいはケストース挙げられる。この他、ゲンチオビオース、ゲンチオトリオース、ゲンチオテトラオース、キシロトリオース、ガラクトシルスクロースなども挙げられる。 Examples of the sugar as a raw material for synthesizing the sugar ester compound according to the present invention include the following, but the present invention is not limited to these. Glucose, galactose, mannose, fructose, xylose or arabinose, lactose, sucrose, nystose, 1F-fructosyl nystose, stachyose, maltitol, lactitol, lactulose, cellobiose, maltose, cellotriose, maltotriose, raffinose or kestose . In addition, gentiobiose, gentiotriose, gentiotetraose, xylotriose, galactosyl sucrose, and the like are also included.
 ピラノース構造またはフラノース構造中のOH基のすべてもしくは一部をエステル化するのに用いられるモノカルボン酸としては、特に制限はなく、公知の脂肪族モノカルボン酸、脂環族モノカルボン酸、芳香族モノカルボン酸等を用いることができる。用いられるカルボン酸は1種類でもよいし2種以上の混合であってもよい。 The monocarboxylic acid used for esterifying all or part of the OH group in the pyranose structure or furanose structure is not particularly limited, and is a known aliphatic monocarboxylic acid, alicyclic monocarboxylic acid, aromatic A monocarboxylic acid or the like can be used. The carboxylic acid used may be one type or a mixture of two or more types.
 好ましい脂肪族モノカルボン酸の例としては、酢酸、プロピオン酸、酪酸、イソ酪酸、吉草酸、カプロン酸、エナント酸、カプリル酸、ペラルゴン酸、カプリン酸、2-エチル-ヘキサンカルボン酸、ウンデシル酸、ラウリン酸、トリデシル酸、ミリスチン酸、ペンタデシル酸、パルミチン酸、ヘプタデシル酸、ステアリン酸、ノナデカン酸、アラキン酸、ベヘン酸、リグノセリン酸、セロチン酸、ヘプタコサン酸、モンタン酸、メリシン酸、ラクセル酸等の飽和脂肪酸、ウンデシレン酸、オレイン酸、ソルビン酸、リノール酸、リノレン酸、アラキドン酸、オクテン酸等の不飽和脂肪酸等を挙げることができる。 Examples of preferred aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, isobutyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, enanthic acid, caprylic acid, pelargonic acid, capric acid, 2-ethyl-hexanecarboxylic acid, undecylic acid, Saturation of lauric acid, tridecylic acid, myristic acid, pentadecylic acid, palmitic acid, heptadecylic acid, stearic acid, nonadecanoic acid, arachidic acid, behenic acid, lignoceric acid, serotic acid, heptacosanoic acid, montanic acid, mellicic acid, and laxaric acid Examples thereof include unsaturated fatty acids such as fatty acids, undecylenic acid, oleic acid, sorbic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, arachidonic acid and octenoic acid.
 好ましい脂環族モノカルボン酸の例としては、シクロペンタンカルボン酸、シクロヘキサンカルボン酸、シクロオクタンカルボン酸、またはそれらの誘導体を挙げることができる。 Examples of preferable alicyclic monocarboxylic acids include cyclopentane carboxylic acid, cyclohexane carboxylic acid, cyclooctane carboxylic acid, and derivatives thereof.
 好ましい芳香族モノカルボン酸の例としては、安息香酸、フェニル酢酸、トルイル酸等の安息香酸のベンゼン環に1~5個のアルキル基若しくはアルコキシ基を導入した芳香族モノカルボン酸、ケイ皮酸、ベンジル酸、ビフェニルカルボン酸、ナフタリンカルボン酸、テトラリンカルボン酸等のベンゼン環を2個以上有する芳香族モノカルボン酸、またはそれらの誘導体を挙げることができるが、特に安息香酸が好ましい。 Examples of preferred aromatic monocarboxylic acids include aromatic monocarboxylic acids having 1 to 5 alkyl groups or alkoxy groups introduced into the benzene ring of benzoic acid such as benzoic acid, phenylacetic acid, toluic acid, cinnamic acid, Examples thereof include aromatic monocarboxylic acids having two or more benzene rings such as benzylic acid, biphenylcarboxylic acid, naphthalenecarboxylic acid, tetralincarboxylic acid, or derivatives thereof, and benzoic acid is particularly preferable.
 そのような糖エステルの好ましい例には、下記一般式(FA)で表されるスクロースエステルが含まれる。 Preferred examples of such sugar esters include sucrose esters represented by the following general formula (FA).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 一般式(FA)のR1~R8は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、置換若しくは無置換のアルキルカルボニル基、または置換若しくは無置換のアリールカルボニル基を表す。R1~R8は、互いに同じであっても、異なってもよい。 R 1 to R 8 in formula (FA) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group. R 1 to R 8 may be the same as or different from each other.
 置換若しくは無置換のアルキルカルボニル基は、炭素原子数2以上の置換若しくは無置換のアルキルカルボニル基であることが好ましい。置換若しくは無置換のアルキルカルボニル基の例には、メチルカルボニル基(アセチル基)が含まれる。アルキル基が有する置換基の例には、フェニル基等の芳香族炭化水素環基が含まれる。 The substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 2 or more carbon atoms. Examples of the substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group include a methylcarbonyl group (acetyl group). Examples of the substituent that the alkyl group has include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group such as a phenyl group.
 置換または無置換のアリールカルボニル基は、炭素原子数7以上の置換または無置換のアリールカルボニル基であることが好ましい。アリールカルボニル基の例には、フェニルカルボニル基が含まれる。芳香族炭化水素環基が有する置換基の例には、メチル基等のアルキル基や、メトキシ基等のアルコキシル基等が含まれる。 The substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms. Examples of the arylcarbonyl group include a phenylcarbonyl group. Examples of the substituent that the aromatic hydrocarbon ring group has include an alkyl group such as a methyl group, an alkoxyl group such as a methoxy group, and the like.
 上記一般式(FA)で表される化合物は、平均置換度が好ましくは3.0~8.0、より好ましくは4.0~7.5であり、さらに好ましくは4.5~7.0の値を取ることによって、透湿性の制御とセルロースエステルとの相溶性を高度に両立することができる。 The compound represented by the general formula (FA) preferably has an average degree of substitution of 3.0 to 8.0, more preferably 4.0 to 7.5, and even more preferably 4.5 to 7.0. By taking this value, the moisture permeability control and the compatibility with the cellulose ester can be highly compatible.
 本発明において、一般式(FA)で表される化合物の置換度とは、一般式(FA)に含まれる8つの水酸基のうち、水素以外の置換基で置換されている数を表し、すなわち、一般式(FA)のR1~R8のうち、水素以外の基を含む数を表す。したがって、R1~R8が全て水素以外の置換基により置換された場合に、置換度は最大値の8.0となり、R1~R8が全て水素原子である場合には、0.0となる。 In the present invention, the degree of substitution of the compound represented by the general formula (FA) represents the number substituted with a substituent other than hydrogen among the eight hydroxyl groups contained in the general formula (FA). Of R 1 to R 8 in the general formula (FA), this represents a number containing a group other than hydrogen. Therefore, when all of R 1 to R 8 are substituted with a substituent other than hydrogen, the degree of substitution is a maximum value of 8.0, and when R 1 to R 8 are all hydrogen atoms, 0.0 It becomes.
 一般式(FA)で表される構造を有する化合物は、水酸基の数、OR基の数が固定された単一種の化合物を合成することは困難であり、式中の水酸基の数、OR基の異なる成分が数種類混合された化合物となることが知られているため、本発明における一般式(FA)の置換度としては、平均置換度を用いることが適当であり、常法により高速液体クロマトグラフィーによって置換度分布を示すチャートの面積比から平均置換度を測定することができる。 The compound having the structure represented by the general formula (FA) is difficult to synthesize a single kind of compound in which the number of hydroxyl groups and the number of OR groups are fixed. Since it is known that it becomes a compound in which several different components are mixed, it is appropriate to use the average substitution degree as the substitution degree of the general formula (FA) in the present invention. The average substitution degree can be measured from the area ratio of the chart showing the substitution degree distribution.
 一般式(FA)において、R~Rは、置換または無置換のアルキルカルボニル基、あるいは、置換または無置換のアリールカルボニル基を表し、R~Rは、同じであっても、異なっていてもよい(以下、R~Rをアシル基ともいう)。R~Rとしては、具体的には、上記で例示した糖エステル化合物の合成時に用いられるモノカルボン酸由来のアシル基が挙げられる。 In the general formula (FA), R 1 to R 8 represent a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group, and R 1 to R 8 may be the same or different. (Hereinafter, R 1 to R 8 are also referred to as acyl groups). Specific examples of R 1 to R 8 include acyl groups derived from monocarboxylic acids used during the synthesis of the sugar ester compounds exemplified above.
 以下に、本発明に係る糖エステル化合物の具体例を挙げるが、R~Rのうちいずれかを同じ置換基Rとした場合であって、本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。また、下記実施例において、ポリエステル化合物を下記記号にて規定する。なお、本発明において、R~Rはそれぞれ異なる基である糖エステル化合物を使用することができる。 Specific examples of the sugar ester compound according to the present invention will be given below, but any of R 1 to R 8 may be the same substituent R, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In the following examples, polyester compounds are defined by the following symbols. In the present invention, sugar ester compounds in which R 1 to R 8 are different groups can be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 本発明に係る糖エステル化合物は、前記糖に、アシル化剤(エステル化剤ともいう、例えば、アセチルクロライド等の酸ハロゲン化物、無水酢酸等の無水物)を反応させることによって製造することが可能であり、置換度の分布は、アシル化剤の量、添加タイミング、エステル化反応時間の調節によってなされるが、置換度違いの糖エステル化合物の混合、あるいは純粋に単離した置換度違いの化合物を混合することにより、目的の平均置換度、置換度4以下の成分を調整することができる。 The sugar ester compound according to the present invention can be produced by reacting the sugar with an acylating agent (also referred to as an esterifying agent, for example, an acid halide such as acetyl chloride, an anhydride such as acetic anhydride). The distribution of the degree of substitution is made by adjusting the amount of acylating agent, the timing of addition, and the esterification reaction time, but it is a mixture of sugar ester compounds with different degrees of substitution or purely isolated compounds with different degrees of substitution. Can be used to adjust components having a target average substitution degree and a substitution degree of 4 or less.
 (合成例:糖エステル化合物の合成例) (Synthesis example: Synthesis example of sugar ester compound)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 撹拌装置、還流冷却器、温度計および窒素ガス導入管を備えた四頭コルベンに、ショ糖34.2g(0.1モル)、無水安息香酸135.6g(0.6モル)、ピリジン284.8g(3.6モル)を仕込み、撹拌下に窒素ガス導入管から窒素ガスをバブリングさせながら昇温し、70℃で5時間エステル化反応を行った。 Four-headed Kolben equipped with a stirrer, a reflux condenser, a thermometer, and a nitrogen gas inlet tube was charged with 34.2 g (0.1 mol) of sucrose, 135.6 g (0.6 mol) of benzoic anhydride, 284. 8 g (3.6 mol) was charged, the temperature was raised while bubbling nitrogen gas through a nitrogen gas introduction tube with stirring, and an esterification reaction was carried out at 70 ° C. for 5 hours.
 次に、コルベン内を4×10Pa以下に減圧し、60℃で過剰のピリジンを留去した後に、コルベン内を1.3×10Pa以下に減圧し、120℃まで昇温させ、無水安息香酸、生成した安息香酸の大部分を留去した。そして、次にトルエン1L、0.5質量%の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液300gを添加し、50℃で30分間撹拌後、静置して、トルエン層を分取した。最後に、分取したトルエン層に水100gを添加し、常温で30分間水洗後、トルエン層を分取し、減圧下(4×10Pa以下)、60℃でトルエンを留去させ、化合物A-1、A-2、A-3、A-4およびA-5等の混合物である糖エステル化合物1を得た。 Next, the inside of the Kolben was depressurized to 4 × 10 2 Pa or less, and after excess pyridine was distilled off at 60 ° C., the inside of the Kolben was depressurized to 1.3 × 10 Pa or less and the temperature was raised to 120 ° C. Most of the acid and benzoic acid formed were distilled off. Then, 1 L of toluene and 300 g of a 0.5% by mass aqueous sodium carbonate solution were added, and the mixture was stirred at 50 ° C. for 30 minutes and then allowed to stand to separate a toluene layer. Finally, 100 g of water is added to the collected toluene layer, and after washing with water at room temperature for 30 minutes, the toluene layer is separated, and toluene is distilled off at 60 ° C. under reduced pressure (4 × 10 2 Pa or less). A sugar ester compound 1 which is a mixture of A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4, A-5 and the like was obtained.
 得られた混合物を高速液体クロマトグラフィー質量分析(HPLC-MS)で解析したところ、A-1が1.2質量%、A-2が13.2質量%、A-3が14.2質量%、A-4が35.4質量%、A-5等が40.0質量%であった。平均置換度は5.2であった。 The obtained mixture was analyzed by high performance liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (HPLC-MS). As a result, A-1 was 1.2% by mass, A-2 was 13.2% by mass, and A-3 was 14.2% by mass. , A-4 was 35.4% by mass, A-5 and the like were 40.0% by mass. The average degree of substitution was 5.2.
 同様に、無水安息香酸158.2g(0.70モル)、146.9g(0.65モル)、135.6g(0.60モル)、124.3g(0.55モル)と当モルのピリジンとを反応させて、表A記載のような成分の糖エステル化合物を得た。 Similarly, 158.2 g (0.70 mol) benzoic anhydride, 146.9 g (0.65 mol), 135.6 g (0.60 mol), 124.3 g (0.55 mol) and equimolar pyridine. To obtain sugar ester compounds having the components shown in Table A.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 次いで、得られた混合物の一部を、シリカゲルを用いたカラムクロマトグラフィーにより精製することで、それぞれ純度100%のA-1、A-2、A-3、A-4およびA-5等を得た。 Next, a part of the obtained mixture is purified by column chromatography using silica gel to obtain A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4, A-5 and the like having a purity of 100%. Obtained.
 なお、A-5等とは、置換度4以下の全ての成分、つまり置換度4、3、2、1の化合物の混合物であることを意味する。また、平均置換度は、A-5等を置換度4として計算した。 A-5 etc. means a mixture of all components having a substitution degree of 4 or less, that is, compounds having substitution degrees of 4, 3, 2, 1. The average degree of substitution was calculated with A-5 as the degree of substitution of 4.
 本発明においては、ここで作製した方法により所望の平均置換度に近い糖エステルおよび単離したA-1~A-5等を組み合わせ添加することにより、平均置換度を調整した。 In the present invention, the average degree of substitution was adjusted by adding in combination the sugar ester close to the desired degree of average substitution and the isolated A-1 to A-5 etc. by the method prepared here.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 その他の糖エステルの例には、特開昭62-42996号公報及び特開平10-237084号公報に記載の化合物が含まれる。 Examples of other sugar esters include compounds described in JP-A Nos. 62-42996 and 10-237084.
 また、ポリエステル系可塑剤は、特に限定されないが、例えば、ジカルボン酸またはこれらのエステル形成性誘導体とグリコールとの縮合反応により得ることができる末端がヒドロキシ基(水酸基)となる重合体(ポリエステルポリオール)、または、当該ポリエステルポリオールの末端のヒドロキシ基がモノカルボン酸で封止された重合体(末端封止ポリエステル)を用いることができる。ここで言うエステル形成性誘導体とは、ジカルボン酸のエステル化物、ジカルボン酸クロライド、ジカルボン酸の無水物のことである。 The polyester plasticizer is not particularly limited. For example, a polymer (polyester polyol) in which the terminal obtained by a condensation reaction of dicarboxylic acid or an ester-forming derivative thereof and glycol becomes a hydroxy group (hydroxyl group). Alternatively, a polymer in which the terminal hydroxy group of the polyester polyol is sealed with a monocarboxylic acid (end-capped polyester) can be used. The ester-forming derivative referred to here is an esterified product of dicarboxylic acid, dicarboxylic acid chloride, or dicarboxylic acid anhydride.
 好ましくは、下記一般式(FB-1)で表されるポリエステル系可塑剤を用いることが、透湿性の制御とセルロースエステルとの相溶性を高度に両立する観点から好ましい。 Preferably, it is preferable to use a polyester plasticizer represented by the following general formula (FB-1) from the viewpoint of high compatibility between moisture permeability control and compatibility with the cellulose ester.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 上記式中、Bは炭素数が2以上6以下の直鎖もしくは分岐のアルキレン基、もしくはシクロアルキレン基を示し、Aは炭素数が6以上14以下の芳香族環基、もしくは炭素数4~12の脂肪族基を、nは1以上の自然数を示す。 In the above formula, B represents a linear or branched alkylene group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms or a cycloalkylene group, and A represents an aromatic ring group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, or 4 to 12 carbon atoms. N represents a natural number of 1 or more.
 上記の式で表される化合物は、芳香環を有するジカルボン酸(芳香族ジカルボン酸ともいう)と、炭素数が2以上6以下の直鎖もしくは分岐のアルキレンもしくはシクロアルキレンジオールから得られ、両末端がモノカルボン酸で封止されていないことが特徴である。 The compound represented by the above formula is obtained from a dicarboxylic acid having an aromatic ring (also referred to as an aromatic dicarboxylic acid) and a linear or branched alkylene or cycloalkylene diol having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, at both ends. Is not sealed with a monocarboxylic acid.
 炭素数6以上16以下の芳香族ジカルボン酸としては、フタル酸、イソフタル酸、テレフタル酸、1,5-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、1,4-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、1,8-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、2,3-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、2,6-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、2,8-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、2,2’-ビフェニルジカルボン酸、4,4’-ビフェニルジカルボン酸、等が挙げられる。その中でも好ましくは、フタル酸、テレフタル酸である。 Examples of the aromatic dicarboxylic acid having 6 to 16 carbon atoms include phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,4-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,8-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,3 -Naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,8-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 2,2'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid, 4,4'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid, and the like. Of these, phthalic acid and terephthalic acid are preferred.
 炭素数4以上12以下の芳香族ジカルボン酸としては、1,2-エタンジカルボン酸(コハク酸)、1,3-プロパンジカルボン酸(グルタル酸)、1,4-ブタンジカルボン酸(アジピン酸)、1,5-ペンタンジカルボン酸(ピメリン酸)、1,8-オクタンジカルボン酸(セバシン酸)などが挙げられ特にアジピン酸、コハク酸が好ましい。 Examples of the aromatic dicarboxylic acid having 4 to 12 carbon atoms include 1,2-ethanedicarboxylic acid (succinic acid), 1,3-propanedicarboxylic acid (glutaric acid), 1,4-butanedicarboxylic acid (adipic acid), Examples include 1,5-pentanedicarboxylic acid (pimelic acid) and 1,8-octanedicarboxylic acid (sebacic acid), and adipic acid and succinic acid are particularly preferable.
 また、ジカルボン酸は芳香族ジカルボン酸、脂肪族ジカルボン酸を混合することもフィルム強度向上の観点から好ましい。 In addition, it is also preferable from the viewpoint of improving film strength that the dicarboxylic acid is mixed with an aromatic dicarboxylic acid or an aliphatic dicarboxylic acid.
 炭素数が2以上6以下の直鎖もしくは分岐のアルキレンもしくはシクロアルキレンジオールとしては、エチレングリコール、1,2-プロパンジオール、1,3-プロパンジオール、1,2-ブタンジオール、1,3-ブタンジオール、2-メチル-1,3-プロパンジオール、1,4-ブタンジオール、1,5-ペンタンジオール、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジオール、1,6-ヘキサンジオール、1,4-シクロヘキサンジオール、1,4-シクロヘキサンジメタノール等が挙げられる。その中でも、好ましくはエタンジオール、1,2-プロパンジオール、1,3-プロパンジオール、1,3-ブタンジオールである。 Examples of the linear or branched alkylene or cycloalkylene diol having 2 to 6 carbon atoms include ethylene glycol, 1,2-propanediol, 1,3-propanediol, 1,2-butanediol, and 1,3-butane. Diol, 2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, 1,4-cyclohexane Examples thereof include diol and 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol. Of these, ethanediol, 1,2-propanediol, 1,3-propanediol, and 1,3-butanediol are preferable.
 中でも、Aが置換基を有していてもよいナフタレン環もしくはビフェニル環であることが本発明の効果を得る上で好ましい。ここで置換基とは、炭素数1以上6以下のアルキル基、アルケニル基、アルコキシル基である。 Among them, it is preferable for obtaining the effect of the present invention that A is a naphthalene ring or a biphenyl ring which may have a substituent. Here, the substituent is an alkyl group, alkenyl group, or alkoxyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
 上記ポリエステル化合物の水酸基価(OH価)としては、100mgKOH/g以上500mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、170mgKOH/g~400mgKOH/gであることがさらに好ましい。水酸基価がこの範囲にあると、セルロースエステルおよびセルロースエーテルとの相溶性が好適なものとなる。 The hydroxyl value (OH value) of the polyester compound is preferably 100 mgKOH / g or more and 500 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 170 mgKOH / g to 400 mgKOH / g. When the hydroxyl value is in this range, the compatibility with the cellulose ester and the cellulose ether becomes suitable.
 水酸基価が400mgKOH/g以下であると、ポリエステル化合物の疎水性が大きくなりすぎず、水酸基価が170mgKOH/g以上であると、ポリエステル化合物同士の分子間相互作用(水素結合等)が過度に強くならず、フィルム中での析出を防止できるためだと考えられる。 When the hydroxyl value is 400 mgKOH / g or less, the hydrophobicity of the polyester compound does not increase too much, and when the hydroxyl value is 170 mgKOH / g or more, the intermolecular interaction (hydrogen bond, etc.) between the polyester compounds is excessively strong. It is thought that this is because precipitation in the film can be prevented.
 また水酸基価の測定は、日本工業規格 JIS K1557-1:2007に記載の無水酢酸法等を適用できる。 In addition, for measurement of the hydroxyl value, the acetic anhydride method described in Japanese Industrial Standard JIS K1557-1: 2007 can be applied.
 上記ポリエステル化合物の数平均分子量(Mn)は、下記式から計算することができる。 The number average molecular weight (Mn) of the polyester compound can be calculated from the following formula.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000015
 上記ポリエステル化合物は、常法により上記ジカルボン酸とジオールとのポリエステル化反応またはエステル交換反応による熱溶融縮合法か、あるいはこれら酸の酸クロライドとグリコール類との界面縮合法のいずれかの方法によっても容易に合成できる。 The polyester compound can be obtained by a conventional method such as a hot melt condensation method using a polyesterification reaction or a transesterification reaction between the dicarboxylic acid and a diol, or an interfacial condensation method between an acid chloride of these acids and a glycol. Easy to synthesize.
 以下に、上記のポリエステル化合物を例示する。 The following are examples of the above polyester compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 好ましくは、下記一般式(FB-2)で表されるポリエステル系可塑剤を用いることが、透湿性の制御とセルロースエステルとの相溶性を高度に両立する観点から好ましい。 Preferably, it is preferable to use a polyester plasticizer represented by the following general formula (FB-2) from the viewpoint of high compatibility between moisture permeability control and compatibility with cellulose ester.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 上記一般式(FB-2)中、Bはヒドロキシ基またはカルボン酸残基を表し、Gは炭素数2~18のアルキレングリコール残基または炭素数6~12のアリールグリコール残基または炭素数が4~12のオキシアルキレングリコール残基を表し、Aは炭素数4~12のアルキレンジカルボン酸残基または炭素数6~12のアリールジカルボン酸残基を表し、nは1以上の整数を表す。 In the general formula (FB-2), B represents a hydroxy group or a carboxylic acid residue, G represents an alkylene glycol residue having 2 to 18 carbon atoms, an aryl glycol residue having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or 4 carbon atoms. Represents an oxyalkylene glycol residue having ˜12, A represents an alkylene dicarboxylic acid residue having 4 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl dicarboxylic acid residue having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, and n represents an integer of 1 or more.
 一般式(FB-2)中、Bで示されるヒドロキシ基またはカルボン酸残基と、Gで示されるアルキレングリコール残基またはオキシアルキレングリコール残基またはアリールグリコール残基、Aで示されるアルキレンジカルボン酸残基またはアリールジカルボン酸残基とから構成されるものであり、通常のエステル系化合物と同様の反応により得られる。 In the general formula (FB-2), a hydroxy group or carboxylic acid residue represented by B, an alkylene glycol residue, an oxyalkylene glycol residue or an aryl glycol residue represented by G, and an alkylene dicarboxylic acid residue represented by A It is composed of a group or an aryl dicarboxylic acid residue, and can be obtained by a reaction similar to that of a normal ester compound.
 一般式(FB-2)で表されるポリエステル系化合物のカルボン酸成分としては、例えば、酢酸、プロピオン酸、酪酸、安息香酸、パラターシャリブチル安息香酸、オルソトルイル酸、メタトルイル酸、パラトルイル酸、ジメチル安息香酸、エチル安息香酸、ノルマルプロピル安息香酸、アミノ安息香酸、アセトキシ安息香酸、脂肪族酸等があり、これらはそれぞれ1種または2種以上の混合物として使用することができる。 Examples of the carboxylic acid component of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, benzoic acid, p-tert-butylbenzoic acid, orthotoluic acid, metatoluic acid, p-toluic acid, and dimethyl. There are benzoic acid, ethyl benzoic acid, normal propyl benzoic acid, aminobenzoic acid, acetoxybenzoic acid, aliphatic acid and the like, and these can be used as one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds, respectively.
 一般式(FB-2)で表されるポリエステル系化合物の炭素数2~18のアルキレングリコール成分としては、エチレングリコール、1,2-プロピレングリコール、1,3-プロピレングリコール、1,2-ブタンジオール、1,3-ブタンジオール、1,2-プロパンジオール、2-メチル-1,3-プロパンジオール、1,4-ブタンジオール、1,5-ペンタンジオール、2,2-ジメチル-1,3-プロパンジオール(ネオペンチルグリコール)、2,2-ジエチル-1,3-プロパンジオール(3,3-ジメチロールペンタン)、2-n-ブチル-2-エチル-1,3-プロパンジオール(3,3-ジメチロールヘプタン)、3-メチル-1,5-ペンタンジオール1,6-ヘキサンジオール、2,2,4-トリメチル-1,3-ペンタンジオール、2-エチル-1,3-ヘキサンジオール、2-メチル-1,8-オクタンジオール、1,9-ノナンジオール、1,10-デカンジオール、1,12-オクタデカンジオール等があり、これらのグリコールは、1種または2種以上の混合物として使用される。 Examples of the alkylene glycol component having 2 to 18 carbon atoms of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include ethylene glycol, 1,2-propylene glycol, 1,3-propylene glycol, and 1,2-butanediol. 1,3-butanediol, 1,2-propanediol, 2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, 2,2-dimethyl-1,3- Propanediol (neopentyl glycol), 2,2-diethyl-1,3-propanediol (3,3-dimethylolpentane), 2-n-butyl-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol (3,3 -Dimethylolheptane), 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol 1,6-hexanediol, 2,2,4-trimethyl-1, -Pentanediol, 2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol, 2-methyl-1,8-octanediol, 1,9-nonanediol, 1,10-decanediol, 1,12-octadecanediol, etc. These glycols are used as one or a mixture of two or more.
 特に炭素数2~12のアルキレングリコールがセルロースエステル樹脂との相溶性に優れているため、特に好ましい。より好ましくは炭素数2~6のアルキレングリコールであり、さらに好ましくは炭素数2~4のアルキレングリコールである。 Particularly, an alkylene glycol having 2 to 12 carbon atoms is particularly preferable because of excellent compatibility with the cellulose ester resin. More preferred are alkylene glycols having 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and still more preferred are alkylene glycols having 2 to 4 carbon atoms.
 一般式(FB-2)で表されるポリエステル系可塑剤の炭素数6~12のアリールグリコールとしては、例えば、1,4-シクロヘキサンジオール、1,4-シクロヘキサンジメタノール、シクロヘキサンジエタノール、1,4-ベンゼンジメタノール等の環状グリコール類があり、これらのグリコールは、一種または二種以上の混合物として使用できる。 Examples of the aryl glycol having 6 to 12 carbon atoms of the polyester plasticizer represented by the general formula (FB-2) include 1,4-cyclohexanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, cyclohexanediethanol, 1,4 -There are cyclic glycols such as benzenedimethanol, and these glycols can be used as one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
 また、上記一般式(FB-2)で表されるポリエステル系化合物の炭素数4~12のオキシアルキレングリコール成分としては、例えば、ジエチレングリコール、トリエチレングリコール、テトラエチレングリコール、ジプロピレングリコール、トリプロピレングリコール等があり、これらのグリコールは、1種または2種以上の混合物として使用できる。 Examples of the oxyalkylene glycol component having 4 to 12 carbon atoms of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, and tripropylene glycol. These glycols can be used as one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
 一般式(FB-2)で表されるポリエステル系化合物の炭素数4~12のアルキレンジカルボン酸成分としては、例えば、コハク酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、グルタル酸、アジピン酸、アゼライン酸、セバシン酸、ドデカンジカルボン酸等があり、これらは、それぞれ1種または2種以上の混合物として使用される。 Examples of the alkylene dicarboxylic acid component having 4 to 12 carbon atoms of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, azelaic acid, and sebacic acid. , Dodecanedicarboxylic acid and the like, and these are used as one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds, respectively.
 一般式(FB-2)で表されるポリエステル系化合物の炭素数6~12のアリールジカルボン酸成分としては、フタル酸、テレフタル酸、イソフタル酸、1,5-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、1,4-ナフタレンジカルボン酸等がある。 Examples of the aryl dicarboxylic acid component having 6 to 12 carbon atoms of the polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) include phthalic acid, terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid, 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, and 1,4-naphthalene. There are dicarboxylic acids and the like.
 一般式(FB-2)で表されるポリエステル系化合物は、重量平均分子量が、好ましくは300~3000、より好ましくは350~1500の範囲が好適である。また、その酸価は、0.5mgKOH/g以下、ヒドロキシ基(水酸基)価は25mgKOH/g以下、より好ましくは酸価0.3mgKOH/g以下、ヒドロキシ基(水酸基)価は15mgKOH/g以下のものである。 The polyester compound represented by the general formula (FB-2) has a weight average molecular weight of preferably 300 to 3000, more preferably 350 to 1500. The acid value is 0.5 mgKOH / g or less, the hydroxy group (hydroxyl group) value is 25 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably the acid value is 0.3 mgKOH / g or less, and the hydroxy group (hydroxyl group) value is 15 mgKOH / g or less. Is.
 ポリエステル系可塑剤の重量平均分子量は、下記の測定条件によるゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)を用いた測定により算出する。 The weight average molecular weight of the polyester plasticizer is calculated by measurement using gel permeation chromatography (GPC) under the following measurement conditions.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 以下に、本発明に用いることのできる一般式(FB-2)で表されるポリエステル系化合物の具体的化合物を示すが、本発明はこれに限定されない。また、下記実施例において、ポリエステル系化合物を下記記号にて規定する。 Hereinafter, specific compounds of the polyester compound represented by Formula (FB-2) that can be used in the present invention will be shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the following Examples, polyester compounds are defined by the following symbols.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 ポリエステル系可塑剤の粘度は、分子構造や分子量にもよるが、アジピン酸系可塑剤の場合、セルロースエステルとの相溶性が高く、かつ可塑性を付与する効果が高いこと等から、200~5000mPa・s(25℃)の範囲であることが好ましい。ポリエステル系可塑剤は、一種類であっても、二種類以上を併用してもよい。 The viscosity of the polyester plasticizer depends on the molecular structure and molecular weight, but in the case of an adipic acid plasticizer, it has a high compatibility with the cellulose ester and has a high effect of imparting plasticity. It is preferably in the range of s (25 ° C.). One type of polyester plasticizer may be used, or two or more types may be used in combination.
 多価アルコールエステル系可塑剤は、2価以上の脂肪族多価アルコールと、モノカルボン酸とのエステル化合物(アルコールエステル)であり、好ましくは2~20価の脂肪族多価アルコールエステルである。多価アルコールエステル系化合物は、分子内に芳香環又はシクロアルキル環を有することが好ましい。 The polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer is an ester compound (alcohol ester) of a dihydric or higher aliphatic polyhydric alcohol and a monocarboxylic acid, preferably a divalent to 20-valent aliphatic polyhydric alcohol ester. The polyhydric alcohol ester compound preferably has an aromatic ring or a cycloalkyl ring in the molecule.
 アクリル系化合物としては、特に制限されるものではないが、(メタ)アクリル酸、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル、(メタ)アクリルアミド類、および(メタ)アクリロニトリルよりなる群から選択されるいずれか少なくとも1種のアクリル系モノマー由来の繰り返し単位を有する重合体が挙げられる。これらのアクリル系化合物は、フィルムの耐水性を向上できる。 The acrylic compound is not particularly limited, but at least one selected from the group consisting of (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, (meth) acrylamides, and (meth) acrylonitrile. Examples thereof include a polymer having a repeating unit derived from a certain acrylic monomer. These acrylic compounds can improve the water resistance of the film.
 中でも、アクリル系化合物としては、メチルメタクリレート単位が50~99質量%およびこれと共重合可能な他の単量体単位の総量が1~50質量%からなるものが好ましい。 Among them, the acrylic compound is preferably one in which the methyl methacrylate unit is 50 to 99% by mass and the total amount of other monomer units copolymerizable therewith is 1 to 50% by mass.
 共重合可能な他の単量体としては、アルキル基の炭素数が2~18のアルキルメタクリレート;アルキル基の炭素数が1~18のアルキルアクリレート;アクリロイルモルホリンやN,N-ジメチルアクリルアミドなどのアミド基を有するビニルモノマー;エステル部分に炭素数5~22の脂環式炭化水素基を有するメタクリル酸エステルまたはアクリル酸エステル;アクリル酸、メタクリル酸等のα,β-不飽和カルボン酸;マレイン酸、フマル酸、イタコン酸等の不飽和基含有二価カルボン酸;スチレン、α-メチルスチレン等の芳香族ビニル化合物;アクリロニトリル、メタクリロニトリル等のα,β-不飽和ニトリル;無水マレイン酸、マレイミド、N-置換マレイミド、無水グルタル酸、等が挙げられ、これらは単独で、あるいは2種以上の単量体を併用して用いることができる。 Examples of other copolymerizable monomers include alkyl methacrylates having an alkyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms; alkyl acrylates having an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms; amides such as acryloylmorpholine and N, N-dimethylacrylamide A vinyl monomer having a group; a methacrylic acid ester or an acrylic acid ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 22 carbon atoms in the ester moiety; an α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acid such as acrylic acid or methacrylic acid; Unsaturated group-containing divalent carboxylic acids such as fumaric acid and itaconic acid; aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene and α-methylstyrene; α, β-unsaturated nitriles such as acrylonitrile and methacrylonitrile; maleic anhydride, maleimide, N-substituted maleimide, glutaric anhydride, and the like. Two or more kinds of monomers can be used in combination.
 また、本発明に用いられるアクリル系化合物としては、環構造を有してもよく、具体的には、ラクトン環構造、無水グルタル酸構造、グルタルイミド構造、N-置換マレイミド構造および無水マレイン酸構造、ピラン環構造が挙げられる。 The acrylic compound used in the present invention may have a ring structure, specifically, a lactone ring structure, a glutaric anhydride structure, a glutarimide structure, an N-substituted maleimide structure and a maleic anhydride structure. And a pyran ring structure.
 これらの中でも、共重合可能な他の単量体は、共重合体の耐熱分解性や流動性の観点から、アルキル基の炭素数が1~18のアルキルアクリレート、アクリロイルモルホリンやジメチルアクリルアミドなどのアミド基を有するビニルモノマー、エステル部分に炭素数5~22の脂環式炭化水素基を有するメタクリル酸エステルまたはアクリル酸エステル、N-置換マレイミド構造、ピラン環構造等が好ましい。 Among these, other monomers that can be copolymerized include alkyl acrylates having 1 to 18 carbon atoms in the alkyl group, amides such as acryloylmorpholine and dimethylacrylamide, from the viewpoint of thermal decomposition resistance and fluidity of the copolymer. Preferred are a vinyl monomer having a group, a methacrylic acid ester or an acrylate ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 22 carbon atoms in the ester portion, an N-substituted maleimide structure, a pyran ring structure and the like.
 アルキル基の炭素数が1~18のアルキルアクリレートの具体例としては、メチルアクリレート、エチルアクリレート、n-プロピルアクリレート、n-ブチルアクリレート、s-ブチルアクリレート、2-エチルヘキシルアクリレートなどが挙げられ、好ましくは、メチルアクリレートが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the alkyl acrylate having 1 to 18 carbon atoms in the alkyl group include methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, n-propyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, s-butyl acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl acrylate. And methyl acrylate.
 アミド基を有するビニルモノマーの具体例としては、アクリルアミド、N-メチルアクリルアミド、N-ブチルアクリルアミド、N,N-ジメチルアクリルアミド、N,N-ジエチルアクリルアミド、アクリロイルモルホリン、N-ヒドロキシエチルアクリルアミド、アクリロイルピロリジン、アクリロイルピペリジン、メタクリルアミド、N-メチルメタクリルアミド、N-ブチルメタクリルアミド、N,N-ジメチルメタクリルアミド、N,N-ジエチルメタクリルアミド、メタクリロイルモルホリン、N-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリルアミド、メタクリロイルピロリジン、メタクリロイルピペリジン、N-ビニルホルムアミド、N-ビニルアセトアミド、ビニルピロリドン等が挙げられる。好ましくは、アクリロイルモルホリン、N,N-ジメチルアクリルアミド、N-ブチルアクリルアミド、ビニルピロリドン、2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレートが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the vinyl monomer having an amide group include acrylamide, N-methylacrylamide, N-butylacrylamide, N, N-dimethylacrylamide, N, N-diethylacrylamide, acryloylmorpholine, N-hydroxyethylacrylamide, acryloylpyrrolidine, Acryloylpiperidine, methacrylamide, N-methylmethacrylamide, N-butylmethacrylamide, N, N-dimethylmethacrylamide, N, N-diethylmethacrylamide, methacryloylmorpholine, N-hydroxyethylmethacrylamide, methacryloylpyrrolidine, methacryloylpiperidine, N-vinylformamide, N-vinylacetamide, vinylpyrrolidone and the like can be mentioned. Preferably, acryloylmorpholine, N, N-dimethylacrylamide, N-butylacrylamide, vinylpyrrolidone, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate are used.
 エステル部分に炭素数5~22の脂環式炭化水素基を有するメタクリル酸エステルまたはアクリル酸エステルの具体例としては、例えば、アクリル酸シクロペンチル、アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、アクリル酸メチルシクロヘキシル、アクリル酸トリメチルシクロヘキシル、アクリル酸ノルボルニル、アクリル酸ノルボルニルメチル、アクリル酸シアノノルボルニル、アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリル酸ボルニル、アクリル酸メンチル、アクリル酸フェンチル、アクリル酸アダマンチル、アクリル酸ジメチルアダマンチル、アクリル酸トリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカ-8-イル、アクリル酸トリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカ-4-メチル、アクリル酸シクロデシル、メタクリル酸シクロペンチル、メタクリル酸シクロヘキシル、メタクリル酸メチルシクロヘキシル、メタクリル酸トリメチルシクロヘキシル、メタクリル酸ノルボルニル、メタクリル酸ノルボルニルメチル、メタクリル酸シアノノルボルニル、メタクリル酸フェニルノルボルニル、メタクリル酸イソボルニル、メタクリル酸ボルニル、メタクリル酸メンチル、メタクリル酸フェンチル、メタクリル酸アダマンチル、メタクリル酸ジメチルアダマンチル、メタクリル酸トリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカ-8-イル、メタクリル酸トリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカ-4-メチル、メタクリル酸シクロデシル、メタクリル酸ジシクロペンタニル等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the methacrylic acid ester or acrylate ester having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 22 carbon atoms in the ester moiety include, for example, cyclopentyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, methyl cyclohexyl acrylate, trimethylcyclohexyl acrylate, Norbornyl acrylate, norbornyl acrylate, cyano norbornyl acrylate, isobornyl acrylate, bornyl acrylate, menthyl acrylate, fentyl acrylate, adamantyl acrylate, dimethyladamantyl acrylate, tricycloacrylate [5.2 .1.0 2,6 ] dec-8-yl, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] dec-4-methyl acrylate, cyclodecyl acrylate, cyclopentyl methacrylate, cyclohexane methacrylate Xylyl, methyl cyclohexyl methacrylate, trimethyl cyclohexyl methacrylate, norbornyl methacrylate, norbornyl methyl methacrylate, cyano norbornyl methacrylate, phenyl norbornyl methacrylate, isobornyl methacrylate, bornyl methacrylate, menthyl methacrylate, methacryl Fentyl acid, adamantyl methacrylate, dimethyladamantyl methacrylate, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] dec-8-yl methacrylate, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decyl methacrylate 4-methyl, cyclodecyl methacrylate, dicyclopentanyl methacrylate and the like.
 好ましくは、メタクリル酸イソボルニル、メタクリル酸ジシクロペンタニル、メタクリル酸ジメチルアダマンチルなどが挙げられる。 Preferably, isobornyl methacrylate, dicyclopentanyl methacrylate, dimethyladamantyl methacrylate and the like can be mentioned.
 N-置換マレイミドとしては、例えば、N-メチルマレイミド、N-エチルマレイミド、N-プロピルマレイミド、N-i-プロピルマレイミド、N-ブチルマレイミド、N-i-ブチルマレイミド、N-t-ブチルマレイミド、N-ラウリルマレイミド、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド、N-ベンジルマレイミド、N-フェニルマレイミド、N-(2-クロロフェニル)マレイミド、N-(4-クロロフェニル)マレイミド、N-(4-ブロモフェニル)フェニルマレイミド、N-(2-メチルフェニル)マレイミド、N-(2-エチルフェニルマレイミド、N-(2-メトキシフェニル)マレイミド、N-(2,4,6-トリメチルフェニル)マレイミド、N-(4-ベンジルフェニル)マレイミド、N-(2,4,6-トリブロモフェニル)マレイミド等が挙げられる。好ましくは、N-メチルマレイミド、N-シクロヘキシルマレイミド、N-フェニルマレイミドなどが挙げられる。 Examples of the N-substituted maleimide include N-methylmaleimide, N-ethylmaleimide, N-propylmaleimide, Ni-propylmaleimide, N-butylmaleimide, Ni-butylmaleimide, Nt-butylmaleimide, N-laurylmaleimide, N-cyclohexylmaleimide, N-benzylmaleimide, N-phenylmaleimide, N- (2-chlorophenyl) maleimide, N- (4-chlorophenyl) maleimide, N- (4-bromophenyl) phenylmaleimide, N -(2-methylphenyl) maleimide, N- (2-ethylphenylmaleimide), N- (2-methoxyphenyl) maleimide, N- (2,4,6-trimethylphenyl) maleimide, N- (4-benzylphenyl) Maleimide, N- (2,4,6-tribromoph Yl) maleimide and the like. Preferably, N- methyl maleimide, N- cyclohexyl maleimide, etc. N- phenyl maleimide.
 これらのモノマーは市販のものをそのまま使用することができる。 These monomers are commercially available.
 アクリル系化合物は、透湿性の制御とセルロースエステルとの相溶性を両立する観点から、重量平均分子量(Mw)が15000以下の範囲であることが好ましく、10000以下の範囲内であることがより好ましく、さらに好ましくは、5000~10000の範囲内である。なお、本発明に係るアクリル系化合物の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、下記の測定条件によるゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)を用いた測定により算出する。 The acrylic compound preferably has a weight average molecular weight (Mw) in the range of 15000 or less, more preferably in the range of 10,000 or less, from the viewpoint of achieving both moisture permeability control and compatibility with the cellulose ester. More preferably, it is in the range of 5000 to 10,000. In addition, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic compound according to the present invention is calculated by measurement using gel permeation chromatography (GPC) under the following measurement conditions.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 脂肪族多価アルコールの例には、エチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、トリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール等が含まれる。 Examples of the aliphatic polyhydric alcohol include ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, trimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol and the like.
 モノカルボン酸は、脂肪族モノカルボン酸、脂環式モノカルボン酸、芳香族モノカルボン酸等であり得る。モノカルボン酸は、一種類であってもよいし、二種以上の混合物であってもよい。また、脂肪族多価アルコールに含まれるOH基の全部をエステル化してもよいし、一部をOH基のままで残してもよい。 The monocarboxylic acid can be an aliphatic monocarboxylic acid, an alicyclic monocarboxylic acid, an aromatic monocarboxylic acid, or the like. One kind of monocarboxylic acid may be used, or a mixture of two or more kinds may be used. Further, all of the OH groups contained in the aliphatic polyhydric alcohol may be esterified, or a part of the OH groups may be left as they are.
 脂肪族モノカルボン酸は、炭素数1~32の直鎖または側鎖を有する脂肪酸であることが好ましい。脂肪族モノカルボン酸の炭素数はより好ましくは1~20であり、さらに好ましくは1~10である。そのような脂肪族モノカルボン酸の例には、酢酸、プロピオン酸、酪酸、吉草酸等が含まれ、セルロースエステルとの相溶性を高めるためには、好ましくは酢酸であり得る。 The aliphatic monocarboxylic acid is preferably a fatty acid having a straight chain or a side chain having 1 to 32 carbon atoms. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic monocarboxylic acid is more preferably 1-20, and still more preferably 1-10. Examples of such aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, and the like, and acetic acid may be preferable in order to enhance compatibility with the cellulose ester.
 脂環式モノカルボン酸の例には、シクロペンタンカルボン酸、シクロヘキサンカルボン酸、シクロオクタンカルボン酸等が含まれる。 Examples of the alicyclic monocarboxylic acid include cyclopentane carboxylic acid, cyclohexane carboxylic acid, cyclooctane carboxylic acid and the like.
 芳香族モノカルボン酸の例には、安息香酸;安息香酸のベンゼン環にアルキル基またはアルコキシ基(例えばメトキシ基やエトキシ基)を1~3個を導入したもの(例えばトルイル酸等);ベンゼン環を2個以上有する芳香族モノカルボン酸(例えばビフェニルカルボン酸、ナフタリンカルボン酸、テトラリンカルボン酸等)が含まれ、好ましくは安息香酸である。 Examples of aromatic monocarboxylic acids include benzoic acid; one having 1 to 3 alkyl groups or alkoxy groups (for example, methoxy group or ethoxy group) introduced into the benzene ring of benzoic acid (for example, toluic acid); benzene ring Aromatic monocarboxylic acids having two or more (for example, biphenyl carboxylic acid, naphthalene carboxylic acid, tetralin carboxylic acid, etc.) are included, and benzoic acid is preferred.
 多価アルコールエステル系可塑剤の分子量は、特に制限されないが、300~1500の範囲内であることが好ましく、350~750の範囲内であることがより好ましい。揮発し難くするためには、分子量が大きい方が好ましい。透湿性を高め、セルロースエステルとの相溶性を高めるためには、分子量が小さい方が好ましい。 The molecular weight of the polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 300 to 1500, and more preferably in the range of 350 to 750. In order to make it hard to volatilize, the one where molecular weight is larger is preferable. In order to improve moisture permeability and compatibility with the cellulose ester, a smaller molecular weight is preferable.
 多価アルコールエステル系可塑剤の具体例には、トリメチロールプロパントリアセテート、トリメチロールプロパン安息香酸エステル、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアセテート、特開2008-88292号公報に記載の一般式(I)で表されるエステル化合物(A)等が含まれる。 Specific examples of the polyhydric alcohol ester plasticizer include trimethylolpropane triacetate, trimethylolpropane benzoate, pentaerythritol tetraacetate, and an ester represented by the general formula (I) described in JP-A-2008-88292. Compound (A) and the like are included.
 多価カルボン酸エステル系可塑剤は、2価以上、好ましくは2~20価の多価カルボン酸と、アルコール化合物とのエステル化合物である。多価カルボン酸は、2~20価の脂肪族多価カルボン酸、3~20価の芳香族多価カルボン酸または3~20価の脂環式多価カルボン酸であることが好ましい。 The polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer is an ester compound of a divalent or higher, preferably 2 to 20 valent polycarboxylic acid and an alcohol compound. The polyvalent carboxylic acid is preferably a 2-20 valent aliphatic polyvalent carboxylic acid, a 3-20 valent aromatic polyvalent carboxylic acid, or a 3-20 valent alicyclic polyvalent carboxylic acid.
 多価カルボン酸の例には、トリメリット酸、トリメシン酸、ピロメリット酸のような3価以上の芳香族多価カルボン酸またはその誘導体;コハク酸、アジピン酸、アゼライン酸、セバシン酸、シュウ酸、フマル酸、マレイン酸、テトラヒドロフタル酸のような脂肪族多価カルボン酸;酒石酸、タルトロン酸、リンゴ酸、クエン酸のようなオキシ多価カルボン酸等が含まれ、フィルムからの揮発を抑制するためには、オキシ多価カルボン酸が好ましい。 Examples of polyvalent carboxylic acids include trivalent or higher aromatic polyvalent carboxylic acids such as trimellitic acid, trimesic acid, pyromellitic acid or derivatives thereof; succinic acid, adipic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, oxalic acid Contains aliphatic polycarboxylic acids such as fumaric acid, maleic acid and tetrahydrophthalic acid; oxypolycarboxylic acids such as tartaric acid, tartronic acid, malic acid and citric acid, etc., and suppresses volatilization from the film. For this, oxypolycarboxylic acids are preferred.
 アルコール化合物の例には、直鎖若しくは側鎖を有する脂肪族飽和アルコール化合物、直鎖若しくは側鎖を有する脂肪族不飽和アルコール化合物、脂環式アルコール化合物または芳香族アルコール化合物等が含まれる。脂肪族飽和アルコール化合物または脂肪族不飽和アルコール化合物の炭素数は、好ましくは1~32であり、より好ましくは1~20であり、さらに好ましくは1~10である。脂環式アルコール化合物の例には、シクロペンタノール、シクロヘキサノール等が含まれる。芳香族アルコール化合物の例には、フェノール、パラクレゾール、ジメチルフェノール、ベンジルアルコール、シンナミルアルコール等が含まれる。アルコール化合物は、一種類でもよいし、二種以上の混合物であってもよい。 Examples of the alcohol compound include an aliphatic saturated alcohol compound having a straight chain or a side chain, an aliphatic unsaturated alcohol compound having a straight chain or a side chain, an alicyclic alcohol compound, or an aromatic alcohol compound. The carbon number of the aliphatic saturated alcohol compound or the aliphatic unsaturated alcohol compound is preferably 1 to 32, more preferably 1 to 20, and still more preferably 1 to 10. Examples of the alicyclic alcohol compound include cyclopentanol, cyclohexanol and the like. Examples of the aromatic alcohol compound include phenol, paracresol, dimethylphenol, benzyl alcohol, cinnamyl alcohol and the like. The alcohol compound may be one kind or a mixture of two or more kinds.
 多価カルボン酸エステル系可塑剤の分子量は、特に制限はないが、300~1000の範囲内であることが好ましく、350~750の範囲内であることがより好ましい。多価カルボン酸エステル系可塑剤の分子量は、ブリードアウトを抑制する観点では、大きい方が好ましい。透湿性やセルロースエステルとの相溶性の観点では、小さい方が好ましい。 The molecular weight of the polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 300 to 1000, and more preferably in the range of 350 to 750. A larger molecular weight of the polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing bleeding out. From the viewpoint of moisture permeability and compatibility with cellulose ester, a smaller one is preferable.
 多価カルボン酸エステル系可塑剤の酸価は、1mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、0.2mgKOH/g以下であることがさらに好ましい。酸価とは、試料1g中に含まれる酸(試料中に存在するカルボキシ基)を中和するために必要な水酸化カリウムのミリグラム数をいう。酸価は、JIS K0070(1992年)に準拠して測定したものである。 The acid value of the polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer is preferably 1 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 0.2 mgKOH / g or less. The acid value refers to the number of milligrams of potassium hydroxide necessary for neutralizing the acid (carboxy group present in the sample) contained in 1 g of the sample. The acid value is measured according to JIS K0070 (1992).
 多価カルボン酸エステル系可塑剤の例には、特開2008-88292号公報に記載の一般式(II)で表されるエステル化合物(B)等が含まれる。 Examples of the polyvalent carboxylic acid ester plasticizer include an ester compound (B) represented by the general formula (II) described in JP-A-2008-88292.
 多価カルボン酸エステル系可塑剤は、フタル酸エステル系可塑剤であってもよい。フタル酸エステル系可塑剤の例には、ジエチルフタレート、ジメトキシエチルフタレート、ジメチルフタレート、ジオクチルフタレート、ジブチルフタレート、ジ-2-エチルヘキシルフタレート、ジシクロヘキシルフタレート、ジシクロヘキシルテレフタレート等が含まれる。 The polycarboxylic acid ester plasticizer may be a phthalate ester plasticizer. Examples of the phthalate ester plasticizer include diethyl phthalate, dimethoxyethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate, dicyclohexyl phthalate, dicyclohexyl terephthalate and the like.
 グリコレート系可塑剤の例には、アルキルフタリルアルキルグリコレート類が含まれる。アルキルフタリルアルキルグリコレート類の例には、メチルフタリルメチルグリコレート、エチルフタリルエチルグリコレート、プロピルフタリルプロピルグリコレート、ブチルフタリルブチルグリコレート、オクチルフタリルオクチルグリコレート等が含まれる。 Examples of glycolate plasticizers include alkylphthalyl alkyl glycolates. Examples of alkyl phthalyl alkyl glycolates include methyl phthalyl methyl glycolate, ethyl phthalyl ethyl glycolate, propyl phthalyl propyl glycolate, butyl phthalyl butyl glycolate, octyl phthalyl octyl glycolate and the like. .
 エステル系可塑剤には、脂肪酸エステル系可塑剤、クエン酸エステル系可塑剤、リン酸エステル系可塑剤、トリメリット酸系可塑剤等が含まれる。 The ester plasticizer includes a fatty acid ester plasticizer, a citrate ester plasticizer, a phosphate ester plasticizer, a trimellitic acid plasticizer, and the like.
 脂肪酸エステル系可塑剤の例には、オレイン酸ブチル、リシノール酸メチルアセチル、セバシン酸ジブチル等が含まれる。クエン酸エステル系可塑剤の例には、クエン酸アセチルトリメチル、クエン酸アセチルトリエチル、クエン酸アセチルトリブチル等が含まれる。リン酸エステル系可塑剤の例には、トリフェニルホスフェート、トリクレジルホスフェート、クレジルジフェニルホスフェート、オクチルジフェニルホスフェート、ジフェニルビフェニルホスフェート(BDP)、トリオクチルホスフェート、トリブチルホスフェート等が含まれる。トリメリット酸系可塑剤の例には、トリメリット酸オクチル、トリメリット酸n-オクチル、トリメリット酸イソデシル、トリメリット酸イソノニル等が含まれる。 Examples of the fatty acid ester plasticizer include butyl oleate, methylacetyl ricinoleate, dibutyl sebacate and the like. Examples of the citrate plasticizer include acetyl trimethyl citrate, acetyl triethyl citrate, acetyl tributyl citrate and the like. Examples of the phosphate ester plasticizer include triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, cresyl diphenyl phosphate, octyl diphenyl phosphate, diphenyl biphenyl phosphate (BDP), trioctyl phosphate, tributyl phosphate and the like. Examples of trimellitic acid plasticizers include octyl trimellitic acid, n-octyl trimellitic acid, isodecyl trimellitic acid, and isononyl trimellitic acid.
 スチレン系化合物(スチレン系可塑剤)は、は、スチレン系モノマーの単独重合体であってもよいし、スチレン系モノマーとそれ以外の共重合モノマーとの共重合体であってもよい。スチレン系化合物におけるスチレン系モノマー由来の構成単位の含有割合は、分子構造が一定以上の嵩高さを有するためには、好ましくは30~100モル%、より好ましくは50~100モル%でありうる。 The styrene compound (styrene plasticizer) may be a homopolymer of a styrene monomer or a copolymer of a styrene monomer and another copolymer monomer. The content of the structural unit derived from the styrenic monomer in the styrenic compound may be preferably 30 to 100 mol%, more preferably 50 to 100 mol%, in order for the molecular structure to have a certain bulkiness.
 スチレン系モノマーは、下記式(A)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 The styrene monomer is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 式(A)中のR101~R103は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子または炭素数1~30のアルキル基またはアリール基を示す。R104は、水素原子、炭素数1~30のアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、アリール基、炭素数1~30のアルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、炭素数2~30のアルキルオキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、炭素数2~30のアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、アリールカルボニルオキシ基、水酸基、カルボキシル基、シアノ基、アミノ基、アミド基、ニトロ基を示す。これらの基は、それぞれ置換基(例えば水酸基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基など)をさらに有してもよい。R104は、それぞれ同一であっても、異なってもよく、互いに結合して環を形成してもよい。 R 101 to R 103 in the formula (A) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or an aryl group. R 104 is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, an aryloxycarbonyl Group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylcarbonyloxy group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an amino group, an amide group, and a nitro group. Each of these groups may further have a substituent (for example, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, etc.). R 104 may be the same as or different from each other, and may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
 スチレン系モノマーの例には、スチレン;α-メチルスチレン、β-メチルスチレン、p-メチルスチレンなどのアルキル置換スチレン類;4-クロロスチレン、4-ブロモスチレンなどのハロゲン置換スチレン類;p-ヒドロキシスチレン、α-メチル-p-ヒドロキシスチレン、2-メチル-4-ヒドロキシスチレン、3,4-ジヒドロキシスチレンなどのヒドロキシスチレン類;ビニルベンジルアルコール類;p-メトキシスチレン、p-tert-ブトキシスチレン、m-tert-ブトキシスチレンなどのアルコキシ置換スチレン類;3-ビニル安息香酸、4-ビニル安息香酸などのビニル安息香酸類;4-ビニルベンジルアセテート;4-アセトキシスチレン;2-ブチルアミドスチレン、4-メチルアミドスチレン、p-スルホンアミドスチレンなどのアミドスチレン類;3-アミノスチレン、4-アミノスチレン、2-イソプロペニルアニリン、ビニルベンジルジメチルアミンなどのアミノスチレン類;3-ニトロスチレン、4-ニトロスチレンなどのニトロスチレン類;3-シアノスチレン、4-シアノスチレンなどのシアノスチレン類;ビニルフェニルアセトニトリル;フェニルスチレンなどのアリールスチレン類、インデン類などが含まれる。スチレン系モノマーは、一種類であっても、二種類以上を組み合わせてもよい。 Examples of styrenic monomers include styrene; alkyl-substituted styrenes such as α-methylstyrene, β-methylstyrene, and p-methylstyrene; halogen-substituted styrenes such as 4-chlorostyrene and 4-bromostyrene; p-hydroxy Hydroxystyrenes such as styrene, α-methyl-p-hydroxystyrene, 2-methyl-4-hydroxystyrene, 3,4-dihydroxystyrene; vinylbenzyl alcohols; p-methoxystyrene, p-tert-butoxystyrene, m Alkoxy substituted styrenes such as tert-butoxystyrene; vinyl benzoic acids such as 3-vinylbenzoic acid and 4-vinylbenzoic acid; 4-vinylbenzyl acetate; 4-acetoxystyrene; 2-butylamidostyrene, 4-methylamide Styrene, p-sul Amidostyrenes such as N-amidostyrene; Aminostyrenes such as 3-aminostyrene, 4-aminostyrene, 2-isopropenylaniline and vinylbenzyldimethylamine; Nitrostyrenes such as 3-nitrostyrene and 4-nitrostyrene; Examples include cyanostyrenes such as 3-cyanostyrene and 4-cyanostyrene; vinylphenylacetonitrile; arylstyrenes such as phenylstyrene, and indenes. The styrenic monomer may be one kind or a combination of two or more kinds.
 スチレン系モノマーと組み合わされる共重合モノマーは、下記式(B)で表される(メタ)アクリル酸エステル化合物、無水マレイン酸、無水シトラコン酸、シス-1-シクロヘキセン-1,2-無水ジカルボン酸、3-メチル-シス-1-シクロヘキセン-1,2-無水ジカルボン酸、4-メチル-シス-1-シクロヘキセン-1,2-無水ジカルボン酸等の酸無水物、アクリロニトリル、メタクリロニトリルなどのニトリル基含有ラジカル重合性単量体;アクリルアミド、メタクリルアミド、トリフルオロメタンスルホニルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレートなどのアミド結合含有ラジカル重合性単量体;酢酸ビニルなどの脂肪酸ビニル類;塩化ビニル、塩化ビニリデンなどの塩素含有ラジカル重合性単量体;1,3-ブタジエン、イソプレン、1,4-ジメチルブタジエン等の共役ジオレフィン類などが含まれ、好ましくは下記式(B)で表される(メタ)アクリル酸エステル化合物もしくは無水マレイン酸である。 The copolymerizable monomer combined with the styrenic monomer is a (meth) acrylic acid ester compound represented by the following formula (B), maleic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, cis-1-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride, Acid anhydrides such as 3-methyl-cis-1-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride and 4-methyl-cis-1-cyclohexene-1,2-dicarboxylic anhydride, and nitrile groups such as acrylonitrile and methacrylonitrile -Containing radical polymerizable monomers; amide bond-containing radical polymerizable monomers such as acrylamide, methacrylamide, trifluoromethanesulfonylaminoethyl (meth) acrylate; fatty acid vinyls such as vinyl acetate; chlorine such as vinyl chloride and vinylidene chloride Containing radical polymerizable monomer; 1,3-butadiene, a Puren, 1,4-dimethyl butadiene conjugated diolefins such as, etc. are included, it is preferably represented by the following formula (B) (meth) acrylic acid ester compound or maleic anhydride.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 式(B)中のR105~R107は、それぞれ独立に水素原子または炭素数1~30のアルキル基またはアリール基を示す。R108は、水素原子、炭素数1~30のアルキル基、シクロアルキル基、またはアリール基を示す。これらの基は、それぞれ置換基(例えば水酸基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基など)をさらに有してもよい。 R 105 to R 107 in the formula (B) each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or an aryl group. R 108 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group, or an aryl group. Each of these groups may further have a substituent (for example, a hydroxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, etc.).
 (メタ)アクリル酸エステル系化合物の例には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル(i-、n-)、(メタ)アクリル酸ブチル(n-、i-、s-、tert-)、(メタ)アクリル酸ペンチル(n-、i-、s-)、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘキシル(n-、i-)、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘプチル(n-、i-)、(メタ)アクリル酸オクチル(n-、i-)、(メタ)アクリル酸ノニル(n-、i-)、(メタ)アクリル酸ミリスチル(n-、i-)、(メタ)アクリル酸(2-エチルヘキシル)、(メタ)アクリル酸(ε-カプロラクトン)、(メタ)アクリル酸(2-ヒドロキシエチル)、アクリル酸(2-ヒドロキシプロピル)、(メタ)アクリル酸(3-ヒドロキシプロピル)、(メタ)アクリル酸(4-ヒドロキシブチル)、(メタ)アクリル酸(2-ヒドロキシブチル)、アクリル酸(2-メトキシエチル)、(メタ)アクリル酸(2-エトキシエチル)アクリル酸フェニル、(メタ)メタクリル酸フェニル、(メタ)アクリル酸(2または4-クロロフェニル)、(メタ)アクリル酸(2または3または4-エトキシカルボニルフェニル)、(メタ)アクリル酸(oまたはmまたはp-トリル)、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸フェネチル、(メタ)アクリル酸(2-ナフチル)、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸(4-メチルシクロヘキシル)、(メタ)アクリル酸(4-エチルシクロヘキシル)等が含まれる。 Examples of (meth) acrylic acid ester compounds include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate (i-, n-), butyl (meth) acrylate (n- , I-, s-, tert-), pentyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-, s-), hexyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-), heptyl (meth) acrylate (n -, I-), octyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-), nonyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-), myristyl (meth) acrylate (n-, i-), (meta ) Acrylic acid (2-ethylhexyl), (meth) acrylic acid (ε-caprolactone), (meth) acrylic acid (2-hydroxyethyl), acrylic acid (2-hydroxypropyl), (meth) acrylic acid (3-hydroxy) Propyl) (Meth) acrylic acid (4-hydroxybutyl), (meth) acrylic acid (2-hydroxybutyl), acrylic acid (2-methoxyethyl), (meth) acrylic acid (2-ethoxyethyl) phenyl acrylate, (meth ) Phenyl methacrylate, (meth) acrylic acid (2 or 4-chlorophenyl), (meth) acrylic acid (2 or 3 or 4-ethoxycarbonylphenyl), (meth) acrylic acid (o or m or p-tolyl), Benzyl (meth) acrylate, phenethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid (2-naphthyl), cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic acid (4-methylcyclohexyl), (meth) acrylic acid ( 4-ethylcyclohexyl) and the like.
 スチレン系化合物の具体例には、スチレン/無水マレイン酸共重合体、スチレン/アクリル酸エステル共重合体、スチレン/ヒドロキシスチレン重合体、スチレン/アセトキシスチレン重合体などが含まれる。なかでも、スチレン/無水マレイン酸共重合体が好ましい。 Specific examples of the styrene compound include styrene / maleic anhydride copolymer, styrene / acrylic ester copolymer, styrene / hydroxystyrene polymer, styrene / acetoxystyrene polymer, and the like. Of these, a styrene / maleic anhydride copolymer is preferable.
 上記可塑剤の含有量は、特に制限されないが、セルロースエステルフィルムに含まれるセルロースエステル100質量%に対して、0.1~30質量%の範囲内であることが好ましく、5~20質量%の範囲内であることがより好ましい。このような量であれば、セルロースエステルフィルムがブリードアウトを生じにくい。 The content of the plasticizer is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 30% by mass with respect to 100% by mass of the cellulose ester contained in the cellulose ester film. More preferably within the range. If it is such quantity, a cellulose-ester film will not produce bleeding out easily.
 (その他の添加剤)
 また、本発明の位相差フィルムは、上記可塑剤に代えてあるいは可塑剤に加えて、必要であれば、他の添加剤をさらに含みうる。このような他の添加剤としては、特に制限されないが、例えば、水素結合性化合物、活性剤、酸化防止剤、着色剤、紫外線吸収剤、マット剤、アクリル粒子、水素結合性溶媒、イオン性界面活性剤などが挙げられる。
(Other additives)
Further, the retardation film of the present invention may further contain other additives, if necessary, instead of the plasticizer or in addition to the plasticizer. Examples of such other additives include, but are not limited to, hydrogen bonding compounds, activators, antioxidants, colorants, ultraviolet absorbers, matting agents, acrylic particles, hydrogen bonding solvents, ionic interfaces. An active agent etc. are mentioned.
 上記水素結合性化合物は、湿度の変化に対するレターデーション値Rtの変動を低減できる。ここで、水素結合性化合物としては、一分子中に少なくとも複数のヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、チオール基、カルボン酸基、から選ばれる官能基を有することが好ましく、一分子内に複数の異なる官能基を有することがより好ましく、一分子内にヒドロキシ基とカルボン酸基とを有することが特に好ましい。 The hydrogen bonding compound can reduce the fluctuation of the retardation value Rt with respect to the change in humidity. Here, the hydrogen bonding compound preferably has at least a plurality of functional groups selected from a hydroxy group, an amino group, a thiol group, and a carboxylic acid group in one molecule, and a plurality of different functional groups in one molecule. It is more preferable to have a hydroxy group and a carboxylic acid group in one molecule.
 当該水素結合性化合物は、母核として、1~2個の芳香族環を含有することが好ましく、一分子中に含有する前記官能基の数を、化合物の分子量で割った値が、0.01以上であることが好ましい。 The hydrogen bonding compound preferably contains 1 to 2 aromatic rings as a mother nucleus, and the value obtained by dividing the number of functional groups contained in one molecule by the molecular weight of the compound is 0.00. It is preferably 01 or more.
 上記効果は、前記セルロースエステルと水分子とが相互作用(水素結合)する部位に上記水素結合性化合物が結合(水素結合)し、水分子の脱着による電荷分布の変化を抑制するように作用するためと推定している。 The above effect is such that the hydrogen-bonding compound is bonded (hydrogen bond) to a site where the cellulose ester and water molecules interact (hydrogen bonds), thereby suppressing the change in charge distribution due to desorption of water molecules. For the reason.
 具体的な化合物例としては、特開2012-82235号公報に記載の例示化合物E-104が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the compound include Exemplified Compound E-104 described in JP2012-82235A.
 水素結合性化合物は、セルロースエステル100質量部に対して1~30質量部の範囲で添加することができる。 The hydrogen bonding compound can be added in the range of 1 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the cellulose ester.
 本発明のフィルムは、偏光板の視認側やバックライト側に用いられることが好ましいことから、紫外線吸収機能を付与することを目的として、紫外線吸収剤を含有することが好ましい。紫外線吸収剤としては、特に限定されず、保護フィルムAとしてのポリエステルフィルムに含まれうるものとして上述したものが同様に用いられうる。 Since the film of the present invention is preferably used on the viewing side or the backlight side of the polarizing plate, it preferably contains an ultraviolet absorber for the purpose of imparting an ultraviolet absorbing function. It does not specifically limit as a ultraviolet absorber, What was mentioned above as what can be contained in the polyester film as the protective film A can be used similarly.
 保護フィルムBとしてのセルロースエステルフィルムにおける紫外線吸収剤の使用量は、紫外線吸収剤の種類、使用条件等により一様ではないが、一般には、セルロースエステル100質量%に対して、好ましくは0.05~10質量%、より好ましくは0.1~5質量%の範囲で添加される。 The amount of the UV absorber used in the cellulose ester film as the protective film B is not uniform depending on the type of UV absorber, usage conditions, etc., but generally it is preferably 0.05 with respect to 100% by mass of the cellulose ester. It is added in a range of ˜10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass.
 マット剤は、フィルムの滑り性を付与する微粒子であり、得られるフィルムの透明性を損なうことがなく、溶融時の耐熱性があれば無機化合物または有機化合物どちらでもよい。これらのマット剤は、単独でも2種以上併用しても使用できる。粒径や形状(例えば針状と球状など)の異なる粒子を併用することで高度に透明性と滑り性を両立させることもできる。これらの中でも、前記アクリル共重合体や相溶させる樹脂として用いるセルロースエステルと屈折率が近いので透明性(ヘイズ)に優れる二酸化珪素が特に好ましく用いられる。 The matting agent is fine particles imparting slipperiness of the film, and may be either an inorganic compound or an organic compound as long as it does not impair the transparency of the resulting film and has heat resistance during melting. These matting agents can be used alone or in combination of two or more. By using particles having different particle sizes and shapes (for example, acicular and spherical), both transparency and slipperiness can be made highly compatible. Among these, silicon dioxide, which is excellent in transparency (haze), is particularly preferably used because it has a refractive index close to that of the acrylic copolymer or cellulose ester used as a compatible resin.
 二酸化珪素の具体例としては、アエロジル200V、アエロジルR972V、アエロジルR972、R974、R812、200、300、R202、OX50、TT600、NAX50(以上日本アエロジル(株)製)、シーホスターKEP-10、シーホスターKEP-30、シーホスターKEP-50(以上、株式会社日本触媒製)、サイロホービック100(富士シリシア製)、ニップシールE220A(日本シリカ工業製)、アドマファインSO(アドマテックス製)等の商品名を有する市販品などが好ましく使用できる。 Specific examples of silicon dioxide include Aerosil 200V, Aerosil R972V, Aerosil R972, R974, R812, 200, 300, R202, OX50, TT600, NAX50 (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.), Sea Hoster KEP-10, Sea Hoster KEP- 30, Seahoster KEP-50 (above, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.), Silo Hovic 100 (manufactured by Fuji Silysia), Nip Seal E220A (manufactured by Nippon Silica Industry), Admafine SO (manufactured by Admatechs) Goods etc. can be preferably used.
 粒子の形状としては、不定形、針状、扁平、球状等特に制限なく使用できるが、特に球状の粒子を用いると得られるフィルムの透明性が良好にできるので好ましい。 The shape of the particles can be used without particular limitation, such as indefinite shape, needle shape, flat shape, spherical shape, etc. However, the use of spherical particles is preferable because the transparency of the resulting film can be improved.
 粒子の大きさは、可視光の波長に近いと光が散乱し、透明性が悪くなるので、可視光の波長より小さいことが好ましく、さらに可視光の波長の1/2以下であることが好ましい。粒子の大きさが小さすぎると滑り性が改善されない場合があるので、80nmから180nmの範囲であることが特に好ましい。なお、粒子の大きさとは、粒子が1次粒子の凝集体の場合は凝集体の大きさを意味する。また、粒子が球状でない場合は、その投影面積に相当する円の直径を意味する。 When the particle size is close to the wavelength of visible light, light is scattered and the transparency is deteriorated. Therefore, the particle size is preferably smaller than the wavelength of visible light, and more preferably ½ or less of the wavelength of visible light. . If the size of the particles is too small, the slipperiness may not be improved, so the range of 80 nm to 180 nm is particularly preferable. The particle size means the size of the aggregate when the particle is an aggregate of primary particles. Moreover, when a particle is not spherical, it means the diameter of a circle corresponding to the projected area.
 マット剤は、樹脂(セルロースエステル)に対して、0.05~10質量%、好ましくは0.1~5質量%の範囲で添加されることが好ましい。 The matting agent is added in an amount of 0.05 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass with respect to the resin (cellulose ester).
 本発明のフィルムは、例えば、国際公開第2010/001668号パンフレットに記載のアクリル粒子を、透明性を維持できる範囲内の量で含有してもよい。該アクリル粒子は、フィルムの脆性を改善する作用がある。 The film of the present invention may contain, for example, acrylic particles described in International Publication No. 2010/001668 in an amount within a range where transparency can be maintained. The acrylic particles have an action of improving the brittleness of the film.
 このようなアクリル粒子の市販品の例としては、例えば、三菱レイヨン社製の「メタブレンW-341」、カネカ社製の「カネエース」、クレハ社製の「パラロイド」、ロームアンドハース社製の「アクリロイド」、ガンツ化成工業社製の「スタフィロイド」、ケミスノーMR-2G、MS-300X(以上、綜研化学(株)製)およびクラレ社製の「パラペットSA」などが挙げられ、これらは、単独または2種以上を用いることができる。 Examples of such commercially available acrylic particles include, for example, “Metablene W-341” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., “Kane Ace” manufactured by Kaneka Corporation, “Paraloid” manufactured by Kureha Co., Ltd., “Roid and Haas Co.” “Acryloid”, “Staffroid” manufactured by Ganz Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd., Chemisnow MR-2G, MS-300X (above, manufactured by Soken Chemical Co., Ltd.) and “Parapet SA” manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd. Or 2 or more types can be used.
 水素結合性溶媒は、溶液流延法でフィルムを作製する場合に、フィルムの構成材料を溶解するための溶媒に溶液粘度を調整(低減)する目的で、添加することができる。水素結合性溶媒とは、J.N.イスラエルアチビリ著、「分子間力と表面力」(近藤保、大島広行訳、マグロウヒル出版、1991年)に記載されるように、電気的に陰性な原子(酸素、窒素、フッ素、塩素)と電気的に陰性な原子と共有結合した水素原子間に生ずる、水素原子媒介「結合」を生ずることができるような有機溶媒、すなわち、結合モーメントが大きく、かつ水素を含む結合、例えば、O-H(酸素水素結合)、N-H(窒素水素結合)、F-H(フッ素水素結合)を含むことで近接した分子同士が配列できるような有機溶媒をいう。 The hydrogen bonding solvent can be added for the purpose of adjusting (reducing) the solution viscosity in a solvent for dissolving the constituent materials of the film when a film is produced by the solution casting method. The hydrogen bonding solvent is J.I. N. As described in Israel Ativili, “Intermolecular Forces and Surface Forces” (Takeshi Kondo, Hiroyuki Oshima, Maglow Hill Publishing, 1991) and electrically negative atoms (oxygen, nitrogen, fluorine, chlorine) An organic solvent capable of producing a hydrogen atom-mediated “bond” that occurs between an electronegative atom and a covalently bonded hydrogen atom, that is, a bond having a large bonding moment and containing hydrogen, such as OH (Oxygen hydrogen bond), N—H (nitrogen hydrogen bond), FH (fluorine hydrogen bond), and an organic solvent that can arrange adjacent molecules.
 これらは、アクリル共重合体やセルロースエステル樹脂、あるいは、相溶化させるための他の樹脂の混合体自身の分子間水素結合よりも、当該樹脂と水素結合性溶媒間との強い水素結合を形成させることで、溶液粘度の変化に期待できる。 These form a stronger hydrogen bond between the resin and the hydrogen bonding solvent than the intermolecular hydrogen bond of the acrylic copolymer, cellulose ester resin, or other resin mixture for compatibilization itself. Thus, a change in solution viscosity can be expected.
 本発明で行う溶液流延法においては、用いる該樹脂溶液に対して、溶液粘度を調整することに加えて、製膜時の剥離力を低下させる目的で、溶解のための溶媒に、水素結合性溶媒を一部あるいは全量用いることもできる。 In the solution casting method performed in the present invention, in addition to adjusting the solution viscosity with respect to the resin solution to be used, in order to reduce the peeling force at the time of film formation, a hydrogen bond is added to the solvent for dissolution. A part or all of the solvent may be used.
 イオン性界面活性剤は、製膜時の剥離力を低下させる目的で添加されうる。 An ionic surfactant can be added for the purpose of reducing the peeling force during film formation.
 本発明で用いることのできるイオン性界面活性剤としては、例えば、カチオン性界面活性剤、アニオン性界面活性剤、両性界面活性剤等が挙げられる。 Examples of the ionic surfactant that can be used in the present invention include a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and an amphoteric surfactant.
 カチオン性界面活性剤としては、例えば、脂肪族アミン塩、脂肪族4級アンモニウム塩、ベンザルコニウム塩、塩化ベンゼトニウム、ピリジニウム塩、イミダゾリニウム塩等が挙げられる。 Examples of the cationic surfactant include aliphatic amine salts, aliphatic quaternary ammonium salts, benzalkonium salts, benzethonium chloride, pyridinium salts, imidazolinium salts, and the like.
 アニオン性界面活性剤としては、高級アルコール(C~C22)硫酸エステル塩類(例えば、ラウリルアルコールサルフェートのナトリウム塩、オクチルアルコールサルフェートのナトリウム塩、ラウリルアルコールサルフェートのアンモニウム塩、「Teepol-81」(商品名・シェル化学社製)、第二ナトリウムアルキルサルフェート等)、脂肪族アルコールリン酸エステル塩類(例えば、セチルアルコールリン酸エステルのナトリウム塩等)、アルキルアリールスルホン酸塩類(例えば、ドデシルベンゼンスルホン酸のナトリウム塩、イソプロピルナフタレンスルホン酸のナトリウム塩、ジナフタレンジスルホン酸のナトリウム塩、メタニトロベンゼンスルホン酸のナトリウム塩等)、アルキルアミドのスルホン酸塩類(例えば、C1733CON(CH)CHSONa等)、二塩基性脂肪酸エステルのスルホン酸塩類(例えば、ナトリウムスルホコハク酸ジオクチルエステル、ナトリウムスルホコハク酸ジヘキシルエステル等)がある。これらの中で特に硫酸塩類やスルホン酸塩類が好適に用いられる。 Examples of the anionic surfactant include higher alcohol (C 8 -C 22 ) sulfate salts (for example, sodium salt of lauryl alcohol sulfate, sodium salt of octyl alcohol sulfate, ammonium salt of lauryl alcohol sulfate, “Tepol-81” ( Trade name, manufactured by Shell Chemical Co., Ltd.), secondary sodium alkyl sulfate, etc.), aliphatic alcohol phosphate salts (eg, sodium salt of cetyl alcohol phosphate), alkylaryl sulfonates (eg, dodecylbenzenesulfonic acid) Sodium salt, isopropyl naphthalene sulfonic acid sodium salt, dinaphthalenedisulfonic acid sodium salt, metanitrobenzene sulfonic acid sodium salt), alkylamide sulfonates (eg Examples thereof include C 17 H 33 CON (CH 3 ) CH 2 SO 3 Na) and sulfonates of dibasic fatty acid esters (for example, sodium sulfosuccinic acid dioctyl ester, sodium sulfosuccinic acid dihexyl ester, etc.). Of these, sulfates and sulfonates are particularly preferably used.
 両性界面活性剤としては、カルボキシベタイン型、スルホベタイン型、アミノカルボン酸塩、イミダゾリニウムベタイン等が挙げられる。 Examples of amphoteric surfactants include carboxybetaine type, sulfobetaine type, aminocarboxylate, imidazolinium betaine and the like.
 中でも、本発明においては、アニオン性界面活性剤が好ましい。また上記の界面活性剤は、フィルムを構成する樹脂の総量に対して、0.01質量%以上5質量%以下、好ましくは0.05質量%以上3質量%以下、より好ましくは0.2質量%以上2質量%以下で用いることが好ましい。この範囲よりも添加量が多いと、フィルムから界面活性剤が析出したり、フィルムの吸湿性が高くなり、位相差フィルムの品質に好ましくない品質が発現する。またこの範囲よりも添加量が少ないと界面活性剤を用いる本発明の効果が得られなくなったりする。 Among these, an anionic surfactant is preferable in the present invention. The above surfactant is 0.01% by mass or more and 5% by mass or less, preferably 0.05% by mass or more and 3% by mass or less, more preferably 0.2% by mass with respect to the total amount of the resin constituting the film. % To 2% by mass is preferable. When the addition amount is larger than this range, the surfactant is precipitated from the film, or the hygroscopicity of the film is increased, and a quality undesirable for the quality of the retardation film is exhibited. If the addition amount is less than this range, the effect of the present invention using a surfactant may not be obtained.
 (フィルムの物性)
 以下、本発明における保護フィルムBとしてのセルロースエステルフィルムの物性等についての特徴について説明する。
(Physical properties of film)
Hereinafter, the characteristic about the physical property etc. of the cellulose-ester film as the protective film B in this invention is demonstrated.
 (透明性)
 セルロースエステルフィルムの透明性を判断する指標としては、ヘイズ値(濁度)を用いる。特に屋外で用いられる液晶表示装置においては、明るい場所でも十分な輝度や高いコントラストが得られることが求められるため、ヘイズ値は0.6%以下であることが好ましく、0.4%以下であることがさらに好ましい。散乱フィルムとして用いる場合は、ヘイズ値は上記の範囲を超えていてもよい。また、フィルムの内部ヘイズは0.01~0.1であることが好ましい。
(transparency)
A haze value (turbidity) is used as an index for judging the transparency of the cellulose ester film. In particular, in a liquid crystal display device used outdoors, it is required that sufficient brightness and high contrast are obtained even in a bright place. Therefore, the haze value is preferably 0.6% or less, and is 0.4% or less. More preferably. When used as a scattering film, the haze value may exceed the above range. The internal haze of the film is preferably 0.01 to 0.1.
 また、本発明のフィルムは、その全光線透過率が90%以上であることが好ましく、より好ましくは93%以上である。また、現実的な上限としては、99%程度である。 Further, the film of the present invention preferably has a total light transmittance of 90% or more, more preferably 93% or more. Moreover, as a realistic upper limit, it is about 99%.
 ヘイズ値および透過率はヘイズメーターを用いて測定することができる。 The haze value and transmittance can be measured using a haze meter.
 上記のような物性を満たすフィルムは、大型の液晶表示装置や屋外用途の液晶表示装置用の偏光板保護フィルムとしても好ましく用いることができる。 A film satisfying the above physical properties can be preferably used as a polarizing plate protective film for a large-sized liquid crystal display device or a liquid crystal display device for outdoor use.
 (リターデーション)
 保護フィルムBとしてのセルロースエステルフィルムにおけるリターデーション値について特に制限はないが、下記式(i)及び(ii)で定義される面内方向のリターデーション値Roが30~70nmの範囲内であり、厚さ方向のリターデーション値Rtが100~140nmの範囲内であることがVA型表示装置に搭載時のコントラスト・視野角向上の観点から好ましい。特に、面内方向のリターデーション値Roが45~60nmの範囲内であり、厚さ方向のリターデーション値Rtが110~135nmの範囲内である時にVA型表示装置に搭載時のコントラスト・視野角が特に向上し好ましい。
(Retardation)
The retardation value in the cellulose ester film as the protective film B is not particularly limited, but the in-plane retardation value Ro defined by the following formulas (i) and (ii) is in the range of 30 to 70 nm, The retardation value Rt in the thickness direction is preferably in the range of 100 to 140 nm from the viewpoint of improving contrast and viewing angle when mounted on a VA display device. In particular, when the retardation value Ro in the in-plane direction is in the range of 45 to 60 nm and the retardation value Rt in the thickness direction is in the range of 110 to 135 nm, the contrast and viewing angle when mounted on the VA display device Is particularly improved and preferable.
 式(i):Ro=(n-n)×d(nm)
 式(ii):Rt={(n+n)/2-n}×d(nm)
 式(i)および(ii)において、nは、フィルムの面内方向において屈折率が最大になる方向xにおける屈折率を表す。nは、フィルムの面内方向において、前記方向xと直交する方向yにおける屈折率を表す。nは、フィルムの厚さ方向zにおける屈折率を表す。dは、フィルムの厚さ(nm)を表す。測定は、23℃・55%RHの環境下、590nmの測定波長で行うものとする。
Formula (i): Ro = (n x −n y ) × d (nm)
Formula (ii): Rt = {(n x + n y ) / 2−n z } × d (nm)
In the formula (i) and (ii), n x represents a refractive index in the direction x in which the refractive index in the plane direction is maximized in the film. n y, in-plane direction of the film, the refractive index in the direction y perpendicular to the direction x. nz represents the refractive index in the thickness direction z of the film. d represents the thickness (nm) of the film. The measurement is performed at a measurement wavelength of 590 nm in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH.
 (セルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法)
 次に、セルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法について説明する。本発明はこれに限定されるものではない。
(Method for producing cellulose ester film)
Next, the manufacturing method of a cellulose-ester film is demonstrated. The present invention is not limited to this.
 セルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法としては、通常のインフレーション法、T-ダイ法、カレンダー法、切削法、流延法、エマルジョン法、ホットプレス法等の製造法が使用できるが、着色抑制、異物欠点の抑制、ダイラインなどの光学欠点の抑制などの観点から製膜方法は、溶液流延製膜法と溶融流延製膜法が好ましく、特に溶液流延製膜法であることが、均一な表面を得るためにより好ましい。 As a method for producing a cellulose ester film, a usual inflation method, T-die method, calendar method, cutting method, casting method, emulsion method, hot press method and the like can be used. From the viewpoint of suppression, suppression of optical defects such as die lines, etc., the film forming method is preferably a solution casting film forming method and a melt casting film forming method. More preferred for obtaining.
 〈溶液流延製膜法〉
 溶液流涎法により製膜する場合、セルロースエステルフィルムの製造方法は、セルロースエステル、および所望の添加剤を溶媒に溶解させてドープを調製する工程(溶解工程;ドープ調製工程)、ドープを無限に移行する無端の金属支持体上に流延する工程(流延工程)、流延したドープをウェブとして乾燥する工程(溶媒蒸発工程)、金属支持体から剥離する工程(剥離工程)、乾燥、延伸、幅保持する工程(延伸・幅保持・乾燥工程)、仕上がったフィルムを巻取る工程(巻き取り工程)を含むことが好ましい。
<Solution casting film forming method>
In the case of forming a film by the solution pouring method, the cellulose ester film is produced by dissolving the cellulose ester and a desired additive in a solvent to prepare a dope (dissolution process; dope preparation process), and moving the dope indefinitely. The process of casting on an endless metal support (casting process), the process of drying the cast dope as a web (solvent evaporation process), the process of peeling from the metal support (peeling process), drying, stretching, It is preferable to include a step of holding the width (stretching / width holding / drying step) and a step of winding the finished film (winding step).
 図2は、本発明に好ましい溶液流延製膜法のドープ調製工程、流延工程および乾燥工程(溶媒蒸発工程)の一例を模式的に示した図である。 FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a dope preparation step, a casting step, and a drying step (solvent evaporation step) of a solution casting film forming method preferable for the present invention.
 仕込釜41より濾過器44で大きな凝集物を除去し、ストック釜42へ送液する。その後、ストック釜42より主ドープ溶解釜1へ各種添加液を添加する。 大 き な Remove large agglomerates from the charging vessel 41 with the filter 44 and feed the solution to the stock vessel 42. Thereafter, various additive solutions are added from the stock kettle 42 to the main dope dissolving kettle 1.
 その後主ドープは主濾過器3にて濾過され、これに添加剤添加液が16よりインライン添加される。多くの場合、主ドープには返材が10~50質量%程度含まれることがある。返材とは、フィルムを細かく粉砕した物で、フィルムを製膜するときに発生する、フィルムの両サイド部分を切り落とした物や、擦り傷などでスペックアウトしたフィルム原反が使用される。 After that, the main dope is filtered by the main filter 3, and the additive solution is added in-line from 16 to this. In many cases, the main dope may contain about 10 to 50% by mass of the recycled material. The return material is a product obtained by finely pulverizing a film, and is produced by forming a film by cutting off both sides of the film, or by using a film raw material that has been speculated out by scratches or the like.
 また、ドープ調製に用いられる樹脂の原料としては、あらかじめセルロースエステル、および所望の添加剤などをペレット化したものも、好ましく用いることができる。 In addition, as a raw material for the resin used for preparing the dope, a pellet obtained by pelletizing cellulose ester and a desired additive in advance can be preferably used.
 以下、各工程について説明する。 Hereinafter, each process will be described.
 1)溶解工程(ドープ調製工程)
 本工程は、セルロースエステルに対する良溶媒を主とする溶媒に、溶解釜中で該セルロースエステル、および所望の添加剤を攪拌しながら溶解しドープを形成する工程である。
1) Dissolution process (dope preparation process)
This step is a step of forming a dope by dissolving the cellulose ester and a desired additive in a dissolving kettle in a solvent mainly composed of a good solvent for the cellulose ester while stirring.
 ドープ中のセルロースエステルの濃度は、濃い方が金属支持体に流延した後の乾燥負荷が低減できて好ましいが、セルロースエステルの濃度が濃過ぎると濾過時の負荷が増えて、濾過精度が悪くなる。これらを両立する濃度としては、10~35質量%が好ましく、さらに好ましくは15~22質量%である。 The concentration of cellulose ester in the dope is preferably higher because the drying load after casting on the metal support can be reduced. However, if the concentration of cellulose ester is too high, the load during filtration increases and the filtration accuracy is poor. Become. The concentration for achieving both of these is preferably 10 to 35% by mass, more preferably 15 to 22% by mass.
 ドープで用いられる溶媒は、単独で用いても2種以上を併用してもよいが、セルロースエステルの良溶媒と貧溶媒を混合して使用することが生産効率の点で好ましく、良溶媒が多い方がセルロースアセテートの溶解性の点で好ましい。 Solvents used in the dope may be used alone or in combination of two or more. However, it is preferable to use a mixture of a good solvent and a poor solvent of cellulose ester in terms of production efficiency, and there are many good solvents. This is preferable from the viewpoint of solubility of cellulose acetate.
 良溶媒と貧溶媒の混合比率の好ましい範囲は、良溶媒が70~98質量%であり、貧溶剤が2~30質量%である。良溶媒、貧溶媒とは、使用するセルロースエステルを単独で溶解するものを良溶媒、単独で膨潤するかまたは溶解しないものを貧溶媒と定義している。そのため、セルロースエステルの平均置換度によって良溶媒、貧溶媒が変わる。 The preferable range of the mixing ratio of the good solvent and the poor solvent is 70 to 98% by mass for the good solvent and 2 to 30% by mass for the poor solvent. With a good solvent and a poor solvent, what dissolve | melts the cellulose ester to be used independently is defined as a good solvent, and what poorly swells or does not melt | dissolve is defined as a poor solvent. Therefore, a good solvent and a poor solvent change with the average substitution degree of a cellulose ester.
 本発明に用いられる良溶媒は特に限定されないが、メチレンクロライド等の有機ハロゲン化合物やジオキソラン類、アセトン、酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸メチル等が挙げられる。特に好ましくはメチレンクロライドまたは酢酸メチルが挙げられる。 The good solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include organic halogen compounds such as methylene chloride, dioxolanes, acetone, methyl acetate, and methyl acetoacetate. Particularly preferred is methylene chloride or methyl acetate.
 また、本発明に用いられる貧溶媒は特に限定されないが、例えば、メタノール、エタノール、n-ブタノール、シクロヘキサン、シクロヘキサノン等が好ましく用いられる。また、ドープ中には水が0.01~2質量%含有していることが好ましい。 Further, the poor solvent used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but for example, methanol, ethanol, n-butanol, cyclohexane, cyclohexanone and the like are preferably used. The dope preferably contains 0.01 to 2% by mass of water.
 また、セルロースエステルの溶解に用いられる溶媒は、フィルム製膜工程で乾燥によりフィルムから除去された溶媒を回収し、これを再利用して用いられる。 Also, the solvent used for dissolving the cellulose ester is used by collecting the solvent removed from the film by drying in the film-forming process and reusing it.
 回収溶媒中に、セルロースアセテートに添加されている添加剤、例えば可塑剤、紫外線吸収剤、ポリマー、モノマー成分などが微量含有されていることもあるが、これらが含まれていても好ましく再利用することができるし、必要であれば精製して再利用することもできる。 The recovery solvent may contain trace amounts of additives added to cellulose acetate, such as plasticizers, UV absorbers, polymers, monomer components, etc., but these are preferably reused even if they are included. Can be purified and reused if necessary.
 上記記載のドープを調製する際の、セルロースエステルの溶解方法としては、一般的な方法を用いることができる。具体的には、常圧で行う方法、主溶媒の沸点以下で行う方法、主溶媒の沸点以上で加圧して行う方法、特開平9-95544号公報、特開平9-95557号公報、または特開平9-95538号公報に記載のような冷却溶解法で行う方法、特開平11-21379号公報に記載されている高圧で行う方法等種々の溶解方法を用いることができる。中でも、主溶媒の沸点以上で加圧して行う方法が好ましく、加熱と加圧を組み合わせると常圧における沸点以上に加熱できる。 A general method can be used as a method for dissolving the cellulose ester in preparing the dope described above. Specifically, a method carried out at normal pressure, a method carried out below the boiling point of the main solvent, a method carried out under pressure above the boiling point of the main solvent, JP-A-9-95544, JP-A-9-95557, Various dissolution methods such as a method using a cooling dissolution method as described in Kaihei 9-95538 and a method using a high pressure as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-21379 can be used. Among them, a method of performing pressurization at a temperature equal to or higher than the boiling point of the main solvent is preferable.
 また、溶媒の常圧での沸点以上でかつ加圧下で溶媒が沸騰しない範囲の温度で加熱しながら攪拌溶解する方法も、ゲルやママコと呼ばれる塊状未溶解物の発生を防止するため好ましい。 In addition, a method of stirring and dissolving while heating at a temperature that is equal to or higher than the boiling point of the solvent at normal pressure and does not boil under pressure is preferable in order to prevent the generation of massive undissolved material called gel or mamako.
 また、セルロースアセテートを貧溶媒と混合して湿潤あるいは膨潤させた後、さらに良溶剤を添加して溶解する方法も好ましく用いられる。 Further, a method in which cellulose acetate is mixed with a poor solvent and wetted or swollen, and then a good solvent is added and dissolved is also preferably used.
 加圧は窒素ガス等の不活性気体を圧入する方法や、加熱によって溶媒の蒸気圧を上昇させる方法によって行ってもよい。加熱は外部から行うことが好ましく、例えばジャケットタイプのものは温度コントロールが容易で好ましい。 The pressurization may be performed by a method of injecting an inert gas such as nitrogen gas or a method of increasing the vapor pressure of the solvent by heating. Heating is preferably performed from the outside. For example, a jacket type is preferable because temperature control is easy.
 溶媒を添加しての加熱温度は、高い方がセルロースアセテートの溶解性の観点から好ましいが、加熱温度が高過ぎると必要とされる圧力が大きくなり生産性が悪くなる。 The heating temperature with the addition of the solvent is preferably higher from the viewpoint of the solubility of cellulose acetate, but if the heating temperature is too high, the required pressure increases and the productivity deteriorates.
 好ましい加熱温度は45~120℃であり、60~110℃がより好ましく、70℃~105℃が更に好ましい。また、圧力は設定温度で溶媒が沸騰しないように調整される。 The preferred heating temperature is 45 to 120 ° C, more preferably 60 to 110 ° C, and still more preferably 70 ° C to 105 ° C. The pressure is adjusted so that the solvent does not boil at the set temperature.
 または冷却溶解法も好ましく用いられ、これによって酢酸メチルなどの溶媒にセルロースエステルを溶解させることができる。 Alternatively, a cooling dissolution method is also preferably used, whereby the cellulose ester can be dissolved in a solvent such as methyl acetate.
 次に、このセルロースエステル溶液(溶解中または溶解後のドープ)を濾紙等の適当な濾材を用いて濾過することが好ましい。 Next, this cellulose ester solution (doping during or after dissolution) is preferably filtered using a suitable filter medium such as filter paper.
 濾材としては、不溶物等を除去するために絶対濾過精度が小さい方が好ましいが、絶対濾過精度が小さ過ぎると濾過材の目詰まりが発生し易いという問題がある。このため絶対濾過精度0.008mm以下の濾材が好ましく、0.001~0.008mmの濾材がより好ましく、0.003~0.007mmの濾材がさらに好ましい。 As the filter medium, it is preferable that the absolute filtration accuracy is small in order to remove insoluble matters and the like, but if the absolute filtration accuracy is too small, there is a problem that the filter medium is likely to be clogged. For this reason, a filter medium with an absolute filtration accuracy of 0.008 mm or less is preferable, a filter medium with 0.001 to 0.008 mm is more preferable, and a filter medium with 0.003 to 0.007 mm is more preferable.
 濾材の材質は特に制限はなく、通常の濾材を使用することができるが、ポリプロピレン、テフロン(登録商標)等のプラスチック製の濾材や、ステンレススティール等の金属製の濾材が繊維の脱落等がなく好ましい。 There are no particular restrictions on the material of the filter medium, and ordinary filter media can be used. However, plastic filter media such as polypropylene and Teflon (registered trademark), and metal filter media such as stainless steel do not drop off fibers. preferable.
 濾過により、原料のセルロースアセテートに含まれていた不純物、特に輝点異物を除去、低減することが好ましい。 It is preferable to remove and reduce impurities, particularly bright spot foreign matter, contained in the raw material cellulose acetate by filtration.
 輝点異物とは、2枚の偏光板をクロスニコル状態にして配置し、その間にフィルム等を置き、一方の偏光板の側から光を当てて、他方の偏光板の側から観察した時に反対側からの光が漏れて見える点(異物)のことであり、径が0.01mm以上である輝点数が200個/cm以下であることが好ましい。より好ましくは100個/cm以下であり、さらに好ましくは50個/m以下であり、さらに好ましくは0~10個/cm以下である。また、0.01mm以下の輝点も少ない方が好ましい。 A bright spot foreign object is placed when two polarizing plates are placed in a crossed Nicol state, a film or the like is placed between them, light is applied from one polarizing plate, and the opposite is observed when observed from the other polarizing plate. It is a point (foreign matter) where light from the side appears to leak, and the number of bright spots having a diameter of 0.01 mm or more is preferably 200 / cm 2 or less. More preferably, it is 100 pieces / cm 2 or less, further preferably 50 pieces / m 2 or less, and further preferably 0 to 10 pieces / cm 2 . Further, it is preferable that the number of bright spots of 0.01 mm or less is small.
 ドープの濾過は通常の方法で行うことができるが、溶媒の常圧での沸点以上で、かつ加圧下で溶媒が沸騰しない範囲の温度で加熱しながら濾過する方法が、濾過前後の濾圧の差(差圧という)の上昇が小さく、好ましい。 The dope can be filtered by a normal method, but the method of filtering while heating at a temperature not lower than the boiling point of the solvent at normal pressure and in a range where the solvent does not boil under pressure is the filtration pressure before and after filtration. The increase in the difference (referred to as differential pressure) is small and preferable.
 好ましい温度は45~120℃であり、45~70℃がより好ましく、45~55℃であることがさらに好ましい。 A preferable temperature is 45 to 120 ° C, more preferably 45 to 70 ° C, and further preferably 45 to 55 ° C.
 濾圧は小さい方が好ましい。濾圧は1.6MPa以下であることが好ましく、1.2MPa以下であることがより好ましく、1.0MPa以下であることがさらに好ましい。 A smaller filtration pressure is preferable. The filtration pressure is preferably 1.6 MPa or less, more preferably 1.2 MPa or less, and further preferably 1.0 MPa or less.
 2)流延工程
 続いて、ドープを金属支持体上に流延(キャスト)する。すなわち、本工程は、ドープを、送液ポンプ(例えば、加圧型定量ギヤポンプ)を通して加圧ダイ30に送液し、無限に移送する無端の金属ベルト31、例えばステンレスベルト、あるいは回転する金属ドラム等の金属支持体上の流延位置に、加圧ダイスリットからドープを流延する工程である。
2) Casting step Subsequently, the dope is cast on a metal support. That is, in this step, the dope is fed to the pressurizing die 30 through a liquid feed pump (for example, a pressurized metering gear pump) and transferred indefinitely, for example, an endless metal belt 31 such as a stainless steel belt or a rotating metal drum. The dope is cast from the pressure die slit to the casting position on the metal support.
 ダイの口金部分のスリット形状を調整でき、膜厚を均一にし易い加圧ダイが好ましい。加圧ダイには、コートハンガーダイやTダイ等があり、いずれも好ましく用いられる。金属支持体の表面は鏡面となっていることが好ましい。製膜速度を上げるために加圧ダイを金属支持体上に2基以上設け、ドープ量を分割して重層してもよい。あるいは複数のドープを同時に流延する共流延法によって積層構造のフィルムを得ることも好ましい。 ¡Pressure dies that can adjust the slit shape of the die base and make the film thickness uniform are preferred. Examples of the pressure die include a coat hanger die and a T die, and any of them is preferably used. The surface of the metal support is preferably a mirror surface. In order to increase the film forming speed, two or more pressure dies may be provided on the metal support, and the dope amount may be divided and stacked. Or it is also preferable to obtain the film of a laminated structure by the co-casting method which casts several dope simultaneously.
 キャストの幅は生産性の観点から1.4m以上が好ましい。より好ましくは1.4~4mである。4mを超える場合には、製造工程で縞が入ったり、その後の搬送工程での安定性が低くなったりするおそれがある。さらに好ましくは、搬送性、生産性の点で1.6~2.5mである。 The cast width is preferably 1.4 m or more from the viewpoint of productivity. More preferably, it is 1.4 to 4 m. When it exceeds 4 m, there is a risk of streaking in the manufacturing process or lowering of stability in the subsequent transport process. More preferably, it is 1.6 to 2.5 m in terms of transportability and productivity.
 流延(キャスト)工程における金属支持体は、表面を鏡面仕上げしたものが好ましく、金属支持体としては、ステンレススティールベルトもしくは鋳物で表面をメッキ仕上げしたドラムが好ましく用いられる。 The metal support in the casting process is preferably a mirror-finished surface, and a stainless steel belt or a drum whose surface is plated with a casting is preferably used as the metal support.
 流延工程の金属支持体の表面温度は-50℃~溶媒の沸点未満の温度で、温度が高い方がウェブの乾燥速度が速くできるので好ましいが、余り高過ぎるとウェブが発泡したり、平面性が劣化する場合がある。 The surface temperature of the metal support in the casting step is −50 ° C. to less than the boiling point of the solvent, and a higher temperature is preferable because the web drying rate can be increased. May deteriorate.
 好ましい支持体温度は0~55℃であり、25~50℃がさらに好ましい。あるいは、冷却することによってウェブをゲル化させて残留溶媒を多く含んだ状態でドラムから剥離することも好ましい方法である。 The preferred support temperature is 0 to 55 ° C, more preferably 25 to 50 ° C. Alternatively, it is also a preferable method that the web is gelled by cooling and peeled from the drum in a state containing a large amount of residual solvent.
 金属支持体の温度を制御する方法は特に制限されないが、温風または冷風を吹きかける方法や、温水を金属支持体の裏側に接触させる方法がある。温水を用いる方が熱の伝達が効率的に行われるため、金属支持体の温度が一定になるまでの時間が短く好ましい。温風を用いる場合は目的の温度よりも高い温度の風を使う場合がある。 The method for controlling the temperature of the metal support is not particularly limited, but there are a method of blowing hot air or cold air, and a method of contacting hot water with the back side of the metal support. It is preferable to use warm water because heat transfer is performed efficiently, so that the time until the temperature of the metal support becomes constant is short. When warm air is used, wind at a temperature higher than the target temperature may be used.
 3)溶媒蒸発工程
 本工程は、ウェブ(流延用支持体上にドープを流延し、形成されたドープ膜をウェブと呼ぶ)を流延用支持体上で加熱し、溶媒を蒸発させる工程である。
3) Solvent evaporation step This step is a step of evaporating the solvent by heating the web (the dope is cast on the casting support and the formed dope film is called the web) on the casting support. It is.
 溶媒を蒸発させるには、ウェブ側から風を吹かせる方法および/または支持体の裏面から液体により伝熱させる方法、輻射熱により表裏から伝熱する方法等があるが、裏面液体伝熱方法が、乾燥効率が良く好ましい。また、それらを組み合わせる方法も好ましく用いられる。流延後の支持体上のウェブを40~100℃の雰囲気下、支持体上で乾燥させることが好ましい。40~100℃の雰囲気下に維持するには、この温度の温風をウェブ上面に当てるか赤外線等の手段により加熱することが好ましい。 In order to evaporate the solvent, there are a method of blowing air from the web side and / or a method of transferring heat from the back side of the support by a liquid, a method of transferring heat from the front and back by radiant heat, and the like. The drying efficiency is good and preferable. A method of combining them is also preferably used. The web on the support after casting is preferably dried on the support in an atmosphere of 40 to 100 ° C. In order to maintain the atmosphere at 40 to 100 ° C., it is preferable to apply hot air at this temperature to the upper surface of the web or heat by means such as infrared rays.
 面品質、透湿性、剥離性の観点から、ステンレススティールベルト製膜の時には30~120秒以内、ドラム製膜の時には5~40秒で該ウェブを支持体から剥離することが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of surface quality, moisture permeability, and peelability, it is preferable to peel the web from the support within 30 to 120 seconds when forming a stainless steel belt film and within 5 to 40 seconds when forming a drum film.
 4)剥離工程
 次いで、ウェブを金属支持体から剥離する。すなわち、本工程は金属支持体上で溶媒が蒸発したウェブを、剥離位置で剥離する工程である。剥離されたウェブは次工程に送られる。
4) Peeling step Next, the web is peeled from the metal support. That is, this step is a step of peeling the web where the solvent is evaporated on the metal support at the peeling position. The peeled web is sent to the next process.
 金属支持体上の剥離位置における温度は-50~40℃の範囲内とするのが好ましく、10~40℃の範囲内がより好ましく、ステンレススティールベルト製膜の時には15~30℃の範囲内とするのが最も好ましく、ドラム製膜の時には-30~10℃が好ましい。 The temperature at the peeling position on the metal support is preferably within the range of −50 to 40 ° C., more preferably within the range of 10 to 40 ° C., and within the range of 15 to 30 ° C. when the stainless steel belt is formed. Most preferably, it is −30 to 10 ° C. when forming a drum.
 なお、剥離する時点での金属支持体上でのウェブの残留溶媒量は、乾燥の条件の強弱、金属支持体の長さ等によって適宜調節される。セルロースエステルフィルムが所定のタフネスの値を示すようにするためには、金属支持体からウェブを剥離する際の残留溶媒量を15~40質量%に制御することが好ましく、より好ましくは20~35質量%である。 In addition, the residual solvent amount of the web on the metal support at the time of peeling is appropriately adjusted depending on the strength of drying conditions, the length of the metal support, and the like. In order for the cellulose ester film to exhibit a predetermined toughness value, it is preferable to control the residual solvent amount when peeling the web from the metal support to 15 to 40% by mass, more preferably 20 to 35%. % By mass.
 本発明においては、残留溶媒量は下記式で定義される。 In the present invention, the amount of residual solvent is defined by the following formula.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000026
 なお、Mはウェブまたはフィルムを製造中または製造後の任意の時点で採取した試料の質量で、NはMを115℃で1時間加熱した後の質量である。 Note that M is the mass of a sample collected during or after the production of the web or film, and N is the mass after heating M at 115 ° C. for 1 hour.
 金属支持体とフィルムを剥離する際の剥離張力は、300N/m以下とすることが好ましい。より好ましくは、196~245N/mの範囲内であるが、剥離の際に皺が入り易い場合、190N/m以下、好ましくは100~190N/mの張力で剥離することが好ましい。 The peeling tension when peeling the metal support and the film is preferably 300 N / m or less. More preferably, it is within the range of 196 to 245 N / m. However, when wrinkles easily occur during peeling, peeling with a tension of 190 N / m or less, preferably 100 to 190 N / m is preferred.
 5)乾燥・延伸・幅保持工程
 (乾燥)
 セルロースエステルフィルムの乾燥工程においては、ウェブを金属支持体より剥離し、さらに乾燥し、残留溶媒量を1質量%以下にすることが好ましく、さらに好ましくは0.1質量%以下であり、特に好ましくは0~0.01質量%以下である。
5) Drying / stretching / width holding process (drying)
In the drying step of the cellulose ester film, the web is peeled from the metal support, and further dried, and the residual solvent amount is preferably 1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and particularly preferably. Is 0 to 0.01% by mass or less.
 フィルム乾燥工程では一般にロール乾燥方式(上下に配置した多数のロールにウェブを交互に通し乾燥させる方式)やテンター方式でウェブを搬送させながら乾燥する方式が採られる。例えば、剥離後、ウェブを乾燥装置内に複数配置したローラーに交互に通して搬送する乾燥装置35、および/またはクリップでウェブの両端をクリップして搬送するテンター延伸装置34を用いて、ウェブを乾燥する。 In the film drying process, generally, a roll drying method (a method in which webs are alternately passed through a plurality of rolls arranged above and below) and a method in which the web is dried while being conveyed by a tenter method are employed. For example, after peeling, the web is fed using a drying device 35 that alternately conveys the web through rollers arranged in a drying device and / or a tenter stretching device 34 that clips and conveys both ends of the web with clips. dry.
 ウェブを乾燥させる手段は特に制限なく、一般的に熱風、赤外線、加熱ロール、マイクロ波等で行うことができるが、簡便さの点で熱風で行うことが好ましい。余り急激な乾燥は出来上がりのフィルムの平面性を損ね易い。高温による乾燥は残留溶媒が8質量%以下くらいから行うのがよい。全体を通し、乾燥はおおむね40~250℃の範囲内で行われる。特に40~200℃の範囲内で乾燥させることが好ましい。乾燥温度は、段階的に高くしてゆき、100~150℃程度まで加熱することが好ましく、5分~30分間、さらに好ましくは6分~12分間加熱することが好ましい。 The means for drying the web is not particularly limited, and can be generally performed with hot air, infrared rays, a heating roll, microwave, or the like, but is preferably performed with hot air in terms of simplicity. Too rapid drying tends to impair the flatness of the finished film. Drying at a high temperature is preferably performed from about 8% by mass or less of the residual solvent. Throughout, the drying is generally carried out in the range of 40-250 ° C. It is particularly preferable to dry within the range of 40 to 200 ° C. The drying temperature is increased stepwise and is preferably heated to about 100 to 150 ° C., preferably 5 to 30 minutes, more preferably 6 to 12 minutes.
 テンター延伸装置を用いる場合は、テンターの左右把持手段によってフィルムの把持長(把持開始から把持終了までの距離)を左右で独立に制御できる装置を用いることが好ましい。また、テンター工程において、平面性を改善するため意図的に異なる温度を持つ区画を作ることも好ましい。 When using a tenter stretching apparatus, it is preferable to use an apparatus that can independently control the film gripping length (distance from the start of gripping to the end of gripping) left and right by the left and right gripping means of the tenter. In the tenter process, it is also preferable to intentionally create sections having different temperatures in order to improve planarity.
 また、異なる温度区画の間にそれぞれの区画が干渉を起こさないように、ニュートラルゾーンを設けることも好ましい。 It is also preferable to provide a neutral zone between different temperature zones so that each zone does not cause interference.
 (延伸・幅保持)
 続いて、金属支持体よりウェブを少なくとも一方向に延伸処理することが好ましい。延伸処理することでフィルム内の分子の配向を制御することができる。本発明において目標とするリターデーション値Ro、Rtを得るには、セルロースエステルフィルムが本発明の構成をとり、リターデーション上昇剤を含む場合であっても、さらに搬送張力の制御、延伸操作により屈折率制御を行うことが好ましい。例えば、長手方向の張力を低くまたは高くすることでレターデーション値を変動させることが可能となる。
(Stretching / width retention)
Subsequently, the web is preferably stretched in at least one direction from the metal support. The orientation of molecules in the film can be controlled by the stretching treatment. In order to obtain the target retardation values Ro and Rt in the present invention, even if the cellulose ester film has the configuration of the present invention and contains a retardation increasing agent, it is further refracted by controlling the conveying tension and stretching operation. It is preferable to perform rate control. For example, the retardation value can be changed by lowering or increasing the tension in the longitudinal direction.
 具体的な延伸方法としては、フィルムの長手方向(製膜方向;流延方向;MD方向)およびフィルム面内で直交する方向、即ち幅手方向(TD方向)に対して、逐次または同時に2軸延伸もしくは一軸延伸することができる。好ましくは、流延方向(MD方向)、幅手方向(TD方向)に二軸延伸を実施した、二軸延伸フィルムであるが、本発明に係るセルロースエステルフィルムは一軸延伸フィルムであってもよいし、未延伸フィルムであってもよい。なお、延伸操作は多段階に分割して実施してもよい。また、二軸延伸を行う場合には同時二軸延伸を行ってもよいし、段階的に実施してもよい。この場合、段階的とは、例えば、延伸方向の異なる延伸を順次行うことも可能であるし、同一方向の延伸を多段階に分割し、かつ異なる方向の延伸をそのいずれかの段階に加えることも可能である。即ち、例えば、次のような延伸ステップも可能である:
 ・流延方向に延伸→幅手方向に延伸→流延方向に延伸→流延方向に延伸
 ・幅手方向に延伸→幅手方向に延伸→流延方向に延伸→流延方向に延伸
 また、同時2軸延伸には、一方向に延伸し、もう一方を、張力を緩和して収縮させる場合も含まれる。
As a specific stretching method, two axes are sequentially or simultaneously applied to the longitudinal direction (film forming direction; casting direction; MD direction) of the film and the direction orthogonal to the film plane, that is, the width direction (TD direction). Stretching or uniaxial stretching can be performed. Preferably, it is a biaxially stretched film that is biaxially stretched in the casting direction (MD direction) and the width direction (TD direction), but the cellulose ester film according to the present invention may be a uniaxially stretched film. And an unstretched film may be sufficient. The stretching operation may be performed in multiple stages. When biaxial stretching is performed, simultaneous biaxial stretching may be performed or may be performed stepwise. In this case, stepwise means that, for example, stretching in different stretching directions can be sequentially performed, stretching in the same direction is divided into multiple stages, and stretching in different directions is added to any one of the stages. Is also possible. Thus, for example, the following stretching steps are possible:
-Stretch in the casting direction-> Stretch in the width direction-> Stretch in the casting direction-> Stretch in the casting direction-Stretch in the width direction-> Stretch in the width direction-> Stretch in the casting direction-> Stretch in the casting direction Simultaneous biaxial stretching includes stretching in one direction and contracting the other while relaxing the tension.
 互いに直交する2軸方向の延伸倍率は、それぞれ最終的には流延方向(MD方向)に0.01~2.0%、幅手方向に10~50%の範囲とすることが好ましく、流延方向に0.1~1.0%、幅手方向に20~40%の範囲が好ましい。この時の残留溶媒量は15~40%の範囲であることが、セルロースエステルフィルムが所定のタフネスの値を示すようにするためには好ましい。 The draw ratios in the biaxial directions perpendicular to each other are preferably in the range of 0.01 to 2.0% in the casting direction (MD direction) and 10 to 50% in the width direction, respectively. A range of 0.1 to 1.0% in the extending direction and 20 to 40% in the width direction is preferable. The residual solvent amount at this time is preferably in the range of 15 to 40% so that the cellulose ester film exhibits a predetermined toughness value.
 延伸温度は、通常、フィルムを構成する樹脂のTg~Tg+60℃の温度範囲で行われることが好ましい。通常、延伸温度は120℃~200℃が好ましく、さらに好ましくは130℃~200℃であり、さらに好ましくは140℃を超えて190℃以下で延伸するのが好ましい。 The stretching temperature is usually preferably performed in the temperature range of Tg to Tg + 60 ° C. of the resin constituting the film. Usually, the stretching temperature is preferably from 120 ° C. to 200 ° C., more preferably from 130 ° C. to 200 ° C., and more preferably from 140 ° C. to 190 ° C. or less.
 延伸時におけるフィルム中の残留溶媒量について特に制限はないが、セルロースエステルフィルムが所定のタフネスの値を示すようにするためには、幅方向の延伸処理の際の残留溶媒量は2~5質量%であることが好ましい。 The amount of residual solvent in the film at the time of stretching is not particularly limited, but in order for the cellulose ester film to exhibit a predetermined toughness value, the amount of residual solvent at the time of stretching in the width direction is 2 to 5 mass. % Is preferred.
 ウェブを延伸する方法には特に限定はない。例えば、複数のロールに周速差をつけ、その間でロール周速差を利用して縦方向に延伸する方法、ウェブの両端をクリップやピンで固定し、クリップやピンの間隔を進行方向に広げて縦方向に延伸する方法、同様に横方向に広げて横方向に延伸する方法、あるいは縦横同時に広げて縦横両方向に延伸する方法などが挙げられる。もちろんこれらの方法は、組み合わせて用いてもよい。中でも、ウェブの両端をクリップ等で把持するテンター方式で幅方向(横方向)に延伸を行うことが特に好ましい。 There is no particular limitation on the method of stretching the web. For example, a method in which a difference in peripheral speed is applied to a plurality of rolls, and the roll peripheral speed difference is used to stretch in the longitudinal direction, the both ends of the web are fixed with clips and pins, and the interval between the clips and pins is increased in the traveling direction And a method of stretching in the vertical direction, a method of stretching in the horizontal direction and stretching in the horizontal direction, a method of stretching in the vertical and horizontal directions and stretching in both the vertical and horizontal directions, and the like. Of course, these methods may be used in combination. Among them, it is particularly preferable to perform stretching in the width direction (lateral direction) by a tenter method in which both ends of the web are gripped by clips or the like.
 また、所謂テンター法の場合、リニアドライブ方式でクリップ部分を駆動すると滑らかな延伸を行うことができ、破断等の危険性が減少できるので好ましい。 Also, in the case of the so-called tenter method, driving the clip portion by the linear drive method is preferable because smooth stretching can be performed and the risk of breakage and the like can be reduced.
 製膜工程のこれらの幅保持あるいは横方向の延伸はテンターによって行うことが好ましく、ピンテンターでもクリップテンターでもよい。 It is preferable to carry out the width maintenance or lateral stretching in the film forming step by a tenter, and it may be a pin tenter or a clip tenter.
 本発明に係るセルロースエステルフィルムの遅相軸または進相軸がフィルム面内に存在し、フィルム全幅、全長において、製膜方向とのなす角をθ1とするとθ1は-1°以上+1°以下であることが好ましく、-0.5°以上+0.5°以下、さらに好ましくは-0.2°以上+0.2°以下であることがより好ましい。 The slow axis or the fast axis of the cellulose ester film according to the present invention exists in the film plane, and θ1 is −1 ° or more and + 1 ° or less when the angle formed with the film forming direction is θ1 in the entire film width and length. It is preferably −0.5 ° or more and + 0.5 ° or less, more preferably −0.2 ° or more and + 0.2 ° or less.
 このθ1は配向角として定義でき、θ1の測定は、自動複屈折計KOBRA-21ADH(王子計測機器)を用いて行うことができる。θ1が各々上記関係を満たすことは、表示画像において高い輝度を得ること、光漏れを抑制または防止することに寄与でき、カラー液晶表示装置においては忠実な色再現を得ることに寄与できる。 This θ1 can be defined as an orientation angle, and θ1 can be measured using an automatic birefringence meter KOBRA-21ADH (Oji Scientific Instruments). Each of θ1 satisfying the above relationship can contribute to obtaining high luminance in a display image, suppressing or preventing light leakage, and contributing to obtaining faithful color reproduction in a color liquid crystal display device.
 6)巻き取り工程
 最後に、得られたウェブ(仕上がったフィルム)を巻取ることにより、セルロースエステルフィルムが得られる。より具体的には、ウェブ中の残留溶媒量が2質量%以下となってからフィルムとして巻き取り機37により巻き取る工程であり、残留溶媒量を0.4質量%以下にすることにより寸法安定性の良好なフィルムを得ることができる。特に0.00~0.10質量%の範囲で巻き取ることが好ましい。
6) Winding process Finally, a cellulose ester film is obtained by winding the obtained web (finished film). More specifically, it is a step of winding the film as a film by a winder 37 after the residual solvent amount in the web becomes 2% by mass or less, and the dimensional stability is achieved by setting the residual solvent amount to 0.4% by mass or less. A film having good properties can be obtained. In particular, it is preferable to wind in the range of 0.00 to 0.10% by mass.
 巻き取り方法は、一般に使用されているものを用いればよく、定トルク法、定テンション法、テーパーテンション法、内部応力一定のプログラムテンションコントロール法等があり、それらを使いわければよい。 As a winding method, a generally used one may be used, and there are a constant torque method, a constant tension method, a taper tension method, a program tension control method with a constant internal stress, etc., and these may be used properly.
 巻き取る前に、製品となる幅に端部をスリットして裁ち落とし、巻き中の貼り付きや擦り傷防止のために、ナール加工(エンボッシング加工)を両端に施してもよい。ナール加工の方法は凸凹のパターンを側面に有する金属リングを加熱や加圧により加工することができる。なお、フィルム両端部のクリップの把持部分は、通常はフィルムが変形しており、製品として使用できないので切除される。熱による材料の劣化が起こっていない場合は、回収後に再利用される。 Before winding, the end may be slit and cut to the product width, and knurled (embossed) may be applied to both ends to prevent sticking and scratching during winding. The knurling method can process a metal ring having an uneven pattern on its side surface by heating or pressing. Note that the clip holding portions at both ends of the film are usually cut off because the film is deformed and cannot be used as a product. If the material has not deteriorated due to heat, it is reused after recovery.
 セルロースエステルフィルムは、長尺フィルムであることが好ましく、具体的には、100m~10000m程度のものを示し、通常、ロール状で提供される形態のものである。また、フィルムの幅は、液晶表示装置の大型化や生産の効率化の要求に応えるべく、1.4~4mであることが好ましく、1.4~4mであることがより好ましく、1.6~3mであることがさらに好ましい。 The cellulose ester film is preferably a long film. Specifically, the cellulose ester film has a thickness of about 100 m to 10000 m, and is usually in the form of a roll. Further, the width of the film is preferably 1.4 to 4 m, more preferably 1.4 to 4 m, and more preferably 1.6 to 4 m in order to meet demands for an increase in the size of liquid crystal display devices and production efficiency. More preferably, it is ˜3 m.
 上記方法により作製したセルロースエステルフィルム積層体は、外周部に包装加工を施した後、50℃以上の条件下で、3日以上のエージング処理を施すことが好ましい。かような処理を施すことによって、セルロースエステルフィルムのタフネスを上述した好ましい範囲内の値に制御することが可能となり、寸法安定性向上の観点からもこの範囲内の値に制御することが好ましい。 The cellulose ester film laminate produced by the above method is preferably subjected to aging treatment for 3 days or more under conditions of 50 ° C. or higher after the outer peripheral portion is packaged. By performing such treatment, it becomes possible to control the toughness of the cellulose ester film to a value within the above-mentioned preferable range, and it is preferable to control to a value within this range from the viewpoint of improving dimensional stability.
 [偏光子]
 本発明の偏光板の主たる構成要素である偏光子は、一定方向の偏波面の光だけを通す素子であり、現在知られている代表的な偏光子は、ポリビニルアルコール系偏光フィルムである。ポリビニルアルコール系偏光フィルムには、ポリビニルアルコール系フィルムにヨウ素を染色させたものと、二色性染料を染色させたものとがある。
偏光子としては、ポリビニルアルコール水溶液を製膜し、これを一軸延伸させて染色するか、染色した後一軸延伸してから、好ましくはホウ素化合物で耐久性処理を行った偏光子が用いられうる。偏光子の膜厚は2~30μmが好ましく、また薄膜適性の観点から2~15μmが好ましい、さらには3~10μmであることがさらなる薄膜適性および取り扱い性の観点から好ましい。
[Polarizer]
The polarizer, which is the main component of the polarizing plate of the present invention, is an element that passes only light having a plane of polarization in a certain direction, and a typical known polarizer is a polyvinyl alcohol polarizing film. The polyvinyl alcohol polarizing film includes those obtained by dyeing iodine on a polyvinyl alcohol film and those obtained by dyeing a dichroic dye.
As the polarizer, a polarizer obtained by forming a polyvinyl alcohol aqueous solution into a film and dyeing it by uniaxial stretching or dyeing and then uniaxially stretching and then preferably performing a durability treatment with a boron compound may be used. The thickness of the polarizer is preferably 2 to 30 μm, more preferably 2 to 15 μm from the viewpoint of thin film suitability, and further preferably 3 to 10 μm from the viewpoint of further thin film suitability and handleability.
 また、特開2003-248123号公報、特開2003-342322号公報等に記載のエチレン単位の含有量1~4モル%、重合度2000~4000、ケン化度99.0~99.99モル%のエチレン変性ポリビニルアルコールも好ましく用いられる。なかでも、熱水切断温度が66~73℃であるエチレン変性ポリビニルアルコールフィルムが好ましく用いられる。このエチレン変性ポリビニルアルコールフィルムを用いた偏光子は、偏光性能及び耐久性能に優れているうえに、色斑が少なく、大型液晶表示装置に特に好ましく用いられる。 Further, the ethylene unit content described in JP-A-2003-248123, JP-A-2003-342322, etc. is 1 to 4 mol%, the degree of polymerization is 2000 to 4000, and the degree of saponification is 99.0 to 99.99 mol%. The ethylene-modified polyvinyl alcohol is also preferably used. Of these, an ethylene-modified polyvinyl alcohol film having a hot water cutting temperature of 66 to 73 ° C. is preferably used. A polarizer using this ethylene-modified polyvinyl alcohol film is excellent in polarization performance and durability, and has few color spots, and is particularly preferably used for a large-sized liquid crystal display device.
 また、特開2011-100161号公報、特許第4691205号公報、特許4751481号公報、特許第4804589号公報に記載の方法で、塗布型偏光子を作製し本発明に係るセルロースエステルフィルムと貼り合わせて偏光板を作製することも好ましい。 In addition, a coating-type polarizer is prepared by the method described in JP 2011-1000016 A, JP 4691205 A, JP 4751481 A, and JP 4804589 A and bonded to the cellulose ester film according to the present invention. It is also preferable to produce a polarizing plate.
 [紫外線硬化型接着剤]
 本発明の偏光板においては、図1に示すように、上記説明した保護フィルムA及び保護フィルムBのそれぞれと、偏光子とが、紫外線硬化型接着剤により貼合されていることが好ましい。
[UV curable adhesive]
In the polarizing plate of this invention, as shown in FIG. 1, it is preferable that each of the protective film A and the protective film B demonstrated above and the polarizer are bonded by the ultraviolet curable adhesive.
 本発明においては、保護フィルムAと偏光子との貼合、あるいは保護フィルムBと偏光子との貼合に紫外線硬化型接着剤を適用することにより、高生産性で、偏光子の耐久性に優れた特性を得ることができる。 In the present invention, by applying an ultraviolet curable adhesive to the bonding between the protective film A and the polarizer or the bonding between the protective film B and the polarizer, the productivity is high and the durability of the polarizer is increased. Excellent properties can be obtained.
 〔紫外線硬化型接着剤の組成〕
 偏光板用の紫外線硬化型接着剤組成物としては、光ラジカル重合を利用した光ラジカル重合型組成物、光カチオン重合を利用した光カチオン重合型組成物、並びに光ラジカル重合及び光カチオン重合を併用したハイブリッド型組成物が知られている。
[Composition of UV curable adhesive]
As the UV curable adhesive composition for polarizing plates, a photo radical polymerization composition using photo radical polymerization, a photo cation polymerization composition using photo cation polymerization, and photo radical polymerization and photo cation polymerization are used in combination. Hybrid type compositions are known.
 光ラジカル重合型組成物としては、特開2008-009329号公報に記載のヒドロキシ基やカルボキシ基等の極性基を含有するラジカル重合性化合物及び極性基を含有しないラジカル重合性化合物を特定割合で含む組成物)等が知られている。特に、ラジカル重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合可能なエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物であることが好ましい。ラジカル重合可能なエチレン性不飽和結合を有する化合物の好ましい例には、(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する化合物が含まれる。(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する化合物の例には、N置換(メタ)アクリルアミド系化合物、(メタ)アクリレート系化合物などが含まれる。(メタ)アクリルアミドは、アクリアミド又はメタクリアミドを意味する。 The radical photopolymerizable composition includes a radically polymerizable compound containing a polar group such as a hydroxy group and a carboxy group described in JP-A-2008-009329 and a radically polymerizable compound not containing a polar group at a specific ratio. Composition) and the like are known. In particular, the radical polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having a radical polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated bond. Preferable examples of the compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond capable of radical polymerization include a compound having a (meth) acryloyl group. Examples of the compound having a (meth) acryloyl group include an N-substituted (meth) acrylamide compound and a (meth) acrylate compound. (Meth) acrylamide means acrylamide or methacrylamide.
 また、光カチオン重合型組成物としては、特開2011-028234号公報に開示されているような、(α)カチオン重合性化合物、(β)光カチオン重合開始剤、(γ)380nmより長い波長の光に極大吸収を示す光増感剤、及び(δ)ナフタレン系光増感助剤の各成分を含有する紫外線硬化型接着剤組成物が挙げられる。ただし、これ以外の紫外線硬化型接着剤が用いられてもよい。 In addition, as the cationic photopolymerization type composition, as disclosed in JP2011-08234A, (α) a cationic polymerizable compound, (β) a cationic photopolymerization initiator, and (γ) a wavelength longer than 380 nm. And an ultraviolet curable adhesive composition containing each component of a photosensitizer exhibiting maximum absorption in the light of (δ) and a naphthalene-based photosensitization aid. However, other ultraviolet curable adhesives may be used.
 (前処理工程)
 前処理工程は、セルロースエステルフィルムの、偏光子との接着面に易接着処理を行う工程である。偏光子の両面のそれぞれに保護フィルムA及び保護フィルムBを接着させる場合は、それぞれの保護フィルムの、偏光子との接着面に易接着処理を行う。易接着処理としては、コロナ処理、プラズマ処理等が挙げられる。
(Pretreatment process)
A pre-processing process is a process of performing an easily bonding process to the adhesive surface of a cellulose-ester film with a polarizer. In the case where the protective film A and the protective film B are bonded to both surfaces of the polarizer, an easy adhesion treatment is performed on the surface of each protective film that is bonded to the polarizer. Examples of the easy adhesion treatment include corona treatment and plasma treatment.
 (紫外線硬化型接着剤の塗布工程)
 紫外線硬化型接着剤の塗布工程としては、偏光子と保護フィルムとの接着面のうち少なくとも一方に、上記紫外線硬化型接着剤を塗布する。偏光子または保護フィルムの表面に直接、紫外線硬化型接着剤を塗布する場合、その塗布方法に特段の限定はない。例えば、ドクターブレード、ワイヤーバー、ダイコーター、カンマコーター、グラビアコーター等、種々の湿式塗布方式が利用できる。また、偏光子と保護フィルムの間に、紫外線硬化型接着剤を流延させたのち、ロール等で加圧して均一に押し広げる方法も利用できる。
(Application process of UV curable adhesive)
In the step of applying the ultraviolet curable adhesive, the ultraviolet curable adhesive is applied to at least one of the adhesive surfaces of the polarizer and the protective film. When the ultraviolet curable adhesive is applied directly to the surface of the polarizer or the protective film, the application method is not particularly limited. For example, various wet coating methods such as a doctor blade, a wire bar, a die coater, a comma coater, and a gravure coater can be used. Moreover, after casting an ultraviolet curable adhesive between a polarizer and a protective film, the method of pressurizing with a roll etc. and spreading it uniformly can also be utilized.
 (貼合工程)
 上記の方法により紫外線硬化型接着剤を塗布した後は、貼合工程で処理される。この貼合工程では、例えば、先の塗布工程で偏光子の表面に紫外線硬化型接着剤を塗布した場合、そこに保護フィルムが重ね合わされる。先の塗布工程で、はじめに保護フィルムの表面に紫外線硬化型接着剤を塗布する方式の場合には、そこに偏光子が重ね合わされる。また、偏光子と保護フィルムの間に紫外線硬化型接着剤を流延させた場合は、その状態で偏光子と保護フィルムAとが重ね合わされる。偏光子の両面に保護フィルムA及び保護フィルムBをそれぞれ接着する場合であって、両面とも紫外線硬化型接着剤を用いる場合は、偏光子の両面にそれぞれ、紫外線硬化型接着剤を介して保護フィルムA及び保護フィルムBが重ね合わされる。そして、通常は、この状態で両面(偏光子の片面に保護フィルムAを重ね合わせた場合は、偏光子側と保護フィルムA側、また偏光子の両面に保護フィルムA及び保護フィルムBを重ね合わせた場合は、その両面の保護フィルムA及び保護フィルムB側)から加圧ローラー等で挟んで加圧することになる。加圧ローラーの材質は、金属やゴム等を用いることが可能である。両面に配置される加圧ローラーは、同じ材質であってもよいし、異なる材質であってもよい。
(Bonding process)
After apply | coating a ultraviolet curable adhesive by said method, it processes by a bonding process. In this bonding step, for example, when an ultraviolet curable adhesive is applied to the surface of the polarizer in the previous application step, a protective film is superimposed thereon. In the case of a system in which an ultraviolet curable adhesive is first applied to the surface of the protective film in the previous application step, a polarizer is superimposed thereon. Moreover, when the ultraviolet curable adhesive is cast between the polarizer and the protective film, the polarizer and the protective film A are superposed in that state. In the case where the protective film A and the protective film B are bonded to both surfaces of the polarizer, respectively, and both surfaces use an ultraviolet curable adhesive, the protective film is provided on both surfaces of the polarizer via an ultraviolet curable adhesive. A and protective film B are overlaid. Usually, in this state, both sides (when the protective film A is superposed on one side of the polarizer, the protective film A and the protective film B are superposed on the polarizer side and the protective film A side, and on both sides of the polarizer. In such a case, the pressure is sandwiched between a pressure roller or the like from the protective film A and the protective film B side). Metal, rubber, or the like can be used as the material of the pressure roller. The pressure rollers arranged on both sides may be made of the same material or different materials.
 (硬化工程)
 硬化工程では、未硬化の紫外線硬化型接着剤に紫外線を照射して、カチオン重合性化合物(例えば、エポキシ化合物やオキセタン化合物)やラジカル重合性化合物(例えば、アクリレート系化合物、アクリルアミド系化合物等)を含む紫外線硬化型接着剤層を硬化させ、紫外線硬化型接着剤を介して重ね合わせた偏光子と保護フィルムA、あるいは偏光子と保護フィルムBとを接着させる。偏光子の片面に保護フィルムAを貼合する場合、活性エネルギー線は、偏光子側又は保護フィルムA側のいずれから照射してもよい。また、偏光子の両面に保護フィルムA及び保護フィルムBを貼合する場合、偏光子の両面にそれぞれ紫外線硬化型接着剤を介して保護フィルムA及び保護フィルムBを重ね合わせた状態で、紫外線を照射し、両面の紫外線硬化型接着剤を同時に硬化させるのが有利である。
(Curing process)
In the curing step, an uncured ultraviolet curable adhesive is irradiated with ultraviolet rays, and a cationic polymerizable compound (for example, epoxy compound or oxetane compound) or a radical polymerizable compound (for example, acrylate compound, acrylamide compound, etc.) The ultraviolet curable adhesive layer that is included is cured, and the polarizer and the protective film A or the polarizer and the protective film B that are superposed with each other are bonded via the ultraviolet curable adhesive. When bonding the protective film A to the single side | surface of a polarizer, you may irradiate an active energy ray from either the polarizer side or the protective film A side. In addition, when the protective film A and the protective film B are bonded to both surfaces of the polarizer, ultraviolet rays are applied in a state where the protective film A and the protective film B are superimposed on the both surfaces of the polarizer via an ultraviolet curable adhesive, respectively. It is advantageous to irradiate and simultaneously cure the UV curable adhesive on both sides.
 紫外線の照射条件は、本発明に適用する紫外線硬化型接着剤を硬化しうる条件であれば、任意の適切な条件を採用できる。紫外線の照射量は積算光量で50~1500mJ/cmであることが好ましく、100~500mJ/cmであるのがさらに好ましい。 Any appropriate conditions can be adopted as the ultraviolet irradiation conditions as long as the ultraviolet curable adhesive applied to the present invention can be cured. Preferably the dose of ultraviolet is 50 ~ 1500mJ / cm 2 in accumulated light quantity, and even more preferably 100 ~ 500mJ / cm 2.
 偏光板の製造工程を連続ラインで行う場合、ライン速度は、接着剤の硬化時間によるが、好ましくは1~500m/min、より好ましくは5~300m/min、さらに好ましくは10~100m/minである。ライン速度が1m/min以上であれば、生産性を確保することができ、又は保護フィルムAへのダメージを抑制することができ、耐久性に優れた偏光板を作製することができる。また、ライン速度が500m/min以下であれば、紫外線硬化型接着剤の硬化が十分となり、目的とする硬度を備え、接着性に優れた紫外線硬化型接着剤層を形成することができる。 When the production process of the polarizing plate is performed in a continuous line, the line speed depends on the curing time of the adhesive, but is preferably 1 to 500 m / min, more preferably 5 to 300 m / min, and further preferably 10 to 100 m / min. is there. If the line speed is 1 m / min or more, productivity can be ensured, or damage to the protective film A can be suppressed, and a polarizing plate having excellent durability can be produced. If the line speed is 500 m / min or less, the ultraviolet curable adhesive is sufficiently cured, and an ultraviolet curable adhesive layer having a desired hardness and excellent adhesiveness can be formed.
 《表示装置》
 本発明に係る偏光板は、種々の表示装置に用いることができるが、特に、液晶表示装置に適用することが好ましい。
<Display device>
The polarizing plate according to the present invention can be used for various display devices, but is particularly preferably applied to a liquid crystal display device.
 本発明の偏光板を具備する液晶表示装置としては、TN(TwistedNematic)方式、STN(Super Twisted Nematic)方式、IPS(In-Plane Switching)方式、OCB(Optically CompensatedBirefringence)方式、VA(Vertical Alignment)方式(MVA;Multi-domain Vertical AlignmentやPVA;Patterned Vertical Alignmentも含む)、HAN(HybridAligned Nematic)等に好ましく用いることができる。コントラストを高めるためには、VA(MVA、PVA)方式が好ましい。 As a liquid crystal display device having the polarizing plate of the present invention, a TN (Twisted Nematic) method, a STN (Super Twisted Nematic) method, an IPS (In-Plane Switched) method, an OCB (Optically Compensated Birefringence Vrefringence Virgent Affinity A nt Virgentence V irencement V irencement V irencement V irencement V irencement V refrenceence method. It can be preferably used for MVA (including Multi-domain / Vertical / Alignment and PVA; Patterned / Vertical / Alignment), HAN (Hybrid Aligned / Nematic), and the like. In order to increase the contrast, the VA (MVA, PVA) method is preferable.
 以下、実施例を挙げて本発明を具体的に説明するが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。なお、実施例において「%」の表示を用いるが、特に断りがない限り「質量%」を表す。 Hereinafter, the present invention will be specifically described with reference to examples, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, although the display of "%" is used in an Example, unless otherwise indicated, "mass%" is represented.
 《保護フィルムAとしてのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムの作製》
 (製造例1:PET(A)の製造)
 エステル化反応缶を昇温し200℃に到達した時点で、テレフタル酸を86.4質量部およびエチレングリコール64.6質量部を仕込み、撹拌しながら触媒として三酸化アンチモンを0.017質量部、酢酸マグネシウム4水和物を0.064質量部、トリエチルアミン0.16質量部を仕込んだ。次いで、加圧昇温を行いゲージ圧0.34MPa、240℃の条件で加圧エステル化反応を行った後、エステル化反応缶を常圧に戻し、リン酸0.014質量部を添加した。さらに、15分かけて260℃に昇温し、リン酸トリメチル0.012質量部を添加した。次いで15分後に、高圧分散機で分散処理を行い、15分後、得られたエステル化反応生成物を重縮合反応缶に移送し、280℃で減圧下重縮合反応を行った。
<< Preparation of polyethylene terephthalate film as protective film A >>
(Production Example 1: Production of PET (A))
When the temperature of the esterification reactor was raised to 200 ° C., 86.4 parts by mass of terephthalic acid and 64.6 parts by mass of ethylene glycol were charged and 0.017 parts by mass of antimony trioxide as a catalyst while stirring. 0.064 parts by mass of magnesium acetate tetrahydrate and 0.16 parts by mass of triethylamine were charged. Subsequently, the pressure was increased and the pressure esterification reaction was performed under conditions of a gauge pressure of 0.34 MPa and 240 ° C., and then the esterification reaction vessel was returned to normal pressure, and 0.014 parts by mass of phosphoric acid was added. Furthermore, it heated up to 260 degreeC over 15 minutes, and 0.012 mass part of trimethyl phosphate was added. Then, after 15 minutes, dispersion treatment was performed with a high-pressure disperser, and after 15 minutes, the obtained esterification reaction product was transferred to a polycondensation reaction can and subjected to polycondensation reaction at 280 ° C. under reduced pressure.
 重縮合反応終了後、95%カット径が5μmのナスロン(登録商標)製フィルターで濾過処理を行い、ノズルからストランド状に押出し、予め濾過処理(孔径:1μm以下)を行った冷却水を用いて冷却、固化させ、ペレット状にカットした(得られたものを「PET(A)」とも称する)。 After completion of the polycondensation reaction, filtration is performed with a filter made of NASRON (registered trademark) with a 95% cut diameter of 5 μm, extruded into a strand form from a nozzle, and using cooling water that has been previously filtered (pore diameter: 1 μm or less). The mixture was cooled and solidified, and was cut into pellets (the resultant was also referred to as “PET (A)”).
 (製造例2:PET(B)の製造)
 乾燥させた紫外線吸収剤(2,2’-(1,4-フェニレン)ビス(4H-3,1-ベンズオキサジノン-4-オン)10質量部、粒子を含有しないPET(A)90質量部を混合し、混練押出機を用い、紫外線吸収剤を含有するポリエチレンテレフタレート樹脂(B)を得た(得られたものを「PET(B)」とも称する)。
(Production Example 2: Production of PET (B))
10 parts by weight of dried UV absorber (2,2 ′-(1,4-phenylene) bis (4H-3,1-benzoxazinon-4-one), 90 parts by weight of PET (A) containing no particles And a polyethylene terephthalate resin (B) containing an ultraviolet absorber was obtained using a kneading extruder (the obtained one is also referred to as “PET (B)”).
 (製造例3:接着性改質塗布液の調製)
 常法によりエステル交換反応および重縮合反応を行って、ジカルボン酸成分として(ジカルボン酸成分全体に対して)テレフタル酸46モル%、イソフタル酸46モル%および5-スルホナトイソフタル酸ナトリウム8モル%、グリコール成分として(グリコール成分全体に対して)エチレングリコール50モル%およびネオペンチルグリコール50モル%の組成の水分散性スルホン酸金属塩基含有共重合ポリエステル樹脂を調製した。次いで、水51.4質量部、イソプロピルアルコール38質量部、n-ブチルセルソルブ5質量部、ノニオン系界面活性剤0.06質量部を混合した後、加熱撹拌し、77℃に達したら、上記水分散性スルホン酸金属塩基含有共重合ポリエステル樹脂5質量部を加え、樹脂の固まりが無くなるまで撹拌し続けた。その後、樹脂水分散液を常温まで冷却して、固形分濃度5.0質量%の均一な水分散性共重合ポリエステル樹脂液を得た。さらに、凝集体シリカ粒子(富士シリシア(株)社製、サイリシア310)3質量部を水50質量部に分散させた後、上記水分散性共重合ポリエステル樹脂液99.46質量部にサイリシア310の水分散液0.54質量部を加えて、撹拌しながら水20質量部を加えて、接着性改質塗布液を得た。
(Production Example 3: Preparation of Adhesive Modified Coating Solution)
A transesterification reaction and a polycondensation reaction were carried out by a conventional method, and as a dicarboxylic acid component (based on the total dicarboxylic acid component) 46 mol% terephthalic acid, 46 mol% isophthalic acid and 8 mol% sodium 5-sulfonatoisophthalate, A water-dispersible sulfonic acid metal base-containing copolymer polyester resin having a composition of 50 mol% ethylene glycol and 50 mol% neopentyl glycol as a glycol component (based on the entire glycol component) was prepared. Next, 51.4 parts by mass of water, 38 parts by mass of isopropyl alcohol, 5 parts by mass of n-butyl cellosolve, 0.06 parts by mass of a nonionic surfactant were mixed and then heated and stirred. 5 parts by mass of a water-dispersible sulfonic acid metal base-containing copolymer polyester resin was added, and stirring was continued until the resin was no longer solidified. Thereafter, the resin water dispersion was cooled to room temperature to obtain a uniform water dispersible copolyester resin liquid having a solid concentration of 5.0% by mass. Furthermore, after dispersing 3 parts by mass of aggregated silica particles (Silicia 310, manufactured by Fuji Silysia Co., Ltd.) in 50 parts by mass of water, 99.46 parts by mass of the water-dispersible copolyester resin solution was mixed with 99.46 parts by mass of the silicia 310. 0.54 parts by mass of the aqueous dispersion was added, and 20 parts by mass of water was added with stirring to obtain an adhesive modified coating solution.
 〔PETフィルム1の作製〕
 以下の手法により、3層構成を有するポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムを作製した。
[Preparation of PET film 1]
A polyethylene terephthalate film having a three-layer structure was produced by the following method.
 粒子を含有しないPET(A)樹脂ペレット90質量部と紫外線吸収剤を含有したPET(B)樹脂ペレット10質量部を135℃で6時間減圧乾燥(1Torr)した後、押出機(中間層用)に供給し、また、PET(A)を常法により乾燥して押出機(両外層用)にそれぞれ供給し、285℃で溶解した。この2種のポリマーを、それぞれステンレス焼結体の濾材(公称濾過精度10μm粒子95%カット)で2回ずつ濾過し、2種3層合流ブロックにて積層し、口金よりシート状にして押し出した後、静電印加キャスト法を用いて表面温度30℃のキャスティングドラムに巻きつけて冷却固化し、未延伸フィルムを得た。この際、各層の厚さの比は10(外層):80(中間層):10(外層)となるように各押し出し機の吐出量を調整した。 90 parts by weight of PET (A) resin pellets containing no particles and 10 parts by weight of PET (B) resin pellets containing an ultraviolet absorber were dried under reduced pressure (1 Torr) at 135 ° C. for 6 hours, and then an extruder (for intermediate layer) In addition, PET (A) was dried by a conventional method and supplied to an extruder (for both outer layers) and dissolved at 285 ° C. These two types of polymers were each filtered twice with a filter medium made of a sintered stainless steel (nominal filtration accuracy of 10 μm particles, 95% cut), laminated in a two-type, three-layer confluence block, and extruded into a sheet form from the die. Thereafter, the film was wound around a casting drum having a surface temperature of 30 ° C. using an electrostatic application casting method, and solidified by cooling to obtain an unstretched film. At this time, the discharge amount of each extruder was adjusted so that the thickness ratio of each layer was 10 (outer layer): 80 (intermediate layer): 10 (outer layer).
 次いで、リバースロール法によりこの未延伸PETフィルムの両面に乾燥後の塗布量が0.08g/m2になるように、上記接着性改質塗布液を塗布した後、80℃で20秒間乾燥した。 Next, after applying the above-mentioned adhesive property-modified coating solution on the both sides of this unstretched PET film by a reverse roll method so that the coating amount after drying becomes 0.08 g / m 2 , it was dried at 80 ° C. for 20 seconds. .
 この塗布層を形成した未延伸フィルムを、加熱されたロール群および赤外線ヒーターを用いて145℃に予備加熱し、その後周速差のあるロール群で走行方向(MD方向)に3倍延伸した。その後、テンター延伸機に導き、フィルムの端部をクリップで把持しながら、温度135℃の熱風ゾーンに導き、幅方向(TD方向)に4倍延伸した。このようにして、二軸配向のPETフィルム1(フィルム厚み60μm)を得た。 The unstretched film on which this coating layer was formed was preheated to 145 ° C. using a heated roll group and an infrared heater, and then stretched 3 times in the running direction (MD direction) with a roll group having a difference in peripheral speed. Thereafter, the film was guided to a tenter stretching machine and guided to a hot air zone having a temperature of 135 ° C. while being gripped by a clip, and stretched 4 times in the width direction (TD direction). In this way, a biaxially oriented PET film 1 (film thickness 60 μm) was obtained.
 〔PETフィルム2~17の作製〕
 PETフィルム1の作製において、静電印加キャスト法による製膜前の溶融ポリマーの濾過の回数、MD方向の延伸前の予備加熱の有無、MD方向およびTD方向の延伸倍率、並びに、フィルムの膜厚の各製造条件を、下記の表1に示すように変更したこと以外は同様にして、PETフィルム2~17をそれぞれ作製した。
[Preparation of PET films 2 to 17]
In the production of the PET film 1, the number of filtrations of the molten polymer before film formation by the electrostatic application casting method, the presence or absence of preheating before stretching in the MD direction, the stretching ratio in the MD direction and the TD direction, and the film thickness of the film PET films 2 to 17 were produced in the same manner except that the production conditions were changed as shown in Table 1 below.
 〔PETフィルムの弾性率の評価〕
 上記で作製したPETフィルムのそれぞれについて、23℃、55%RHの環境下で24時間調湿し、JIS K7127に記載の方法に従って弾性率を測定した。引っ張り試験器としてはオリエンテック(株)社製テンシロンRTC-1225を使用し、試験片の形状は120mm(縦)×10mm(幅)とし、チャック間100mm(つかみ代上下10mmずつ)で上下を挟み試験速度は100mm/分で行った。なお、測定は1サンプルあたりMD方向およびTD方向のそれぞれについて5回ずつ測定を行い、各方向の平均値を算出した。結果を下記の表1に示す。
[Evaluation of elastic modulus of PET film]
Each of the PET films produced above was conditioned for 24 hours in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH, and the elastic modulus was measured according to the method described in JIS K7127. Tensilon RTC-1225 manufactured by Orientec Co., Ltd. is used as the tensile tester. The shape of the test piece is 120 mm (length) x 10 mm (width), and the upper and lower sides are sandwiched by 100 mm between the chucks (10 mm above and below the grip allowance). The test speed was 100 mm / min. The measurement was performed five times for each of the MD direction and the TD direction per sample, and the average value in each direction was calculated. The results are shown in Table 1 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
 《保護フィルムBとしてのセルロースアセテートフィルムの作製》
 〔セルロースアセテートフィルム1の作製〕
 (微粒子分散希釈液の調製)
 10質量部のアエロジル972V(日本アエロジル社製、一次平均粒子径:16nm、見掛け比重90g/L)と、90質量部のエタノールとをディゾルバーで30分間撹拌混合した後、高圧分散機であるマントンゴーリンを用いて分散させて、微粒子分散液を調製した。
<< Production of cellulose acetate film as protective film B >>
[Production of Cellulose Acetate Film 1]
(Preparation of fine particle dispersion)
10 parts by mass of Aerosil 972V (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd., primary average particle size: 16 nm, apparent specific gravity of 90 g / L) and 90 parts by mass of ethanol were stirred and mixed with a dissolver for 30 minutes, and then high pressure disperser Manton Gorin Was used to prepare a fine particle dispersion.
 得られた微粒子分散液に、88質量部のジクロロメタンを撹拌しながら投入し、ディゾルバーで30分間撹拌混合して、希釈した。得られた溶液をアドバンテック東洋社製ポリプロピレンワインドカートリッジフィルターTCW-PPS-1Nで濾過して、微粒子分散希釈液を得た。 Into the obtained fine particle dispersion, 88 parts by mass of dichloromethane was added with stirring, and the mixture was diluted by stirring and mixing with a dissolver for 30 minutes. The obtained solution was filtered through a polypropylene wind cartridge filter TCW-PPS-1N manufactured by Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd. to obtain a fine particle dispersion dilution.
 (インライン添加液の調製)
 紫外線吸収剤として15質量部のチヌビン928(BASFジャパン社製)と、100質量部のジクロロメタンとを密閉容器に投入し、加熱撹拌して完全に溶解させた後、濾過した。得られた溶液に、36質量部の前記微粒子分散希釈液を撹拌しながら加えて30分間さらに撹拌した後、6質量部のセルロースエステル1(アセチル基置換度2.80、Mn=75000、Mw=150000、Mw/Mn=2.0)を撹拌しながら加えて60分間さらに撹拌した。得られた溶液を、日本精線(株)製ファインメットNFで濾過して、インライン添加液を得た。濾材は、公称濾過精度20μmのものを用いた。
(Preparation of inline additive solution)
15 parts by weight of Tinuvin 928 (manufactured by BASF Japan) and 100 parts by weight of dichloromethane as an ultraviolet absorber and 100 parts by weight of dichloromethane were put into a sealed container, and heated and stirred to completely dissolve, followed by filtration. To the obtained solution, 36 parts by mass of the fine particle dispersion diluted liquid was added with stirring, and further stirred for 30 minutes, and then 6 parts by mass of cellulose ester 1 (acetyl group substitution degree 2.80, Mn = 75000, Mw = 150,000, Mw / Mn = 2.0) was added with stirring, and the mixture was further stirred for 60 minutes. The obtained solution was filtered with Finemet NF manufactured by Nippon Seisen Co., Ltd. to obtain an in-line additive solution. The filter medium having a nominal filtration accuracy of 20 μm was used.
 (ドープの調製)
 下記成分を密閉容器に投入し、加熱及び撹拌しながら完全に溶解させた。得られた溶液を安積濾紙(株)製の安積濾紙No.24で濾過して、主ドープを得た。
(Preparation of dope)
The following components were put into a sealed container and completely dissolved with heating and stirring. The obtained solution was prepared as Azumi filter paper No. manufactured by Azumi Filter Paper Co., Ltd. Filtration at 24 gave the main dope.
 〈主ドープの組成〉
 セルロースアセテート(アセチル基置換度:2.35、Mn=80000、Mw=135000、Mw/Mn=1.68) 86質量部
 エステル化合物(上記化合物FB-16) 2質量部
 糖エステル(上記化合物FA-20) 7質量部
 リターデーション上昇剤(上記化合物1-2) 2質量部
 ジクロロメタン 430質量部
 エタノール 11質量部
 100質量部の主ドープと、2.5質量部のインライン添加液とを、インラインミキサー(東レ静止型管内混合機Hi-Mixer、SWJ)で十分に混合して、ドープを得た。
<Composition of main dope>
Cellulose acetate (acetyl group substitution degree: 2.35, Mn = 80000, Mw = 135000, Mw / Mn = 1.68) 86 parts by mass Ester compound (above compound FB-16) 2 parts by mass Sugar ester (above compound FA- 20) 7 parts by mass Retardation increasing agent (compound 1-2) 2 parts by mass Dichloromethane 430 parts by mass Ethanol 11 parts by mass 100 parts by mass of main dope and 2.5 parts by mass of inline additive solution The dope was obtained by thoroughly mixing with a Toray static in-tube mixer Hi-Mixer, SWJ).
 (製膜工程)
 得られたドープを、ベルト流延装置を用いてステンレスバンド支持体上に、ドープの液温度35℃、幅1.95mの条件で均一に流延させた。ステンレスバンド支持体上で、得られたドープ膜中の有機溶媒を、残留溶媒量が30質量%になるまで蒸発させてウェブを形成した後、ステンレスバンド支持体からウェブを剥離した。得られたウェブを、35℃でさらに乾燥させた後、幅1.90mとなるようにスリットした。その後、ウェブを、160℃の条件で、周速差のあるロール群で走行方向(MD方向)に0.5%延伸した。次いで、テンターでTD方向(フィルムの幅手方向)に30%延伸した。なお、TD方向への延伸開始時のウェブの残留溶媒量は3質量%であった。
(Film forming process)
The obtained dope was uniformly cast on a stainless band support using a belt casting apparatus under the conditions of a dope liquid temperature of 35 ° C. and a width of 1.95 m. On the stainless steel band support body, the organic solvent in the obtained dope film | membrane was evaporated until the amount of residual solvents became 30 mass%, and the web was formed, Then, the web was peeled from the stainless steel band support body. The obtained web was further dried at 35 ° C. and then slit to have a width of 1.90 m. Thereafter, the web was stretched 0.5% in the running direction (MD direction) with a group of rolls having a difference in peripheral speed under the condition of 160 ° C. Subsequently, it extended | stretched 30% in TD direction (width direction of the film) with the tenter. The residual solvent amount of the web at the start of stretching in the TD direction was 3% by mass.
 その後、得られたフィルムを、乾燥装置内を多数のロールで搬送させながら120℃で15分間乾燥させた後、1.6m幅にスリットして、セルロースアセテートフィルムを得た。端部にはナーリング加工を施した。そして、このようにして得られた、幅1.6m、長さ6000m、厚さ30μmの長尺状のセルロースアセテートフィルムを長さ方向に巻き取って、セルロースアセテートフィルム1の積層ロール体1を得た。 Thereafter, the obtained film was dried at 120 ° C. for 15 minutes while being conveyed by a number of rolls in the drying apparatus, and then slit to 1.6 m width to obtain a cellulose acetate film. The end was knurled. And the lengthy cellulose acetate film of width 1.6m, length 6000m, and thickness 30micrometer obtained in this way is wound up in the length direction, and the laminated roll body 1 of the cellulose acetate film 1 is obtained. It was.
 (積層ロール体のエージング処理)
 その後、積層ロール体1の外周を、厚さ50μmのポリエチレン樹脂フィルムにアルミニウムが蒸着されている防湿フィルム包装材料を用いて、2重に包装し、巻き芯端部を輪ゴム留めして、積層ロール体1Aを作製した。
(Aging treatment of laminated roll body)
Thereafter, the outer periphery of the laminated roll body 1 is double-wrapped using a moisture-proof film packaging material in which aluminum is deposited on a polyethylene resin film having a thickness of 50 μm, and the end of the core is fastened with a rubber band. A body 1A was produced.
 次いで、作製した積層ロール体1Aを、50℃の定温環境下で3日間、エージング処理を施して、セルロースアセテートフィルム1を作製した。 Next, the produced laminated roll body 1A was subjected to an aging treatment for 3 days in a constant temperature environment of 50 ° C. to produce a cellulose acetate film 1.
 〔セルロースアセテートフィルム2~28の作製〕
 セルロースアセテートフィルム1の作製において、ステンレスバンド支持体からのウェブ剥離時の残留溶媒量、ウェブ剥離時のMD方向への延伸倍率、TD方向への延伸開始時の残留溶媒量、積層ロール体としてのエージング処理の有無、原料セルロースアセテートのアセチル基置換度、フィルムの膜厚、および、リターデーション上昇剤の種類の各製造条件を、下記の表2に示すように変更したこと以外は同様にして、セルロースアセテートフィルム2~28をそれぞれ作製した。なお、表2に記載のリターデーション上昇剤のうち、化合物(1-1)および化合物(1-4)は上述の構造を有するものであり、トリアジン化合物および棒状化合物は下記の構造を有するものである。
[Production of Cellulose Acetate Films 2-28]
In the production of the cellulose acetate film 1, the amount of residual solvent at the time of web peeling from the stainless steel band support, the stretching ratio in the MD direction at the time of web peeling, the residual solvent amount at the start of stretching in the TD direction, Except for changing the production conditions of the presence or absence of aging treatment, the acetyl group substitution degree of the raw material cellulose acetate, the film thickness of the film, and the type of retardation increasing agent as shown in Table 2 below, Cellulose acetate films 2 to 28 were produced. Of the retardation increasing agents listed in Table 2, compounds (1-1) and (1-4) have the structures described above, and triazine compounds and rod-shaped compounds have the following structures. is there.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000028
 〔セルロースエステルフィルムのリターデーションの評価〕
 上記で作製したセルロースエステルフィルムのそれぞれについて、面内方向のリターデーション値Ro、および、厚さ方向のリターデーション値Rtをそれぞれ測定した。結果を下記の表2に示す。
[Evaluation of retardation of cellulose ester film]
About each of the cellulose ester film produced above, the retardation value Ro in the in-plane direction and the retardation value Rt in the thickness direction were measured. The results are shown in Table 2 below.
 〔セルロースエステルフィルムのタフネスの評価〕
 上記で作製したセルロースエステルフィルムのそれぞれについて、下記の測定方法により測定を行い、MD方向およびTD方向のそれぞれのタフネスを算出した。
[Evaluation of toughness of cellulose ester film]
About each of the cellulose-ester film produced above, it measured with the following measuring method and calculated each toughness of MD direction and TD direction.
 1)光学フィルムを120mm(MD方向)×10mm(TD方向)に5枚切り出して、MD方向測定用の試験片とする。得られた試験片を、23℃55%RHの環境下で24時間調湿する。 1) Cut out five optical films into 120 mm (MD direction) × 10 mm (TD direction) to obtain test pieces for MD direction measurement. The obtained test piece is conditioned for 24 hours in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH.
 2)次いで、試験片の引張弾性率をJISK7127に記載の方法で測定する。引張り試験器は、オリエンテック(株)社製テンシロンRTC-1225を使用し、チャック間100mmで試験片の長手方向(MD方向)の上端部と下端部を挟み(挟みしろは、試験片の上端部と下端部でそれぞれ10mmずつ)、100mm/分の速度で試験片を長手方向(MD方向)に引っ張り、試験片が破断するときの応力(破断点応力T)と伸び(破断点伸度E)をそれぞれ測定し、合計5回(合計5枚分)測定する。測定は、23℃55%RHの環境下で行う。 2) Next, the tensile elastic modulus of the test piece is measured by the method described in JISK7127. Tensilon RTC-1225 manufactured by Orientec Co., Ltd. is used as the tensile tester, and the upper end and the lower end in the longitudinal direction (MD direction) of the test piece are sandwiched by 100 mm between the chucks. The test piece is pulled in the longitudinal direction (MD direction) at a speed of 100 mm / min at a rate of 100 mm / min at the center and the lower end, and stress (breaking point stress T) and elongation (breaking point elongation E) when the test piece breaks. ) Are measured for a total of 5 times (for a total of 5 sheets). The measurement is performed in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH.
 3)得られた破断点応力T(N/mmまたはMPa)の5回の測定値の最大値、破断点伸度E(%)の5回の測定値の最大値、および試験片の膜厚t(mm)をそれぞれ下記式に当てはめて、MD方向のタフネスを算出する。 3) The maximum value of five measured values of the stress at break T (N / mm 2 or MPa) obtained, the maximum value of five measured values of the elongation at break E (%), and the film of the test piece The thickness t (mm) is applied to the following formula to calculate the toughness in the MD direction.
 タフネス=破断点応力T(N/mmまたはMPa)×引張方向に対して直交する方向の試験片の断面積A(mm)×(破断点伸度E(%)/100)1/2
 試験片の断面積A(mm)=試験片の幅10(mm)×試験片の膜厚t(mm)
 同様に、光学フィルムのTD方向のタフネスは、光学フィルムを120mm(TD方向)×10mm(MD方向)の大きさに5枚切り出して、TD方向測定用の試験片を準備する。それらの試験片を用いて試験片の長手方向(TD方向)に引っ張る以外は上記と同様の測定を行い、TD方向のタフネスを算出する。
Toughness = stress at break T (N / mm 2 or MPa) × cross-sectional area A (mm 2 ) of test piece in a direction perpendicular to the tensile direction × (elongation at break E (%) / 100) 1/2
Cross-sectional area A (mm 2 ) of the test piece = width 10 (mm) of the test piece × film thickness t (mm) of the test piece
Similarly, for the TD direction toughness of the optical film, five optical films are cut into a size of 120 mm (TD direction) × 10 mm (MD direction) to prepare a test piece for TD direction measurement. The same measurement as described above is performed except that the test pieces are pulled in the longitudinal direction (TD direction) of the test piece, and the toughness in the TD direction is calculated.
 測定により得られた結果を下記の表2に示す。 The results obtained by the measurement are shown in Table 2 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
 《偏光板の作製》
 〔偏光子の作製〕
 平均重合度2400、ケン化度99.9モル%の厚さ50μmのポリビニルアルコールフィルムを、30℃の温水中に60秒間浸漬し膨潤させた。次いで、得られたフィルムを、ヨウ素/ヨウ化カリウム(質量比=0.5/8)の濃度0.3%の水溶液に浸漬し、3.0倍まで延伸させながら染色した。その後、得られたフィルムを、65℃のホウ酸エステル水溶液中で、トータルの延伸倍率が5.5となるように延伸した。その後、得られたフィルムを、40℃のオーブンにて3分間乾燥して、厚さ10μmの偏光子を得た。
<Production of polarizing plate>
(Production of polarizer)
A polyvinyl alcohol film having an average polymerization degree of 2400 and a saponification degree of 99.9 mol% and a thickness of 50 μm was immersed in warm water at 30 ° C. for 60 seconds to swell. Next, the obtained film was immersed in an aqueous solution of iodine / potassium iodide (mass ratio = 0.5 / 8) having a concentration of 0.3% and dyed while being stretched up to 3.0 times. Thereafter, the obtained film was stretched in a boric acid ester aqueous solution at 65 ° C. so that the total stretching ratio was 5.5. Thereafter, the obtained film was dried in an oven at 40 ° C. for 3 minutes to obtain a polarizer having a thickness of 10 μm.
 また、上記偏光子の作製において、未延伸の偏光子の膜厚を8μm、10μm、75μm、90μmにそれぞれ変更することにより、厚さ1.5μm、2μm、15μmまたは18μmの偏光子をさらに作製した。
〔紫外線硬化型接着剤液の調製〕
 下記の各成分を混合した後、脱泡して、紫外線硬化型接着剤液を調製した。なお、トリアリールスルホニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェートは、50%プロピレンカーボネート溶液として配合し、下記にはトリアリールスルホニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェートの固形分量を示した。
In the production of the polarizer, the thickness of the unstretched polarizer was changed to 8 μm, 10 μm, 75 μm, and 90 μm, respectively, thereby further producing a polarizer having a thickness of 1.5 μm, 2 μm, 15 μm, or 18 μm. .
[Preparation of UV curable adhesive solution]
Each of the following components was mixed and then defoamed to prepare an ultraviolet curable adhesive solution. Triarylsulfonium hexafluorophosphate was blended as a 50% propylene carbonate solution, and the solid content of triarylsulfonium hexafluorophosphate was shown below.
 3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル-3,4-エポキシシクロヘキサンカルボキシレート 45質量部
 エポリードGT-301(ダイセル化学社製の脂環式エポキシ樹脂) 40質量部
 1,4-ブタンジオールジグリシジルエーテル 15質量部
 トリアリールスルホニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート 2.3質量部
 9,10-ジブトキシアントラセン 0.1質量部
 1,4-ジエトキシナフタレン 2.0質量部
 〔偏光板の作製〕
 (偏光板1の作製)
 下記の方法に従って、図1に記載の構成からなる偏光板1(101)を作製した。カッコ内の数値は、図1に記載した各構成要素の番号を示す。
3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl-3,4-epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate 45 parts by mass Epolide GT-301 (alicyclic epoxy resin manufactured by Daicel Chemical Industries) 40 parts by mass 1,4-butanediol diglycidyl ether 15 parts by mass Triarylsulfonium hexafluorophosphate 2.3 parts by mass 9,10-dibutoxyanthracene 0.1 parts by mass 1,4-diethoxynaphthalene 2.0 parts by mass [Preparation of Polarizing Plate]
(Preparation of polarizing plate 1)
A polarizing plate 1 (101) having the configuration shown in FIG. 1 was produced according to the following method. The numerical value in parentheses indicates the number of each component described in FIG.
 まず、保護フィルムBであるセルロースエステルフィルム(105)として、上記で作製したセルロースエステルフィルム1を使用し、その表面にコロナ放電処理を施した。なお、コロナ放電処理の条件は、コロナ出力強度2.0kW、ライン速度18m/分とした。次いで、セルロースエステルフィルム1(105)のコロナ放電処理面に、上記で調製した紫外線硬化型接着剤液を、硬化後の膜厚が約3μmとなるようにバーコーターで塗工して光硬化型樹脂層(103B)を形成した。得られた光硬化型樹脂層(103B)に、上記で作製したポリビニルアルコール-ヨウ素系の偏光子(104、厚さ10μm)を貼合した。 First, as the cellulose ester film (105) as the protective film B, the cellulose ester film 1 prepared above was used, and the surface thereof was subjected to corona discharge treatment. The corona discharge treatment was performed at a corona output intensity of 2.0 kW and a line speed of 18 m / min. Next, the ultraviolet curable adhesive liquid prepared above is applied to the corona discharge treated surface of the cellulose ester film 1 (105) with a bar coater so that the film thickness after curing is about 3 μm, and is photocurable. A resin layer (103B) was formed. The polyvinyl alcohol-iodine polarizer (104, thickness 10 μm) produced above was bonded to the obtained photocurable resin layer (103B).
 次いで、保護フィルムA(102)として上記で作製したPETフィルム1を用い、その表面にコロナ放電処理を施した。コロナ放電処理の条件は、コロナ出力強度2.0kW、速度18m/分とした。 Next, the PET film 1 produced above was used as the protective film A (102), and the surface was subjected to corona discharge treatment. The conditions of the corona discharge treatment were a corona output intensity of 2.0 kW and a speed of 18 m / min.
 次いで、PETフィルム1(102)のコロナ放電処理面に、上記で調製した紫外線硬化型接着剤液を、硬化後の膜厚が約3μmとなるようにバーコーターで塗工して紫外線硬化型接着剤層(103A)を形成した。 Next, the UV curable adhesive solution prepared above is applied to the corona discharge treated surface of the PET film 1 (102) with a bar coater so that the film thickness after curing is about 3 μm. An agent layer (103A) was formed.
 この紫外線硬化型接着剤層(103A)に、セルロースエステルフィルム1(105)の片面に貼合された偏光子(104)を貼合して、保護フィルムA(PETフィルム、102)/紫外線硬化型接着剤層(103A)/偏光子(104)/紫外線硬化型接着剤層(103B)/保護フィルムB(セルロースエステルフィルム、105)が積層された積層体を得た。その際に、セルロースエステルフィルム(105)の遅相軸と偏光子(104)の吸収軸とが互いに直交するように貼合した。 A polarizer (104) bonded to one side of the cellulose ester film 1 (105) is bonded to the UV curable adhesive layer (103A), and a protective film A (PET film, 102) / UV curable type is bonded. A laminate in which the adhesive layer (103A) / polarizer (104) / ultraviolet curable adhesive layer (103B) / protective film B (cellulose ester film, 105) was laminated was obtained. In that case, it bonded so that the slow axis of a cellulose-ester film (105) and the absorption axis of a polarizer (104) might mutually orthogonally cross.
 この積層体の両面側から、ベルトコンベヤー付き紫外線照射装置(ランプは、フュージョンUVシステムズ社製のDバルブを使用)を用いて、積算光量が750mJ/cmとなるように紫外線を照射し、それぞれの紫外線硬化型接着剤層(103A,103B)を硬化させ、偏光板1(101)を作製した。 From both sides of this laminate, using a UV irradiation device with a belt conveyor (the lamp uses a D bulb manufactured by Fusion UV Systems), UV light was applied so that the integrated light amount was 750 mJ / cm 2. The UV curable adhesive layers (103A, 103B) were cured to produce polarizing plate 1 (101).
 〔偏光板2~48の作製〕
 上記偏光板1の作製において、保護フィルムAの種類、保護フィルムBの種類および偏光子の膜厚を、下記の表3に記載の組み合わせに変更した以外は同様にして、偏光板2~48を作製した。
[Preparation of polarizing plates 2 to 48]
In the production of the polarizing plate 1, the polarizing plates 2 to 48 were prepared in the same manner except that the type of the protective film A, the type of the protective film B, and the thickness of the polarizer were changed to the combinations shown in Table 3 below. Produced.
 〔液晶表示装置の作成〕
 VA型液晶表示装置の視認側の偏光板をはがし、液晶セルに上記で作製した偏光板をブチルアクリレートを主成分とした粘着剤を介して貼り合わせて、VA型液晶表示装置を作製した。
[Creation of liquid crystal display device]
The polarizing plate on the viewing side of the VA type liquid crystal display device was peeled off, and the polarizing plate prepared above was bonded to the liquid crystal cell via an adhesive mainly composed of butyl acrylate to produce a VA type liquid crystal display device.
 〔偏光板のリワーク性の評価〕
 上記で作製した偏光板1~48について、下記に示す方法に従って、リワーク性の評価を行った。
[Evaluation of reworkability of polarizing plate]
For the polarizing plates 1 to 48 produced above, the reworkability was evaluated according to the following method.
 上記で作製した偏光板を、それぞれ20cm×20cmの大きさの正方形に断裁し、アクリル系接着剤を用いてガラス基板と貼り合わせた。次いで、貼り合わせた偏光板を角の部分から5Nの強さでガラスから剥がした。この作業を1種類のサンプルについて10枚の偏光板で行い、偏光板に裂け目が入って、完全に剥離されなかった偏光板の枚数を数えた。そして、以下の基準でランク付けして、偏光板のリワーク性を評価した。結果を下記の表3に示す:
 ◎:完全に剥離されなかった偏光板の枚数が、0枚
 ○:完全に剥離されなかった偏光板の枚数が、1~2枚
 △:完全に剥離されなかった偏光板の枚数が、3~4枚
 ×:完全に剥離されなかった偏光板の枚数が、5枚以上
 なお、偏光板のリワーク性は、△のレベル以上であれば実用上問題ないが、○のレベル以上であることが好ましく、◎のレベルであることが特に好ましい。
The polarizing plates produced above were cut into squares each having a size of 20 cm × 20 cm and bonded to a glass substrate using an acrylic adhesive. Next, the bonded polarizing plate was peeled from the glass with a strength of 5N from the corner. This operation was performed with 10 polarizing plates for one type of sample, and the number of polarizing plates that were not peeled completely due to tears in the polarizing plate was counted. And it ranked by the following references | standards and evaluated the rework property of the polarizing plate. The results are shown in Table 3 below:
A: The number of polarizing plates that were not completely peeled was 0. ○: The number of polarizing plates that were not completely peeled was 1 to 2. Δ: The number of polarizing plates that were not completely peeled was 3 to 3. 4 sheets ×: The number of polarizing plates that were not completely peeled was 5 or more. Note that the reworkability of the polarizing plates is practically acceptable as long as it is at the level of Δ, but is preferably at least the level of ○. And ◎ are particularly preferred.
 〔偏光板の薄膜適性の評価〕
 作製した各偏光板の総膜厚を測定し、下記の基準に従って薄膜適性の評価を行った。△以上のランクであれば、ディスプレイの薄型化の要請に対し、偏光板として適性を有していると判定した:
 ◎:偏光板の総膜厚が、100μm未満である
 ○:偏光板の総膜厚が、100μm以上、150μm以下である
 △:偏光板の総膜厚が、150μmよりも厚く、180μm未満である
 ×:偏光板の層膜厚が、180μm以上である
 以上により得られた各評価結果を、下記の表3に示す。
[Evaluation of suitability of thin film for polarizing plate]
The total film thickness of each produced polarizing plate was measured, and the suitability of the thin film was evaluated according to the following criteria. If it was a rank of △ or higher, it was determined that it had suitability as a polarizing plate in response to a request for thinning the display:
A: The total film thickness of the polarizing plate is less than 100 μm. O: The total film thickness of the polarizing plate is 100 μm or more and 150 μm or less. Δ: The total film thickness of the polarizing plate is thicker than 150 μm and less than 180 μm. X: The layer thickness of the polarizing plate is 180 μm or more. Each evaluation result obtained as described above is shown in Table 3 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
 表3に記載の結果より明らかなように、本発明で規定する構成からなる本発明の偏光板は、比較例に対し、保護フィルムBとして薄膜化されたセルロースエステルフィルムを用いた場合であっても(つまり、薄膜適性を有しつつ)、リワーク性に優れるものであることがわかる。なお、上記で作製した偏光板の引き裂き強度を比較したところ、偏光板28(アセチル基置換度2.45のセルロースアセテートを用いたセルロースエステルフィルムNo.12を用いたもの)が、強度的に弱く、引裂けやすかった。また、偏光板31、37、44を搭載した表示装置はそれ以外の偏光板と比べて斜めから観察した時に色味の変化が大きく、また、偏光板36もそれ以外の偏光板と比べると斜めから観察した時の色味の変化が若干劣っていた。 As is clear from the results shown in Table 3, the polarizing plate of the present invention having the structure defined in the present invention is a case where a thinned cellulose ester film is used as the protective film B for the comparative example. (That is, while having thin film suitability), it is found to be excellent in reworkability. In addition, when the tear strength of the polarizing plate produced above was compared, the polarizing plate 28 (using cellulose ester film No. 12 using cellulose acetate having an acetyl group substitution degree of 2.45) was weak in strength. It was easy to tear. In addition, the display device on which the polarizing plates 31, 37, and 44 are mounted has a large change in color when observed obliquely as compared with the other polarizing plates, and the polarizing plate 36 is also oblique compared with the other polarizing plates. The color change when observed from was slightly inferior.
 本出願は、2013年7月1日に出願された日本特許出願番号2013-138329号に基づいており、その開示内容は、参照により全体として組み入れられている。 This application is based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2013-138329 filed on July 1, 2013, the disclosure of which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
 1 溶解釜
 3、6、12、15 濾過器
 4、13 ストック釜
 5、14 送液ポンプ
 8、16 導管
 10 紫外線吸収剤仕込釜
 20 合流管
 21 混合機
 30 加圧ダイ
 31 金属ベルト
 32 ウェブ
 33 剥離位置
 34 テンター延伸装置
 35 乾燥装置
 41 仕込釜
 42 ストック釜
 43 ポンプ
 44 濾過器
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Melting pot 3, 6, 12, 15 Filter 4, 13 Stock pot 5, 14 Liquid feed pump 8, 16 Conduit 10 Ultraviolet absorber preparation pot 20 Merge pipe 21 Mixer 30 Pressure die 31 Metal belt 32 Web 33 Peeling Position 34 Tenter stretching device 35 Drying device 41 Feeding pot 42 Stock pot 43 Pump 44 Filter

Claims (12)

  1.  保護フィルムA、偏光子および保護フィルムBをこの順に有する偏光板であって、
     前記保護フィルムAがポリエステルからなるポリエステルフィルムであり、
     前記ポリエステルフィルムは、MD方向およびTD方向の少なくとも一方について5.0~8.0GPaの弾性率を有し、
     前記保護フィルムBがセルロースエステルからなるセルロースエステルフィルムであり、
     前記セルロースエステルフィルムは、
     (1)膜厚が15~60μmの範囲内であり、
     (2)MD方向およびTD方向の双方についてタフネスが10~20である、
    ことを特徴とする、偏光板。
    A polarizing plate having a protective film A, a polarizer and a protective film B in this order,
    The protective film A is a polyester film made of polyester,
    The polyester film has an elastic modulus of 5.0 to 8.0 GPa in at least one of the MD direction and the TD direction,
    The protective film B is a cellulose ester film made of cellulose ester,
    The cellulose ester film is
    (1) The film thickness is in the range of 15-60 μm,
    (2) The toughness is 10 to 20 in both the MD direction and the TD direction.
    The polarizing plate characterized by the above-mentioned.
  2.  前記ポリエステルがポリエチレンテレフタレートである、請求項1に記載の偏光板。 The polarizing plate according to claim 1, wherein the polyester is polyethylene terephthalate.
  3.  前記保護フィルムAの膜厚が40~100μmの範囲内である、請求項1または2に記載の偏光板。 The polarizing plate according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the thickness of the protective film A is in the range of 40 to 100 µm.
  4.  前記保護フィルムBについて、下記式(i)及び(ii)で定義される面内方向のリターデーション値Roが30~70nmの範囲内であり、厚さ方向のリターデーション値Rtが100~140nmの範囲内である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板:
     式(i):Ro=(n-n)×d(nm)
     式(ii):Rt={(n+n)/2-n}×d(nm)
     式中、nは、フィルムの面内方向において屈折率が最大になる方向xにおける屈折率を表す。nは、フィルムの面内方向において、前記方向xと直交する方向yにおける屈折率を表す。nは、フィルムの厚さ方向zにおける屈折率を表す。dは、フィルムの厚さ(nm)を表す。測定は、23℃・55%RHの環境下、590nmの測定波長で行う。〕
    For the protective film B, the in-plane retardation value Ro defined by the following formulas (i) and (ii) is in the range of 30 to 70 nm, and the retardation value Rt in the thickness direction is 100 to 140 nm. The polarizing plate according to any one of claims 1 to 3, which is within a range:
    Formula (i): Ro = (n x −n y ) × d (nm)
    Formula (ii): Rt = {(n x + n y ) / 2−n z } × d (nm)
    Wherein, n x represents a refractive index in the direction x in which the refractive index in the plane direction is maximized in the film. n y, in-plane direction of the film, the refractive index in the direction y perpendicular to the direction x. nz represents the refractive index in the thickness direction z of the film. d represents the thickness (nm) of the film. The measurement is performed at a measurement wavelength of 590 nm in an environment of 23 ° C. and 55% RH. ]
  5.  前記セルロースエステルがセルロースアセテートを主成分として含む、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板。 The polarizing plate according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the cellulose ester contains cellulose acetate as a main component.
  6.  前記セルロースアセテートのアセチル基置換度が2.1~2.95である、請求項5に記載の偏光板。 The polarizing plate according to claim 5, wherein the cellulose acetate has a degree of acetyl group substitution of 2.1 to 2.95.
  7.  前記保護フィルムBがリターデーション上昇剤を含む、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板。 The polarizing plate according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the protective film B contains a retardation increasing agent.
  8.  前記リターデーション上昇剤が、下記一般式(1):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
     式中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、炭素数1~3のアルキル基またはハロゲン原子を表し;
     Xは、それぞれ独立して、-O-または-O-C(=O)-(このとき、一般式(1)におけるフェニル骨格にOが結合する)を表し;
     RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、
    Xが-O-のとき、ヒドロキシル基、エステル基もしくは置換されていてもよい芳香族基で置換されていてもよいアルキル基;またはグリシジル基を表し、
    Xが-O-C(=O)-のとき、ヒドロキシル基、エステル基もしくは置換されていてもよい芳香族基で置換されていてもよいアルキル基;または置換されていてもよい芳香族基を表す、
    で表される化合物を含む、請求項7に記載の偏光板。
    The retardation increasing agent is represented by the following general formula (1):
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
    In the formula, R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a halogen atom;
    Each X independently represents —O— or —O—C (═O) — (wherein O is bonded to the phenyl skeleton in the general formula (1));
    R 5 and R 6 are each independently
    When X is —O—, it represents a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with an optionally substituted aromatic group; or a glycidyl group,
    When X is —O—C (═O) —, a hydroxyl group, an ester group or an alkyl group which may be substituted with an optionally substituted aromatic group; or an optionally substituted aromatic group To express,
    The polarizing plate of Claim 7 containing the compound represented by these.
  9.  前記保護フィルムAおよび前記保護フィルムBが、ともに紫外線硬化型接着剤によって前記偏光子と貼合されている、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板。 The polarizing plate according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the protective film A and the protective film B are both bonded to the polarizer with an ultraviolet curable adhesive.
  10.  前記偏光子の膜厚が2~15μmの範囲内である、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板。 10. The polarizing plate according to claim 1, wherein the thickness of the polarizer is in the range of 2 to 15 μm.
  11.  厚さが80~150μmの範囲内である、請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板。 The polarizing plate according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the thickness is in the range of 80 to 150 µm.
  12.  請求項1~11のいずれか1項に記載の偏光板を具備している、液晶表示装置。 A liquid crystal display device comprising the polarizing plate according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
PCT/JP2014/066330 2013-07-01 2014-06-19 Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using same WO2015001980A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015525141A JPWO2015001980A1 (en) 2013-07-01 2014-06-19 Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same
KR1020157036356A KR101763509B1 (en) 2013-07-01 2014-06-19 Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using same

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013138329 2013-07-01
JP2013-138329 2013-07-01

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015001980A1 true WO2015001980A1 (en) 2015-01-08

Family

ID=52143558

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/066330 WO2015001980A1 (en) 2013-07-01 2014-06-19 Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using same

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2015001980A1 (en)
KR (1) KR101763509B1 (en)
WO (1) WO2015001980A1 (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016052226A1 (en) * 2014-10-03 2016-04-07 Dic株式会社 Epoxy ester compound, cellulose ester resin composition, optical film, and liquid-crystal display device
JP2016173467A (en) * 2015-03-17 2016-09-29 Dic株式会社 Optical film and liquid crystal display device
WO2017082133A1 (en) * 2015-11-11 2017-05-18 住友化学株式会社 Polarizing plate and ips mode liquid crystal display device
JP2017191153A (en) * 2016-04-12 2017-10-19 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
WO2019069755A1 (en) * 2017-10-03 2019-04-11 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and production method for polarizing plate
WO2019069756A1 (en) * 2017-10-03 2019-04-11 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and production method for polarizing plate
JP7240092B2 (en) 2017-10-03 2023-03-15 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and method for manufacturing polarizing plate

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004205572A (en) * 2002-12-24 2004-07-22 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using it
JP2004219620A (en) * 2003-01-14 2004-08-05 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Polarizing plate protective film, and polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same,
JP2008102475A (en) * 2006-09-21 2008-05-01 Fujifilm Corp Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP2008203400A (en) * 2007-02-19 2008-09-04 Nitto Denko Corp Polarizing plate with surface protective film, liquid crystal panel with surface protective film and image display apparatus
JP2012048181A (en) * 2010-08-26 2012-03-08 Sanritsutsu:Kk Polarizer and liquid crystal display device using the same
JP2012088479A (en) * 2010-10-19 2012-05-10 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Polarizing plate
JP2012137723A (en) * 2010-09-30 2012-07-19 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Liquid crystal display device
JP2012185519A (en) * 2010-09-03 2012-09-27 Nitto Denko Corp Adhesive optical film, production method of the same, and image display device

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI494359B (en) * 2009-12-07 2015-08-01 Dainippon Ink & Chemicals A cellulose ester resin composition, an optical film using the same, and a polarizing plate for a liquid crystal display device
JP2012018341A (en) * 2010-07-09 2012-01-26 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004205572A (en) * 2002-12-24 2004-07-22 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using it
JP2004219620A (en) * 2003-01-14 2004-08-05 Konica Minolta Holdings Inc Polarizing plate protective film, and polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using the same,
JP2008102475A (en) * 2006-09-21 2008-05-01 Fujifilm Corp Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP2008203400A (en) * 2007-02-19 2008-09-04 Nitto Denko Corp Polarizing plate with surface protective film, liquid crystal panel with surface protective film and image display apparatus
JP2012048181A (en) * 2010-08-26 2012-03-08 Sanritsutsu:Kk Polarizer and liquid crystal display device using the same
JP2012185519A (en) * 2010-09-03 2012-09-27 Nitto Denko Corp Adhesive optical film, production method of the same, and image display device
JP2012137723A (en) * 2010-09-30 2012-07-19 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Liquid crystal display device
JP2012088479A (en) * 2010-10-19 2012-05-10 Konica Minolta Opto Inc Polarizing plate

Cited By (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102399287B1 (en) 2014-10-03 2022-05-19 디아이씨 가부시끼가이샤 Epoxy ester compound, cellulose ester resin composition, optical film, and liquid-crystal display device
US9815973B2 (en) 2014-10-03 2017-11-14 Dic Corporation Epoxy ester compound, cellulose ester resin composition, optical film, and liquid-crystal display device
KR20170066363A (en) * 2014-10-03 2017-06-14 디아이씨 가부시끼가이샤 Epoxy ester compound, cellulose ester resin composition, optical film, and liquid-crystal display device
WO2016052226A1 (en) * 2014-10-03 2016-04-07 Dic株式会社 Epoxy ester compound, cellulose ester resin composition, optical film, and liquid-crystal display device
JP5971538B1 (en) * 2014-10-03 2016-08-17 Dic株式会社 Epoxy ester compound, cellulose ester resin composition, optical film and liquid crystal display device
JP2016173467A (en) * 2015-03-17 2016-09-29 Dic株式会社 Optical film and liquid crystal display device
WO2017082133A1 (en) * 2015-11-11 2017-05-18 住友化学株式会社 Polarizing plate and ips mode liquid crystal display device
JP2017090700A (en) * 2015-11-11 2017-05-25 住友化学株式会社 Polarizing plate and IPS mode liquid crystal display device
CN108351459A (en) * 2015-11-11 2018-07-31 住友化学株式会社 Polarization plates and IPS mode LCDs
JP2017191153A (en) * 2016-04-12 2017-10-19 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP7240092B2 (en) 2017-10-03 2023-03-15 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and method for manufacturing polarizing plate
JP2019066716A (en) * 2017-10-03 2019-04-25 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and method for manufacturing polarizing plate
JP2019066715A (en) * 2017-10-03 2019-04-25 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and method for manufacturing polarizing plate
CN111164473A (en) * 2017-10-03 2020-05-15 日东电工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and method for manufacturing polarizing plate
CN111183378A (en) * 2017-10-03 2020-05-19 日东电工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and method for manufacturing polarizing plate
JP7240091B2 (en) 2017-10-03 2023-03-15 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and method for manufacturing polarizing plate
TWI771503B (en) * 2017-10-03 2022-07-21 日商日東電工股份有限公司 Polarizing plate, image display device, and manufacturing method of polarizing plate
WO2019069755A1 (en) * 2017-10-03 2019-04-11 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and production method for polarizing plate
JP7240090B2 (en) 2017-10-03 2023-03-15 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and method for manufacturing polarizing plate
WO2019069756A1 (en) * 2017-10-03 2019-04-11 日東電工株式会社 Polarizing plate, image display device, and production method for polarizing plate

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20160013967A (en) 2016-02-05
KR101763509B1 (en) 2017-07-31
JPWO2015001980A1 (en) 2017-02-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2015001980A1 (en) Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using same
WO2015076101A1 (en) Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device using same
JP6245260B2 (en) Retardation film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP2015094823A (en) Polarizing plate with cellulose ester film
WO2014203637A1 (en) Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
WO2009139284A1 (en) Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
WO2014136529A1 (en) Optical film, polarizing plate containing same and vertical alignment liquid crystal display device
WO2014188935A1 (en) Phase difference film, polarizing plate using such phase difference film, and image display device
JP6079008B2 (en) Polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP6277960B2 (en) Retardation film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP5310724B2 (en) Polarizing plate, liquid crystal display
JPWO2015098491A1 (en) Cellulose ester film, method for producing the same, and polarizing plate
WO2014068802A1 (en) Optical film, method for producing optical film, polarizing plate and liquid crystal display device
JP5633300B2 (en) Method for producing long polymer film, λ / 4 plate, polarizing plate, and stereoscopic image display device
JP2011016323A (en) Method for manufacturing acrylic resin film, acrylic resin film, polarization plate, and liquid crystal display device
WO2011055590A1 (en) Protective film roll for liquid crystal polarization plate and manufacturing method thereof
JP2014228760A (en) Polarizing plate-protecting film, polarizing plate, and liquid crystal display device
TW202108356A (en) Method for manufacturing polarizer and polarizer has enhanced durability in a high temperature and high humidity environment
WO2015146599A1 (en) Retardation film, polarizing plate using same, and display device
WO2015104940A1 (en) Cellulose ester film and cellulose ester film manufacturing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14819661

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20157036356

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2015525141

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14819661

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1